JP6870654B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which a display device or a rotating body is used to execute a variable display of a pattern.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, so that the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the pattern after the reel has stopped rotating corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform a lottery process, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing a lottery process.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a random number updating means for updating specific random number information and a random number updating means.
A random number acquisition means for storing the specific random number information in the lottery storage area when an acquisition opportunity occurs, and
An information updating means for deriving the numerical information as a result of subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored.
The numerical information of the result derived by the information updating means corresponds to the result after being changed from the minimum value to the maximum value by subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information of the lottery storage area. When the numerical information is obtained, the information in the predetermined storage area is set to be the predetermined information, and the numerical information as a result derived by the information updating means is obtained by subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information in the lottery storage area. When the numerical information corresponding to the result of not changing from the minimum value to the maximum value due to the execution is obtained, the means for making the information in the predetermined storage area the specific information, and
A means for executing a winning correspondence process for giving a predetermined privilege to a player when the information in the predetermined storage area is the predetermined information when the subtraction is performed .
With
The lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits.
The specific random information Ri certain number of bits der smaller than the number of said predetermined bits,
As the lottery value information,
The first lottery value information, which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is larger than the maximum value due to the specific number of bits, and
The second lottery value information which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is equal to or less than the maximum value according to the specific number of bits, and
Is characterized by the existence of.

According to the present invention, the lottery process can be preferably performed.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in an image display apparatus, and the display content of a stop order in a combined display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of a power failure executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the random number circuit group provided in the main control board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st to 12th shared random number circuit and the 1st to 4th dedicated random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the random number acquisition process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for 1st RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the index value which the winning probability is different among the set value of (a)-(c) "1"-"6". It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the offset table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is an assembly perspective view of the left reel. (A) It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) is the figure which shows the drive characteristic of a stepping motor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the excitation order table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the required drive characteristic. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceleration table. It is a flowchart which shows the acceleration process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the motor control processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart which shows the flow of the drive control of a reel when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the reel is rotating, and the supply of the operating power is restarted. It is a flowchart which shows the re-acceleration process at the time of a reel production executed by the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the mode that each reel is rerotated after the execution of the reel production (a) to (i). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state and the game section existing in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition lottery process for the false precursor state executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart which shows the state of transition to an advantageous section and return to a normal section. It is a flowchart which shows the transition lottery process for a chance state executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a chance state executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the lottery table for low probability, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the lottery table for high probability. (A1)-(a4), (b1)-(b4) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the handling of numerical information at the time of execution of the transition lottery process to the ART state. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing for false precursor state executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (f) are time charts showing how a false precursor effect and a chance effect are executed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a false precursor effect in an image display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of a chance effect in an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game start processing in the bonus executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bonus state executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the storage area of the main side RAM, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the storage area of the production side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the constant lottery processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the common addition table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the direct addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the direct addition process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how the number of additional games is directly added by the constant lottery process and the direct addition process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) A loop lottery table, (b) explanatory diagram for demonstrating various continuous lottery tables, and (c) explanatory diagram for demonstrating B loop lottery table. .. It is a flowchart which shows the process for A loop executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for B loop executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ART state processing executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart for demonstrating the outline of the effect which occurs in the ART state. It is a flowchart which shows the extraordinary effect control process executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for direct addition effect executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for A loop production executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the special addition effect executed by the effect side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of special addition production. It is a flowchart which shows the special addition effect processing executed by the effect side MPU. (A) to (d) It is a time chart which shows the mode that the expectation effect and the special addition effect are executed when the A loop occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for B loop production executed by the production side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the state that the special freeze effect is executed when the B loop (a)-(c) B loop occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the stock release processing executed in the production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display apparatus in the ART state (a)-(c). (A) to (g) are time charts showing how various release effects are executed. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for an ending effect executed by the effect side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display apparatus in the situation where the ending effect (a), (b) is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending the ending effect executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze setting process executed in the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the state that the ending effect (a)-(f) is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section executed by the effect side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of a bonus winning announcement image, and (b) is explanatory diagram for explaining the content of a bonus type announcement image. It is a time chart which shows the state that the advantageous maintenance section progresses from (a) to (i). It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how the management results of the game history are displayed using the combined display unit. It is a flowchart which shows the occurrence management process of the pseudo-bonus which is executed in the main MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process of the pseudo-bonus executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus start processing executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the initial continuation game number table, and (b) is explanatory diagram for demonstrating the transition condition game number table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the storage area of a main RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the game start processing in the pseudo-bonus executed by the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the 1st addition table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the 2nd addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus progress process executed by the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows how the handling of the number of additional games changes according to the situation of the ART winning flag in the pseudo-bonus state (a) to (f). It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing for pseudo-bonus executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the pre-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo-bonus state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st to 4th addition tables in 3rd Embodiment (a)-(d). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the index correspondence table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st to 4th compressed data (a) to (d). It is a flowchart which shows the addition lottery processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the addition index executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the random number circuit group provided in the main control board in 5th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for false precursor state executed by the effect side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus notification processing during the ending which is executed in the production side MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a power failure executed by the main MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation determination process which is executed in the main MPU in tenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each history area provided in the main RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation monitoring process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the direct addition process executed by the main MPU in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the direct addition process executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for chance state executed in the main MPU in 13th Embodiment. (A1) to (a5), (b1) to (b5) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the handling of numerical information at the time of execution of the transition lottery process to the ART state.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the slot machine 10, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while a game medium such as a medal or a virtual medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state in which they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as granting and managing the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting states of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion unit 57, which is operated to change within the range of "setting 6", is provided. The setting state of the slot machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and is arbitrary as long as there are a plurality of stages.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 57 and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned on. By starting the supply of the operating power to the slot machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of the operating power to the MPU 72 of the main controller 70), it is possible to change the setting state of the slot machine 10. It becomes a changeable state. Then, each time the reset button 56 is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is changed step by step in ascending order in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the reset button 56 is operated in the state of "setting 6", it is updated to "setting 1". Further, the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion unit 57 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the ON operation position to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned off after the start lever 41 is operated, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played in the state of the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the reset button 56 is operated after the changeable state ends.

The setting state of the slot machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the slot machine 10, and the larger n of "setting n" (n is an integer of "1" to "6"), the larger the value (that is, the setting). (The higher the value), the higher the advantage. Specifically, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus state (BB state and RB state), and the higher the winning probability of the small winning combination that triggers the granting of the game medium. It is set.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "20" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main control device 70 described later from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in such a state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 32L), and " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are seven types (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of game media bet and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of granting the game medium, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the gaming state is granted.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R Subline SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes in which the game medium is given include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. There is. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the first supplementary prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second supplementary prize is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the third supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the case of any of the first to third supplementary prizes, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell is won. Will be. If any of the first to second bell prizes is won, the number of game media to be granted is "11".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. It becomes. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second watermelon wins. Will be. If any of the first and second watermelon prizes is awarded, the number of game media to be granted is "5". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of which of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

Normal replay prize, 1st chance replay prize, 2nd chance replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 1st There are 2RT replay prizes, 1st fall replay prizes and 2nd fall replay prizes. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, or the main line ML. In the above, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, a normal replay prize is won.

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay It will be a prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay It will be a prize.

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the 1st RT replay prize is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT replay prize is won. Will be.

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first fall replay It will be a prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second fall replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, a replay privilege that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is given. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game.

Of the various replay prizes described above, the 1st RT replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only serve as an opportunity to grant the replay prize privilege, but also as an opportunity to shift to the lottery mode. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the types of the winning combination to be drawn and the winning probability of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It occurs when the replay prize that triggers the transition to the lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described in detail later.

There are 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, 3rd BB prize, 4th BB prize, 1st RB prize and 2nd RB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the first BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a 2BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a 3BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a 4BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the first RB It will be a prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second RB It will be a prize.

When the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB prize or the second RB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to the bonus state. The bonus state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit number of games is higher than in the gaming states other than the bonus state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and when the winning combination is won, each The first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in the other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase value of the game medium per unit number of games is higher than in the game state other than the bonus state. In addition, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than that in other game states, and in the bonus state, the number of game media per unit game is larger than that in the game states other than the bonus state. If the expected net increase value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be larger than that in the other game states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the end condition is that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). Is set as. In addition, when the number of games executed in the BB state becomes the number of BB end reference games, the end condition may be satisfied.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the end condition is that the total number of game media given after the RB state is started is equal to or more than the RB end reference number (specifically, "150"). Is set as. This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is more advantageous for the player than the RB state. In addition, when the number of games executed in the RB state becomes the number of RB end reference games, the end condition may be satisfied. In this case, by setting the number of RB end reference games to be smaller than the number of BB end reference games, it is possible to make the BB state more advantageous to the player than the RB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. That is, the image display device 63 executes the display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at positions below the display window units 21L, 21M, and 21R, and is a target of granting when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified content is performed, and further, the management result of the game history is notified. A combined display unit 66 for displaying the game section and an advantageous section display unit 67 for displaying the game section corresponding to the advantageous section are provided. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction to provide a combined display unit 66 and one light emitting unit. The advantageous section display unit 67 and the like are aggregated.

If any of the small winning combination prizes (1st to 3rd supplementary prizes, 1st to 2nd bell prizes, 1st to 2nd watermelon prizes or cherry prizes) corresponding to the granting of the game medium are established, the small prizes are established. At the end of the game in which the winning combination is established, the number of game media granted corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, when any of the first to third supplementary prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. Notifies that the game medium of "1" has been given. When any of the first to second bell prizes is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, so that the game medium of "11" is displayed. It is notified that it has been granted. Further, when any of the first and second watermelon prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, so that "5" is displayed. It is notified that the game medium of "" has been added. Further, when the cherry winning is established, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is given. Is notified. On the other hand, even if a prize without a game medium such as one of the replay prizes, one of the BB prizes, and one of the RB prizes is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not performed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. The 2 stops are the middle reel 32M and the 3rd stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order is the 1st stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the 1st stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is There is an arbitrary stop order and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 includes the winning combination including the first bell winning data in the winning combination process, the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, and the second RT replay winning data. It can be executed when the winning combination is won, when the winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, or when the winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a winning combination including the first bell winning combination is won, the first bell is won when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Is established. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given to the player as described above.

When a winning combination including the 1st RT replay winning data is won, the 1st RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Then, when the 1st RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1st RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any of the replay winning data (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay winnings) than in the normal mode. .. In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. .. Then, when the 2nd RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 2nd RT mode in which it is easier to win a role including any of the replay winning data (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay winnings) than in the 1st RT mode. To do.

When a combination including the first fall replay winning data is won, the first fall replay winning is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Reel. If the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay prize, the transition to this normal mode can be avoided. .. In addition, when a winning combination including the second fall replay winning data is won, the second fall replay winning is won when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Avoided. If the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode will shift from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize, the transition to the first RT mode should be avoided. Can be done.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed corresponding to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, the reels are displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the notification content of the stop order, the player can pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the advantageous section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is an advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the player to establish an advantageous prize when the winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a section corresponding to either a section in which the order is notified or a section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher than that in the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a section in which the stop order of the above is not notified, and the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is lower than that of the advantageous section, or a section in which the transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on to start notifying that the section is advantageous. Further, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is established, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off to end the notification that the section is advantageous. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the section is advantageous. Further, the combined display unit 66 provided collectively in the common display area 68 is turned on when the game medium is added and turned off at the start of the next game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Is turned on when the stop order of is displayed on the image display device 63, and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous for the player, the advantageous section display unit in the common display area 68 is in an advantageous section. It is possible to positively cause a situation in which only 67 is lit, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the advantageous section display unit 67 for the manager of the game hall.

In the advantageous section, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the advantageous section display unit 67 is maintained, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display unit 67 may perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises a back surface portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in the board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. The MPU 72 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion 83 is subsequently separated. It is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again by putting the case in the combined state. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63 at the front door 12. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box, similarly to the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the medal insertion The insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operations of the credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49, and the operation of the settlement button 51 are detected. Settlement detection sensor 51a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 53, reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and setting that detects that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion unit 57. Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the advantageous section display unit 67, the effect control device 90, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. .. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permitted state and the reception prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to be given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the advantageous section display unit 67 so that the advantageous section is notified when the section is advantageous. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In that case, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. To be done.

Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 92, directing side ROM 93, and directing side RAM 94.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on weight process is executed (step S101). In the power-on weight process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) for the weight elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the image display device 63 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 74 is permitted (step S102).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned on (step S103). When the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned ON (step S103: YES), a process for setting the set value of the slot machine 10 is executed. Specifically, first, all clear processing is executed (step S104). In the all clear process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, in the main RAM 74, an area for storing the set value of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the slot machine is in the bonus state, and data indicating the total number of game media granted in the bonus state are stored. Area, area where data indicating game status is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of ART state is stored, area where data indicating game section is stored, data of game history management result is stored Clear each area of the main RAM 74 including the area that has been set to "0". Then, the initial settings are made for each of these areas. As a result, when all clear processing is executed, the normal game state is set regardless of the state before the power is cut off and the normal section is set, and the state before the power is cut off is triggered by the occurrence of an abnormality and the game progresses. If is in a regulated state, the abnormal state is canceled. Further, in step S104, the initial setting is performed after the various registers of the main MPU 72 are also cleared to "0". It should be noted that the area (specifically, the total number of games counter 74a and the advantageous number of games counter 74b) in which the data of the management result of the game history is stored may be excluded from the target of clearing "0" in the all clearing process. .. Further, even when the operation for changing the setting state of the slot machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 56 is not pressed, the slot is not executed without clearing all of the main RAM 74. The configuration may be such that the clearing process is executed when the operation for changing the setting state of the machine 10 is performed and the reset button 56 is pressed.

After that, the set value update process is executed (step S105). In the set value update process, the current set value is first displayed on the credit display unit 65. Since the clearing process (step S104) is executed before the setting value updating process is executed, the credit display unit 65 is displayed corresponding to "setting 1" at the start of the setting value updating process. .. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "setting 6", the set value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value update process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends.

After executing the set value update process, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S106). In the advantageous section initialization process, a process of initializing information about the advantageous section is executed. As a result, when the set value update process is executed, the game section is surely set to the normal section. After executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the normal process (FIG. 13) described later (step S107).

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S103: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S108). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S108: YES), the checksum calculation process is executed (step S109). The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a calculation method in which all the numerical values of the storage area for which the checksum is calculated are added. The checksum calculation method is the same as the checksum calculation method in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) described later is stored in the main RAM 74, and the storage area of the main RAM 74 in which the checksum is stored is a calculation target when calculating the checksum. Is excluded from the storage area. That is, when calculating the checksum, a part of the storage area in the main RAM 74 is the calculation target. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted. This is a storage area in which information is not basically rewritten when power supply such as backup power to the main RAM 74 is continued until the process of step S109 is executed. Therefore, if the information of the main RAM 74 has not been changed between the time when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the time when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted, the main RAM 74 The checksum of is the same as immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. The storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set in the main RAM 74. After that, the checksum calculated in the power failure process (FIG. 12) executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped is read, and the read checksum is the read checksum. It is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum calculated in step S109 (step S110).

If the checksums match (step S110: YES), it is determined whether or not the set value is normal (step S111). When the set value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108, S110, and S111, it means that the power failure processing (FIG. 12) at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, on condition that the reset button 56 is pressed (step S112: YES), a clearing process other than the set value is executed (step S113). In the clearing process, the initial setting is performed after clearing "0" in an area other than the area for storing the set value of the slot machine 10 in the main RAM 74. After that, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107).

On the other hand, when the reset button 56 is not pressed (step S112: NO), the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is mainly used. By returning to the register of the side MPU 72, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 is returned to the state before the power supply is cut off (step S114). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S115).

After that, the clear process for reel control (step S116) and the return address adjustment process (step S117) are executed. The contents of these processes will be described later. After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 92 (step S118), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S119).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of step S108, step S110, and step S111, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S120), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is in the OFF state (step S121), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S122). Then, it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the all clear process (step S104). The operation prohibition process is not released even if the clear process (step S113) other than the set value is executed, but either the all clear process (step S104) or the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is performed. It may be configured to be released when it is executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 milliseconds, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process (FIG. 13) described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing. The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a power failure process. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed (step S301), and if the transmission is not completed (step S301: NO), this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is started. It returns and ends the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed (step S301: YES), the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 (step S302). After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S303). Then, after executing the checksum calculation process (step S304), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S305). The processing content of the checksum calculation processing is the same as in step S109 in the main processing (FIG. 10). After that, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S306). After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), if the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed.

In step S208, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S209, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S210, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211 a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. In step S213, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display unit 66 is executed. After that, in step S214, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S401). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S402). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, the replay process for setting the same number of bets as the previous number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If none of the replay prizes have occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 is operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Process the medal return process. Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement button 51 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After executing the start waiting process in step S402, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number (specifically, "3") (step S403), and the number of bets has not reached the specified number. Return to the start waiting process (step S402). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S404). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S402). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S405). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, after the constant lottery process is executed (step S406), the winning combination lottery process for performing the winning combination lottery in this game is executed (step S407). Then, on condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S408: YES), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponds to the result of the lottery process of this combination. The reel control process for driving control is executed in the above-described manner (step S409).

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S410). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination to the player is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium granting process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S411). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S412). Further, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S413: YES), the acceptance permission process is executed (step S414). By executing the reception permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

<Structure for drawing lots>
Next, a configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 72 will be described prior to the explanation of the lottery process for the winning combination in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13). 14 and 15 are explanatory views for explaining the random number circuit group 100 provided on the main control board 71.

As shown in FIG. 14, the random number circuit group 100 is provided with the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. Further, the random number circuit group 100 is provided with the 1st to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to each of the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. Further, the random number circuit group 100 includes a shared clock circuit 104 for inputting a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, respectively. The first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d, which individually input clock signals, are provided.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l each having an 8-bit storage area. As shown in FIG. 14, the values of the first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l are the values of the first to first to first shared clock circuits 104 provided in common with the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. 12 It is updated by inputting a clock signal to the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. For example, in the case of the first shared random number circuit 101a, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first shared random number circuit 101a, and the random number generation circuit receives the clock signal. The 8-bit data input to the first random number counter 106a from the random number generation circuit is updated by the above. Further, for example, in the case of the 8th shared random number circuit 101h, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the 8th shared random number circuit 101h, and the random number generation circuit outputs the clock signal. Upon receiving the data, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the eighth random number counter 106h is updated. The random number generation circuits are provided in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is branched into 12 lines on the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. It is connected to the corresponding random number circuit. Therefore, clock signals are input to each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at the same timing. As a result, the update cycle of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is constant at the cycle in which the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104, and the random number update timing is also from the shared clock circuit 104. It becomes constant at the timing when the clock signal is output.

The update of the 8-bit random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is that the random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in a predetermined order and all of these random numbers are generated once. It is performed so that one cycle of update is completed. Then, this update cycle will be repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from each other. For example, in the first shared random number circuit 101a, the random number update order is set so that the random numbers increase by 1 so as to be in ascending order from "0" to "255", and the second shared random number circuit 101b The random number update order is set so that the random numbers decrease by 1 so that the random numbers decrease from "255" to "0" in descending order, and the third shared random number circuit 101c updates all the even numbers in ascending order. The update order of random numbers is set so that all odd numbers are updated later in ascending order, and the 4th to 12th shared random number circuits 101d to 101l are set to update orders different from these update orders and different from each other. Has been done. As a result, even if the random number update cycle and update timing in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are mutually constant as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l It is possible to prevent each random number from always being the same as each other at each update timing.

Further, when the random number is updated once in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, a new update cycle is started from an initial value different from the initial value of the update cycle. , The selection mode of the initial value in relation to the number of update cycles is different from each other in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at each update timing.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are provided with a thirteenth random number counter 106m and a fourteenth dedicated random number counter 106n having a storage area of 16 bits, respectively, and a third dedicated random number. The circuit 102c is provided with a 15th random number counter 106o having an 8-bit storage area, and the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d is provided with a 16th random number counter 106p having a 7-bit storage area. As shown in FIG. 14, the values of the 13th to 16th random number counters 106m to 106p are individually provided for the 1st to 4th dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, respectively. It is updated by inputting a clock signal from the circuits 105a to 105d to the corresponding first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

For example, in the case of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the random number generation circuit generates a clock signal. Upon receiving the data, the 16-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the 13th random number counter 106m is updated. Further, in the case of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and the random number generation circuit is used as a clock signal. By receiving the data, the 16-bit data input to the 14th random number counter 106n from the random number generation circuit is updated. Further, in the case of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the random number generation circuit is used as a clock signal. By receiving the data, the 8-bit data input to the 15th random number counter 106o from the random number generation circuit is updated. If the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is used, the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, and the random number generation circuit is used as a clock signal. By receiving the signal, the 7-bit data input to the 16th random number counter 106p from the random number generation circuit is updated.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are not individually provided with clock circuits as described above, but are provided with a common shared clock circuit 104 for each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. 12 The random number update cycle and the random number update timing in the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant. On the other hand, the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are individually provided with the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d. Specifically, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the signal for transmitting the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is transmitted. The path is connected to the second dedicated clock circuit 102b, and the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is connected to the third dedicated clock circuit 102c, and the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d. The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

The output periods of the clock signals in the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are different from each other. As a result, the random number update cycle and the random number update timing in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d can be made unique. Further, the output cycles of the respective clock signals of the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are also different from the output cycles of the clock signals in the shared clock circuit 104. As a result, the random number update cycle and the random number update timing in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are made different from the random number update cycle and the random number update timing in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Is possible.

To update the 16-bit random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, random numbers "0" to "65535" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. Is performed so that one cycle of update is completed. Then, this update cycle will be repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is different from each other. For example, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is set to update all the even numbers in ascending order and then all the odd numbers in ascending order, and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b updates all the odd numbers in ascending order. The random number update order is set so that all even numbers are updated later in ascending order. As a result, not only the random number update cycle and the random number update timing but also the random number update order can be made different between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and these first dedicated random number circuits 102a And the uniqueness of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b can be guaranteed.

The configuration is not limited to the above, and the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b may have the same random number update order. Even in this case, the initial values when the random number update is started when the supply of the operating power to the main control device 70 is started are mutually in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. By making them different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

In the update of 8-bit random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, random numbers of "0" to "255" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once, so that one update cycle is performed. It is done to complete. Then, this update cycle will be repeated. In the update of the 7-bit random number in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, the random numbers "0" to "127" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once, so that one update cycle is performed. It is done to complete. Then, this update cycle will be repeated.

The random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used as a start lever as a trigger for starting a new game in a situation where a new game can be started. When 41 is operated, it is written to the 1st to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p provided corresponding to each of the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the main MPU 72 outputs a latch signal when the start lever 41 is operated as a trigger for starting the game in a situation where a new game can be started. A latch signal output unit 107 is provided for this purpose. The signal path for transmitting the latch signal output from the latch signal output unit 107 is branched into 16 lines in the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is among the first to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p. It is connected to the corresponding register. As a result, when the latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 107 based on the operation of the start lever 41, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d The random numbers generated in each are written to the latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the respective random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. Then, the random numbers written in the 1st to 16th latch registers 103a to 103p are acquired and used as necessary when various lottery is performed in the main MPU 72.

Here, the type of lottery processing to be used is uniquely defined for the random numbers generated in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d and written in the thirteenth to sixteenth latch registers 103m to 103p. There is. Specifically, the 16-bit random number generated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and written in the 13th latch register 103m is used in the lottery process of the combination described later, and is generated in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. The 16-bit random number written in the 14-latch register 103n is used in the transition lottery process to the advantageous section described later, and the 8-bit random number generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and written in the 15th latch register 103o will be described later. The 7-bit random number that is used in the constant lottery process and is generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written in the 16th latch register 103p is used in the transition lottery process to the ART state, which will be described later. The random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are updated at their own update cycle and update timing as described above, and are performed in their own update order. In this case, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in the lottery process of the winning combination, the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section, the constant lottery process, and the lottery process for shifting to the ART state. , Each of these lottery processes can be performed independently while not being synchronized with each other.

Further, the lottery process of the winning combination is performed in each game regardless of the game state, the constant lottery process is performed in each game when the ART state is set, and the transition lottery process to the advantageous section is executed in each game in the normal section. Frequently. Further, the lottery process for shifting to the ART state is likely to be performed in the game in which the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section is performed, and further, the lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state. Under such circumstances, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in each of the lottery processes, so that the results of the lottery processes are not synchronized with each other. The lottery process can be performed strictly.

On the other hand, the random numbers generated in the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and written to the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l are uniquely defined as the type of lottery processing to be used. Instead, it will be used in one of a plurality of predetermined lottery processes. The number of types of the plurality of types of the predetermined lottery processing is set to be larger than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The order of use of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is predetermined, and when the execution timing of the predetermined lottery process among the plurality of types of lottery processes is reached, for example, the first shared random number circuit 101a Is used, the random number written in the first latch register 103a is used. For example, when the eighth shared random number circuit 101h is used, it is written in the eighth latch register 103h. Random numbers are used. That is, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are also used in a plurality of types of lottery processes set as a number larger than the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits as compared with a configuration in which random number circuits are individually set for each of a plurality of types of lottery processes.

In the configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are also used in the plurality of types of lottery processing, the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in the same manner as described above. It is performed at the same cycle and the same update timing. Further, the random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. As a result, for example, when executing a predetermined lottery process included in a plurality of types of lottery processes, a random number of the first shared random number circuit 101a is acquired at the first lottery timing, and an eighth shared random number is obtained at the second lottery timing. Even if the random numbers of the circuit 101h are acquired, the random numbers can be treated as being updated in a certain manner. On the other hand, the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in different update orders, so that they are not completely synchronized. Thereby, when a plurality of lottery processes among the above-mentioned plurality of types of lottery processes are executed in the same game, it is possible to prevent the random numbers acquired in the plurality of lottery processes from having the same value. .. By the way, in the above-mentioned multiple types of lottery processing, a lottery process for transition to a false precursor state, a lottery process for transition to a chance state, a lottery process for the number of additional games, a lottery process for transition to A loop, and a transition to B loop Includes lottery processing and so on.

Next, the random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU 72 in order to acquire each of the above random numbers will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The random number acquisition process is executed as a common subroutine process each time the main MPU 72 needs to perform various lottery.

When the lottery process of the execution target this time is the lottery process of the winning combination, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is the target of using the random number (step S501: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 13th latch register 103m in which the random number of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S502).

When the lottery process to be executed this time is the transition lottery process to the advantageous section, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is the target to use the random number (step S503: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 14th latch register 103n in which the random number of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S504).

When the lottery process to be executed this time is a constant lottery process, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is the target to use the random number (step S505: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 15th latch register 103o in which the random number of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S506).

When the lottery process to be executed this time is the transition lottery process to the ART state, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is the target to use the random number (step S507: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 16th latch register 103p in which the random number of the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S508).

When the lottery process to be executed this time is neither a combination lottery process, a shift lottery process to an advantageous section, a constant lottery process, or a shift lottery process to the ART state, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l The random number is used (step S507: NO). In this case, first, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S509). The random number pointer is a counter for specifying which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used by the main MPU 72, and numerical information of "0" to "11" is displayed. It can be taken. When the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is the target for using the random number, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is the target for using the random number. When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is the target for using random numbers. When the random number pointer is "m", the third m + 1 shared random number circuit 101a-101l uses random numbers. It is a target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

When the value of the random number pointer after 1 addition exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S510: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S511). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is added by 1 each time the lottery process is used in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded, the value is reduced to the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to be used according to a predetermined order each time the lottery process is to be used. After 101l is sequentially changed and the shared random number circuit 101a-101l which is the last order is the target of use, the shared random number circuit 101a-101l which is the first order is the target of use again.

When a negative determination is made in step S510, or when the process of step S511 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information of random numbers is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 for starting the game is operated (step S512). As a result, even when the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in the lottery process of the number of types exceeding the number of the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared. Within the range of the number of shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, it is possible to acquire random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each lottery process.

Further, the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is equal to or less than the number of lottery processes that occur simultaneously in one game among the lottery processes for which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. It has become. As a result, even if a plurality of lottery processes among the lottery processes to be used occur at the same time in one game, random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in the plurality of lottery processes can be acquired. Is possible.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the lottery process for the winning combination executed in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S601). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the winning combination lottery process, the random numbers written in the 13th latch register 103m are acquired from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. Specifically, as described above, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a generates random numbers of "0" to "65535", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). At the timing when the affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 13th latch register 103m is acquired by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S602). In this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Therefore, it is possible to set which winning probability the winning combination lottery process is to be executed based on. The winning probability of "setting n + 1" is more advantageous for the player than "setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the winning combination that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in "setting n + 1" than in "setting n", the player in "setting n + 1" is higher than in "setting n". It will be advantageous for. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values are set at the same stage: a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a bonus state (BB state and RB state) exists in addition to the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S602, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking the case of "setting 3" as an example, a lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described. First, the lottery table for the normal mode selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 18, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

Specifically, the index value IV = 1 is set with the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target The first bell prize is surely generated regardless of the type of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is surely generated.

In the slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the unwinning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). Say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not missed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, cherry prize, 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, 3rd BB prize, 4th BB prize, 1st RB prize and 2nd RB prize are stop buttons 42 for the rotation position of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a winning mode in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of ~ 44.

As shown in FIG. 18, the index value IV = 2 is set with the first bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplementary winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 18, the index value IV = 3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first bell winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. When winning with an index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second bell winning data is set in the index value IV = 17. When winning with an index value IV = 17, as shown in FIG. 19, the second bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. ..

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 18. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 18, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 19, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the third BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 7. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 19, the third BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the third BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, only the fourth BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 19, the fourth BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 4th BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, only the first RB winning data is set in the index value IV = 9. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 19, the first RB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first RB prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 19. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 19, as shown in FIG. 19, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 20. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 20, as shown in FIG. 19, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second RB winning data is set in the index value IV = 21. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 21, as shown in FIG. 19, the second RB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second RB prize will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the bonus winning data including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data is deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and the winning is won. It will not be carried over to the next and subsequent games. On the other hand, the above bonus winning data is stored in memory until the corresponding bonus winning is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. .. In this case, in the game in which the bonus winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to all the bonus winning data is excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the bonus winning data from being newly stored even though the bonus winning data is already stored, and a plurality of bonus winning data are not accumulated and stored. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 10. When winning with an index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 22. When winning with an index value IV = 22, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do.

As shown in FIG. 18, the index value IV = 11 to 16 is set to the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is issued) is the middle reel 32M. When the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases. The normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the lottery table for the normal mode of FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 are selected. The probabilities of becoming are about 1 / 6.6, respectively. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1 / 13.1. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is about 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8 are about 1/437, respectively. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 is about 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is about 1/655. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13 The probability of winning when the index value IV = 14, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 are about 1/41, respectively. Is. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 16.4. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 18 is about 1/146. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 20 are about 1/437, respectively. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 21 is about 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 22 is about 1/655.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1/41. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are won with any of the index values IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode will be described. 20 and 21 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are set in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18). ) Is the same. Further, the winning data set in each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode and the winning probability of each index value IV are the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, respectively. Is the same as.

In this case, the index values IV = 1 to 6, 23 to 24 are set to a role that enables the addition of the game medium, and the index values IV = 1 to 6, 23 to 24 are set respectively. Since the winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6, 17 to 18 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the types of winning combinations that enable the addition of game media and their winning combinations The winning probabilities of are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Further, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 25 to 27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode are set with bonus winning data in the same manner as the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the lottery table for the normal mode. , The winning probability is the same as the lottery table for normal mode. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, the index values IV = 10,28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode are set with chance replay winning data as in the index values IV = 10,22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the normal mode. It is the same as the lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set to the index value IV = 11 to 22 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8.

When winning with an index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the 1st RT mode, any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. In that case, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the mode shifts to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as the winning data of the index value IV = 17 to 22, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 17 to 22 is about 1 / 10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode is won with an index value IV = 17, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It definitely occurs regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 19, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 20, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 21, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 22, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode shifts to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

The lottery table for the first RT mode is set with an index value IV = 10 to 22, 28, which enables the establishment of a replay prize. Then, since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode are about 1 /. It is 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7. That is, the first RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode will be described. 22 and 23 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 22, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are set in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18). ) And the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20). Further, the winning data set in each of the index values IV = 18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table and the second. It is the same as each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the lottery table for 2RT mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1 to 6, 18 to 19 are set to a role that enables the addition of the game medium, and the index values IV = 1 to 6, 18 to 19 are set respectively. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6, 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV = 1 to 6 in the first RT mode lottery table. Since it is the same as each of 23 to 24, the types of combinations that enable the addition of game media and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. It has become.

Further, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode have the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the index values IV in the lottery table for the first RT mode. The bonus winning data is set in the same manner as = 7 to 9, 25 to 27, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same. Further, the index values IV = 10,23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode have the same chances as the index values IV = 10,22 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 10,28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode. The replay winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set to the index value IV = 11 to 17 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode is won with an index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 23, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It definitely occurs regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 17. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 17 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 5.5. Then, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, a role that enables the establishment of a replay prize is set at an index value IV = 10 to 17, 23. Then, since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode are about 1. It is /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, and the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. The configuration may be the same.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 is referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) when it is in the BB state or the RB state. The internal lottery table to be played is stored, and the internal lottery table referred to in the role lottery process (FIG. 17) when the bonus combination is won but the corresponding bonus prize is not established. Is remembered.

In the bonus lottery table, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is won at about 1 / 1.5, and if the winning combination is won, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each reel 32L , 32M, 32R, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position. In addition, in the bonus lottery table, the role that enables the establishment of the first watermelon prize is won at about 1 / 6.6, and the role that enables the establishment of the cherry prize is won at about 1 / 7.8. These first watermelon winning and cherry winning are not established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By setting the bonus lottery table as described above, in the BB state or the RB state, the first bell prize is basically established in each game and the game medium of "11" is given. However, the first watermelon prize or the cherry prize may be established, and if the first watermelon prize is established, the game medium of "5" is given, and if the cherry prize is established, the game medium of "2" is given. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state becomes equal to or more than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and the RB state is the RB state. It ends when the total number of game media given after the start becomes equal to or more than the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required until the BB state and the RB state are completed varies depending on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) and the presence or absence of omission. The bonus lottery table is common among the set values of "1" to "6" that change the advantage of the slot machine 10.

In the internal lottery table, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6,10,17,18,22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is set with the winning probability of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the bonus combination is in the internal winning state, the winning combination of the combination that enables the granting of the game medium and the winning probability of the combination is the same as that of the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as that of the normal mode. The bonus combination is not won, and the combination that triggers the transition to the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is not won.

Here, in any of the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV and " There is an index value IV with a different winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". 24 (a) to 24 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the index value IV in which the winning probability differs between the set values of "1" to "6", and FIG. 24 (a) is a normal mode. The case of the lottery table for use is shown, FIG. 24B shows the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and FIG. 24C shows the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 24A, in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV = 17 to 22 are index values IV in which the winning probabilities differ between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index values IV. = 1 to 16 are index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 24B, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index values IV = 23 to 28 are index values IV in which the winning probabilities differ between the set values of “1” to “6”, and the index values are index values. IV = 1 to 22 is an index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV = 18 to 23 are index values IV in which the winning probabilities differ between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values are index values. IV = 1 to 17 is an index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6".

That is, regardless of which lottery table, the index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" is the index value IV in the front range in which the index value IV = 1 is serially numbered. Index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6" are from the index value IV in the order following the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. It is aggregated in the index value IV in the rear range, which is a serial number. In this way, the index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values having different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6" are aggregated. By consolidating the IVs in the rear range, the index value IV having the same winning probability and the index value IV having different winning probabilities are set between the set values of "1" to "6" in the design stage of the slot machine 10. And make corrections easier.

In each lottery table, the index value IV included in the rear range in which the winning probability is different between the set values of "1" to "6" is different, but is set in each of the index values IV included in the rear range. Winning data and winning probability are common to each lottery table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the index value IV = 17 to 22 is included in the rear side range in the lottery table for the normal mode, and FIG. 24 (b) in the lottery table for the first RT mode. ), The index value IV = 23 to 28 is included in the rear side range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 18 to 23 is included in the rear side range as shown in FIG. 24 (c). Included in. In this case, the index value IV = 17 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV = 23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV = 18 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same as each other, and the index value IV = 18 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV = 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV = 19 in the lottery table for the second RT mode The set winning data and winning probability are the same as each other, and the index value IV = 19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. The index value IV = 20 means that the set winning data and the winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 20 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV = 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode has the same winning data and the winning probability, and the index value IV = 21 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. The index value IV = 27 in the above and the index value IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode have the same winning data and the winning probability, and the index value IV = 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode. The index value IV = 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode and the index value IV = 23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode have the same winning data and winning probability. As a result, it is possible to make the types of the winning combinations in which the winning probabilities differ between the set values of "1" to "6" in each lottery table, and to make the winning combination common in each lottery table. It is possible to make the winning probability at each set value the same.

By the way, the index value in which only the 2nd bell winning data is set, the index value in which only the 2nd watermelon winning data is set, the index value in which only the 1st BB winning data is set, and the index in which only the 2nd BB winning data is set are set. The winning probability of each of the value, the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set is higher for the larger set value than for the smaller set value. It is set to have a tendency to be higher. However, it is not limited to this, and if a large setting value is more advantageous to the player than a small setting value, a large setting value is won over a small setting value for some index values. The configuration may be set so that the probability tends to be low.

As described above, in each lottery table, the same winning data is set for the index values IV = 1 to 10 included in the front range, and the winning probabilities are also the same. As a result, in each lottery table, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" and the same type of winning data set are made the same. It becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the front side range and the rear side range are set as described above, the front side range has a role that enables the addition of game media, a role that enables replay winning, and a role that enables bonus winning. In addition to being set, a role that enables the addition of game media, a role that enables replay winning, and a role that enables bonus winning are also set in the rear range. That is, the combinations that enable the addition of the game medium are mixed in the front side range and the rear side range, and the index value IV of those combinations loses continuity between the front side range and the rear side range. Similarly, the winning combinations that enable replay winning are mixed in the anterior range and the posterior range, and the index value IV of these combinations loses continuity between the anterior range and the posterior range. Similarly, the winning combinations are mixed in the anterior range and the posterior range, and the index value IV of these combinations loses continuity between the anterior range and the posterior range. Then, there is a possibility that the processing configuration for grasping the winning combination in various processing after the execution of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes complicated.

In addition, the index values set in the latter half of the front range in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table include winning data for causing a transition between lottery modes. Since the winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV of the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Further, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. It becomes. Further, for example, the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set is "22" in the lottery table for the normal mode, "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and "28" in the lottery table for the second RT mode. 23 ”. In this case, if it is attempted to handle different index values IV even though they are the same combination in various processes after the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed, the index value is indexed each time the combination is specified. It becomes necessary to grasp not only the IV but also the current lottery mode, which may complicate the processing configuration.

To eliminate the above inconveniences. In the slot machine 10, the offset table 111 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 111.

As shown in FIG. 25, information on the winning number is set in the offset table 111. Numerical information of "1" to "41" is set as the winning number information in a serial number. Then, in the offset table 111, each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV of the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV of the second RT mode lottery table are "1" to "41". It is associated with the information of one of the winning numbers. This association is a group of small roles that enable the granting of game media, a group of bonus roles that enable the establishment of bonus winnings, and a combination that enables the establishment of replay winnings. Each of the replay role groups is formed by the information of the winning numbers that are serial numbers. Further, this association is performed so that the same type of winning data can be treated as the same winning number information even between different lottery modes in which the winning combinations are set.

Specifically, the group of winning number information that is a serial number of "1" to "8" becomes a small role group, and the group of winning number information that is a serial number of "9" to "14" is a bonus. The offset table 111 is set so that the group of the winning combination becomes the group of the winning combination, and the group of the information of the winning numbers which is the serial number after "15" becomes the group of the replay winning combination. Further, in the replay role group, the replay roles for which the normal replay winning data is not set are aggregated in the information of the winning numbers of "15" and "16", and the normal replay is collected in the information of the winning numbers after "17". The replay roles for which the winning data is set are aggregated.

In each lottery table, the index value IV of "1" is set to the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data, but the index value IV = 1 is "1" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "2" is set to the first bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data, but the index value IV = 2 is "2" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "3" is set to the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data, but the index value IV = 3 is "3" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set for the index value IV of "4", but the index value IV = 4 is set with the information of the winning number of "4" regardless of the lottery table. Has been done.

The index value IV of "17" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the second bell winning data. Only the winning numbers of "5" are set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV of "5", but the index value IV = 5 is set with the information of the winning number of "6" regardless of the lottery table. Has been done.

The index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "24" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the second watermelon winning data. Only the winning numbers of "7" are set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV of "6", but the index value IV = 6 is set with the information of the winning number of "8" in any lottery table. There is. In each lottery table, only the third BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "7", but the index value IV = 7 is set with the information of the winning number of "9" in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the 4th BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "8", but the index value IV = 8 is set with the information of the winning number of "10" in any lottery table. ing.

Only the first BB winning data is included in the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "25" in the lottery table for first RT mode, and the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for second RT mode. Is set, but the information of the winning number of "11" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

Only the 2nd BB winning data is included in the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "26" in the lottery table for 1st RT mode, and the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for 2nd RT mode. Is set, but the information of the winning number of "12" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set for the index value IV of "9", but the index value IV = 9 is set with the information of the winning number of "13" in any lottery table. ing.

Only the 2nd RB winning data is included in the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "27" in the lottery table for 1st RT mode, and the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for 2nd RT mode. Is set, but the information of the winning number of "14" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but the index value IV = 10 is the information of the winning number of "15" in any lottery table. It is set.

The second chance replay is won for the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV of "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the second RT mode. Although only the data is set, the information of the winning number of "16" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning combination having the same set winning data but different index value IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

The index value IV is not standardized for the winning numbers after "17" in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each of the index values IV of each lottery table. This is because the types of winning data set to the index value IV associated with the winning numbers after "17" are not common among the lottery tables. Specifically, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set in the lottery table for the normal mode are set with the information of the winning numbers of "17" to "22", respectively. ing. Further, in the lottery table for the 1st RT mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the 2nd RT replay winning data are set are set with the information of the winning numbers of "23" to "28", respectively. In addition, the index values IV = 17 to 22 in which the normal replay winning data and the first fall replay winning data are set are set with the information of the winning numbers of "29" to "34", respectively. Further, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set are set with the information of the winning numbers of "35" to "40", respectively. In addition, the index value IV = 17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is set with the information of the winning number of "41".

By providing the offset table 111 as described above, the roles that enable the addition of the game medium, the roles that enable the replay winning, and the winning combination that enables the bonus winning are mixed in the front side range and the rear side range. In various processes after the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the state that has been performed can be handled in a state of being aggregated for each combination of the same group. Further, a combination in which different index values IV are set between the lottery tables even though the same winning data is set is treated as the same information in various processes after the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It becomes possible. Furthermore, when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, the information of the winning number may be set in the command for transmitting the result, so that the amount of information of the command is increased. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Although detailed description is omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also set in the offset table 111, that is, the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. The information of the winning number common to each index value IV of is associated. If it is a bonus lottery table, the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set are Although it is set, the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with the information of the winning number of "4", and the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is ". It is associated with the information of the winning number of "6", and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the information of the winning number of "8". Further, in the case of the internal lottery table, as already explained, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6,10,17,18,22 in the normal mode lottery table is set with the winning probability of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, for the index value IV corresponding to the index value IV = 1 to 6,10,17,18,22 in the lottery table for normal mode, the information of the winning number corresponding to the index value IV in the lottery table for normal mode corresponds. For the index value IV for which only the normal replay winning data is set, the winning number of "41" is the same as the index value IV = 17 for which only the normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the second RT mode. Information is associated.

Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), after selecting the lottery table (step S602), "1" is set in the first lap flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S603). In the winning combination lottery process, the winning probabilities differ between the index value IV in the front range in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" and the set values of "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index value IV in the front range among the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first lap flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is in the front side range.

After that, the first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The target index counter is a counter for specifying the type of combination that is the target of the lottery on the main MPU 72. Further, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front side range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the lottery table for normal mode, the index value IV = 1 to 16 corresponds to the front side range, so the first reference value is "16", and in the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index value IV = Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front side range, the first reference value is "22", and in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV = 1 to 17 corresponds to the front side range, so the first reference value is "17". ".

Although detailed explanation is omitted, if it is a bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and all of these index values IV have a winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front side range is set as the first reference value.

After that, the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set (step S605). In such a determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV set to the index value IV, which is the current lottery target, to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random number acquired in step S601 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV set in the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to make a new one. Judgment value DV. For example, in the case of the lottery table for normal mode, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 in the lottery table for normal mode is added to the random number acquired in step S601. Let the determined value be the determination value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is currently the target of the lottery (step S606). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it does not exceed "65535", after subtracting 1 from the value of the target index counter (step S607), it is determined whether or not the value of the target index counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S607). Step S608). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S608: NO), the process returns to step S605, and a winning / failing determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the updated value of the target index counter.

When the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S608: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the bonus state (step S609). Since the index value IV in the rear range is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the current situation is in the bonus state (step S609: YES), it is assumed that none of the roles have been won in this game. The process proceeds to step S614 as it is.

If the current state is not in the bonus state (step S609: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first lap flag of the main RAM 74 (step S610). That is, it is determined whether or not the index value IV group for which the winning / failing determination of the combination is completed is in the front side range. When "1" is set in the first lap flag (step S610: YES), after clearing the first lap flag "0" (step S611), the second reference value is set in the target index counter (step S610: YES). Step S612). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV = 17 to 22 corresponds to the rear side range, and in the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index value IV = 23 to 28 corresponds to the rear side range. However, in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV = 18 to 23 corresponds to the rear side range, so that the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. If it is a bonus lottery table, the index value IV included in the rear range does not exist, so that the second reference value is not set. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear side range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S605, and a winning / failing determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S610, it is assumed that none of the winning combinations have been won in this game, and the process proceeds to step S614 as it is.

On the other hand, when "65535" is exceeded in step S606, information on the winning number corresponding to the winning combination currently subject to the lottery is acquired, and the winning data corresponding to the winning combination currently subject to the lottery is obtained. Is executed in the winning data acquisition process for setting the main RAM 74 (step S613). FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of winning data.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first lap flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is the index value IV included in the front side range ( Step S701). When "1" is set in the first lap flag (step S701: YES) Since the value of the target index counter of the main RAM 74 corresponds to the index value IV won this time, the index value IV after step S703 is used as it is. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the value of the first lap flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time is the index value IV included in the rear side range. When determining whether the index value IV included in the rear range is correct or not, a second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the winning combination does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the winning combination and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the lottery this time. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S701, the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the lottery this time is added to the value of the target index counter (step S702). The first reference value added in this case is "16" for the normal mode lottery table, "22" for the first RT mode lottery table, and "17" for the second RT mode lottery table. It becomes.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S701 or the process of step S702 is executed, the offset table 111 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S703). Then, the information of the winning number corresponding to the type of the lottery table targeted for the lottery this time and the value of the current target index counter is read from the offset table 111, and the information of the winning number is the information of the winning number in this game. Is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S704). As a matter of course, if none of the winning combinations are won, the winning number information is not stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the information of the winning data included in the winning combination is expanded to the main RAM 74 (step S705). The main RAM 74 is set with the same number of winning corresponding areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S705, the winning data included in the winning combination among the winning corresponding areas is set. "1" is set in the area corresponding to, and winning data other than various bonus winning data such as 1st BB winning data, 2nd BB winning data, 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, 1st RB winning data and 2nd RT winning data. Therefore, the winning area corresponding to the winning data not included in the winning role this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when the winning combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is established. As long as "1" is set, the state is maintained. Then, the winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data in which the "1" is set is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is executed. The winning area corresponding to the winning data other than the various bonus winning data is cleared to "0" even if no winning combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

After that, a lottery process for the reel effect is executed to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect at the start of this game. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "8" to "16" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination (step S706). The winning number of "8" corresponds to the cherry winning data, the winning number of "9" corresponds to the 3rd BB winning data, and the winning number of "10" corresponds to the 4th BB winning data. The winning number of "11" corresponds to the 1st BB winning data, the winning number of "12" corresponds to the 2nd BB winning data, and the winning number of "13" corresponds to the 1st RB winning data. , The winning number of "14" corresponds to the 2nd RB winning data, the winning number of "15" corresponds to the 1st chance replay winning data, and the winning number of "16" corresponds to the 2nd chance replay winning data. It corresponds to. Of these, the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data correspond to the winning data that triggers the transition to the bonus state, and the cherry winning data, the 1st chance replay winning data, and the 2nd chance replay The winning data corresponds to the winning data that can trigger the transition to the ART state and the trigger for adding the number of games in the ART state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S706, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S707). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the lottery process of the reel effect, the random numbers written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. To get. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random numbers acquired in step S707 with the reel effect table stored in advance in the main ROM 73, it is determined whether or not the execution of the reel effect has been won (step S708). In the reel effect table, the probability of winning the execution of the reel effect is set to be 20% regardless of the winning numbers of "8" to "16". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be higher or lower than the winning probability, and the probability of winning the execution of the reel effect differs depending on the winning numbers of "8" to "16". It may be configured as a reel.

When the execution of the reel effect is won (step S708: YES), "1" is set in the reel effect winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S709). The reel effect winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the reel effect should be executed at the start of this game. In the reel effect, in a situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, after the rotation of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, a combination of production symbols (for example, "BAR" is not required. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in a state where the "combination of symbols in which the symbols are lined up in a straight line) is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is determined that any of the winning data as described above is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to notify by using the movement.

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), when an affirmative decision is made in step S609, a negative decision is made in step S610, or when the process of step S613 is executed, the stop information for reel stop control After executing the stop information first setting process (step S614), the effect content determination process is executed (step S615). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the outline content of the effect to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in this game is executed. As the contents of the outline, in the normal game state, high expectation content, medium expectation content, and low expectation content are set so that the expectation that a bonus state or ART state will occur gradually decreases. ing. In the process of determining the content of the effect, the outline of the content of the effect is determined by lottery using the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process of the combination.

After that, the game start command transmission process is executed (step S616). In the transmission process, the information corresponding to the outline of the contents determined in the effect content determination process, and if the winning combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this time, the winning combination is assigned. The information of the corresponding winning number and the information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current game state are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and the information of the outline contents and winning number of the production determined by the main side MPU 72 is displayed on the production side MPU 92. It is a command to make the user recognize.

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, the production side MPU 92 grasps the outline contents of the production in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production side MPU 92 describes the details of the production in a manner corresponding to the outline of the grasped production, the information of the winning number set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current state. It is decided based on the information corresponding to the game state of. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

After that, the first control process of the game section is executed in step S617, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S618, the addition process is executed in step S619, and the notification control process is executed in step S620. To execute. The contents of these processes will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S409 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In the reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c provided in the main RAM 74 (step S801). The main side of the constant speed flag 74c is that it is the situation after the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed rotation starts after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. It is a flag for specifying by MPU72. Details will be described later, but when the acceleration period of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and constant speed rotation starts after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1". Is set.

When "1" is not set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S801: NO), that is, when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, or when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates. If the acceleration period of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed after the start, the acceleration process is executed (step S802). In the acceleration process, if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, a predetermined weight period (for example, 4.1) from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the previous game Seconds) have elapsed, and a process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Further, in the acceleration process, after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started to rotate, a process for accelerating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R toward constant speed rotation is executed.

When "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S803). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S803 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (Step S804). If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S803, and the process of step S803 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S805). The stop command command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S806 to S812 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S806). Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 (see FIG. 28) is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S807).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the machine is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S807, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S808). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S809), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S810). In the reel stop process, braking of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped in the motor control process (FIG. 35) described later is started and waits until the braking is completed. After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S811). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S812), and the process returns to step S803.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slide number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slide number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slide number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S614 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S812 of the reel control process (FIG. 27) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. .. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To do.

When it is determined in step S811 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the rotating flag 74d provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S813), and the main RAM 74 The constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" (step S814). As already explained, the constant speed flag 74c is a situation after the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed rotation starts after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. It is a flag for identifying the existence by the main MPU 72. The rotating flag 74d specifies in the main MPU 72 that the normal rotation stop processing is not completed for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. It is a flag to do.

After that, the winning determination process is executed (step S815). In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data developed in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established. In the winning processing, if the winning is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be granted is set in the main RAM 74 so that the gaming media can be granted in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S402).

After the winning determination process is executed, the winning result command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S816). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

<Details of drive control of reels 32L, 32M, 32R>
Here, the details of the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 28 is an assembly perspective view of the left reel 32L. The middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R have the same configuration as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical skeleton member 161 that forms a cylindrical basket, and a belt-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 28) that is wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Then, it is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 161 via a pair of sealing portions formed along both sides of the long side of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt-shaped belt. The central portion of the cylindrical skeleton member 161 is attached to the drive shaft of the stepping motor 162. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 162 is rotated, the cylindrical skeleton member 161 is rotated around the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L is rotated.

The stepping motor 162 is screw-fixed to the side surface of the motor plate 163 arranged in an upright state in the reel unit 31. A reel index sensor 164 in which the light emitting element 164a and the light receiving element 164b are held at predetermined intervals is installed in the motor plate 163. On the other hand, a sensor cut van 165 extending in the radial direction is screwed to the cylindrical skeleton member 161. The tip portion 165a of the sensor cut van 165 is bent at a substantially right angle and is aligned so that it can pass between both elements 164a and 164b of the reel index sensor 164. Then, each time the left reel 32L makes one rotation, the reel index sensor 164 detects the passage of the tip portion 165a of the sensor cut van 165, and each time the detection is performed, a detection signal is output to the main MPU 72. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 162 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by giving an excitation signal of 504 pulses, for example, and the rotation position of the stepping motor 162, that is, the rotation position of the left reel 32L is controlled by the number of steps. Will be done. On each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols, specifically 21 symbols, are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. Therefore, it takes 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) to switch from one symbol to the next at a predetermined position. Then, based on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 is output, it is possible to recognize which symbol is visible from the display window 21L, or to display an arbitrary symbol from the display window 21L. It is possible to control the state so that it can be seen.

FIG. 29A is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 162, and FIG. 29B is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 162.

As the stepping motor 162, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used. The stepping motor 162 is not limited to the hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the hybrid type stepping motor 162 has a rotor 171 arranged in the center and a stator 172 arranged around the rotor 171 and having first to fourth poles 173 to 176. And have. The rotor 171 is composed of a front rotor 171a magnetized on the north pole and a back rotor 171b magnetized on the south pole, and teeth and teeth provided around the front rotor 171a. It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the rear rotor 171b are located between the rotors. A tubular magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 171a and the rear rotor 171b.

As shown in FIG. 29B, the exciting coil L0 and the exciting coil L2 are bifilar wound around the first pole 173 and the third pole 175, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L0 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L2. Is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply + B (for example, +24 volt) is applied thereto. Similarly, the exciting coil L1 and the exciting coil L3 are bifilar wound around the second pole 174 and the fourth pole 176, and the winding end end of the exciting coil L1 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L3 are connected to each other. Power supply + B is applied.

An excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L0 of the first pole 173, the first pole 173 is excited to the S pole, and the third pole 175 is excited to the N pole. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L2 of 175 to excite the first pole 173 to the N pole and the third pole 175 to the S pole is referred to as an inverse A phase. Similarly, an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L1 of the second pole 174 to excite the second pole 174 to the S pole and the fourth pole 176 to the N pole as the B phase, and vice versa. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L3 of the fourth pole 176 to excite the second pole 174 to the N pole and the fourth pole 176 to the S pole is referred to as an inverted B phase.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 162 is given to the motor driver 177 shown in FIG. 29B as excitation data. This excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. The excitation phase for the stepping motor 162 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 162 is a one-phase excitation drive system, the rotor 171 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to the A phase, the B phase, the inverse A phase, and the inverse B phase. It can be driven to rotate. That is, for example, when the A phase is first energized, the protrusion of the first pole 173 that becomes the S pole and the tooth of the front rotor 171a, the protrusion of the third pole 175 that becomes the N pole, and the tooth of the back rotor 171b When they face each other by suction force and then energize the B phase, the protrusion of the second pole 174 that became the S pole and the teeth of the front rotor 171a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 176 that became the north pole and the back rotation When the teeth of the child 171b face each other by the suction force and then the reverse A phase is energized, the protrusion of the first pole 173 that becomes the north pole, the tooth of the back rotor 171b, and the third pole 175 that becomes the south pole. The protrusions and the teeth of the front rotor 171a face each other by suction force, and then when the reverse B phase is energized, the protrusions of the second pole 174 that became the north pole and the teeth of the rear rotor 171b and the south pole become The protrusion of the 4th pole 176 and the teeth of the front rotor 171a face each other by suction force. By exciting in this order, the rotor 171 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a).

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, one-phase excitation and two are used in the acceleration period from starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation and the constant speed period for maintaining the constant speed rotation. A 1-2 phase excitation drive that alternately performs phase excitation is adopted. An excitation order table exists as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 for performing 1-2 phase excitation drive in these acceleration periods and constant speed periods. The excitation order table is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 at the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation order table.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the excitation order table, the excitation order pointers of "0" to "7" are set, and the type of the excitation phase is set for each of the excitation order pointers. The excitation order pointer of "0" is set to 1-phase excitation that energizes the A phase, and the excitation order pointer of "1" is set to 2-phase excitation that energizes both the A phase and the B phase. , The excitation order pointer of "2" is set to one-phase excitation that energizes the B phase, and the excitation order pointer of "3" is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both the B phase and the inverse A phase. The excitation forward pointer of "4" is set to one-phase excitation that energizes the inverse A phase, and the excitation order pointer of "5" is set to energize both the inverse A phase and the inverse B phase. Excitation is set, the excitation order pointer of "6" is set to one-phase excitation that energizes the inverse B phase, and the excitation order pointer of "7" energizes both the inverse B phase and the A phase. Two-phase excitation is set. When the acceleration period or constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is continued in the situation where the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0" and becomes "0". Drive control is performed by the excitation order pointer. Since the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R make one revolution by the excitation signal of 504 pulses, the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is about. It becomes 0.714 °.

When the stepping motor 162 having the above configuration is used, the drive characteristics as shown in FIG. 31 are required.

This drive characteristic can be roughly divided into an acceleration period Ta and a constant speed period from when the start lever 41 is operated until the stepping motor 162 starts rotating and reaches a constant constant speed rotation, and the constant speed period is from the stop button 42 to It is divided into a maintenance period Tb in which the rotation speed is maintained until the 44 is operated, and a stop period Tc in which the rotation speed is stopped with a predetermined slip based on the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

While there is no regulation on the length of the acceleration period Ta, there is a regulation that the total time of the acceleration period Ta and the maintenance period Tb when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated must be 30 seconds or more. ing. Regarding the stop period Tc, it is required to stop the stepping motor 162 within a maximum of about 190 msec after operating the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Next, the configuration of the drive control of the stepping motor 162 will be described.

As already explained, the stepping motor 162 transitions to the constant speed rotation state after the acceleration period, but since the acceleration period becomes a forced waiting time for the game, the stepping motor 162 is fixed as soon as possible from the accelerated state. It is desirable to transition to the state of fast rotation. For that purpose, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 162 may be switched quickly, but doing so may cause step-out or rotational instability.

In particular, in the stepping motor 162, when the teeth of the rotor 171 are attracted to the protrusions of the poles 173 to 176 during the initial excitation, the initial rotational sway (micro vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) of the rotor 171 occurs. appear. Although it depends on the specifications of the reel unit 31, for example, one reciprocating swing occurs in 30 msec for about 5 to 6 reciprocations. Therefore, it is necessary to set the switching mode of the exciting phase in the acceleration period while taking such initial rotational fluctuation into consideration.

As a method of accelerating the stepping motor 162 while suppressing the influence of such initial rotational fluctuation, the state of initial excitation by two-phase excitation is maintained to some extent, and the subsequent switching interval between two-phase excitation and one-phase excitation is set. A method of gradually shortening it is conceivable. For example, a configuration in which the exciting phase is switched at the timing shown in FIG. 32 can be considered. In this case, the state set to 2-phase excitation as the initial excitation is held for 130 interrupts (that is, 130 times of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)), and then switched to 1-phase excitation, and the state is changed to 8 interrupts. After holding for a long time, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and then the switching interval of the excitation phase is set to be gradually shortened. With this configuration, 193.7 msec (= 1.49 msec x 130 interrupts) is set as the initial excitation period, during which the initial rotational fluctuation can be eliminated.

Next, specific processing contents executed by the main MPU 72 to control the drive of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the acceleration process executed by the main MPU 72. The acceleration process is executed in step S802 in the reel control process (FIG. 27).

In the acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start set flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S901). The start set flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the process for starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been completed. When "1" is not set in the start setting flag (step S901: NO), the previous time is determined by determining whether or not the value of the weight counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not a predetermined weight period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the game (step S902). The value set in the weight counter is subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S208 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

If the weight period has not elapsed (step S902: NO), the main acceleration process is terminated as it is. When the weight period has elapsed (step S902: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the reel effect winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S903). As already explained, the reel effect winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the reel effect should be executed at the start of this game.

When "1" is not set in the reel effect winning flag (step S903: NO), "25" is set in the acceleration counter corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S904 to step S906). Then, the normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S907).

Each acceleration counter is provided in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 is an acceleration table when the excitation phase switching timing is reached during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the numerical information of each acceleration counter. Understand which acceleration sequence data for acceleration should be referenced in. Further, the normal acceleration table is a table that defines the switching timing of the exciting phase for accelerating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the situation where the reel effect is not executed, and the type of the exciting phase at each switching timing. The contents are shown in FIG. 32. For example, when the value of the acceleration counter is "25", the switching interval and the type of exciting phase defined as the first excitation order in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. 32 are used, and the value of the acceleration counter is "15". In the case of "", the switching interval and the type of exciting phase defined as the eleventh excitation order in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. 32 are used. By referring to the normal acceleration table and performing drive control corresponding to the value of each acceleration counter for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating at the same time and at the same time or at the same time. Acceleration is completed almost at the same time, and the speed becomes constant.

When "1" is set in the reel effect winning flag (step S903: YES), "150" is set in the acceleration counter corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (steps S908 to S910). Then, the effect drive table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S911). The effect drive table is a table that defines the switching timing of the exciting phase for causing each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to accelerate and stop so that the reel effect is executed, and the type of the exciting phase at each switching timing. .. By referring to the drive table for production and performing drive control corresponding to the value of each acceleration counter for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating at the same time and stops. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped with the combination of production symbols (for example, the combination of symbols in which "BAR" symbols are lined up in a straight line) is stopped and displayed on the main line ML without requiring any operation. ..

When the process of step S907 or step S911 is executed, "1" is set in the start set flag of the main RAM 74 (step S912). In addition, in order to ensure a minimum weight period from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in this game to the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the next game. , Information on the weight period (for example, 4.1 seconds) is set in the weight counter of the main RAM 74 (step S913). After that, "1" is set to the rotating flag 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S914). When "1" is set for the rotating flag 74d, a process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in the stepping motor control process in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). ..

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process. The stepping motor control process is executed in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When "1" is set in the rotating flag 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1001: YES), "3" is set in the controlled target counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1002). The control target counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be executed in steps S1003 to S1007. When the value of the control target counter is "3", the left reel 32L is the control target, and when the value of the control target counter is "2", the middle reel 32M is the control target, and the value of the control target counter is If it is "1", the right reel 32R is the control target.

After that, the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the values of the current control target counters are grasped based on the detection result of the reel index sensor 164 and the number of times the excitation data is output (step S1003). Further, the motor control process is executed (step S1004). In the motor control process, excitation data generation process for rotation control of the stepping motor 162 is performed. Then, the generated excitation data is output in a state of being associated with the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the values of the current control target counter (step S1005). As a result, excitation data for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the values of the current controlled target counters are supplied to the motor driver 177. As a result, the stepping motor 162 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the value of the current controlled target counter immediately performs the energization process to the exciting phase specified by the excitation data, and the rotor 171 is excited. It will be. If the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the value of the current controlled target counter has already been stopped, no new excitation data is set, and the process of step S1005 is executed. Not done.

After that, the value of the control target counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1006), and it is determined whether or not the value of the control target counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1007). When the value of the control target counter is not "0" (step S1007: NO), the processes of steps S1003 to S1007 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the new control target counter value. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the control target counter is "0" (step S1007: YES), the stepping motor control process is terminated.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the motor control process in step S1004.

First, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time are braking (step S1101). When the process of step S810 in the reel control process (FIG. 27) is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time, and the braking of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed. In step S1101, an affirmative determination is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time is 1 or more (step S1102). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the value of the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the switching interval counter is 1 or more (step). S1103). Then, when the value of the switching interval counter is "0" (step S1104: YES), the process proceeds to step S1105 to mean that it is the switching timing of the exciting phase.

In step S1105, the switching interval counter setting process is executed. In the setting process, numerical information is set in the switching interval counter with reference to the currently read acceleration table among the normal acceleration table and the effect drive table. Specifically, when the value of the acceleration counter is "25", it means that it is the start of the acceleration period. In this case, the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled has "130" corresponding to 130 interrupts, which is the switching interval set in the excitation order for the first acceleration in the normal acceleration table. To set. Further, when the value of the acceleration counter is "24", the excitation order for the second acceleration in the normal acceleration table is the target. In this case, the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled is set to "8" corresponding to 8 interrupts, which is the switching interval set in the excitation order for the second acceleration. To do.

After that, the excitation order pointer update process is executed (step S1106). Specifically, the numerical information of the excitation order pointer is added by 1, and when the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". To do. After that, the excitation data set in the excitation order table (FIG. 30) corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read, and the read excitation data is used for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time. This excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S1107).

After that, the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time is subtracted by 1 (step S1108). As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the control targets this time, the switching interval data corresponding to the value of the acceleration counter after the subtraction is set.

When the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time is "0" (step S1102: NO), whether or not "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74. (Step S1109). When "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S1109: YES), it means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in the constant speed rotation period, so that the constant speed processing is performed. Is executed (step S1110). In the constant speed process, a process is executed so that the one-phase excitation and the two-phase excitation can be alternately switched by one interrupt.

After executing the constant speed processing in step S1110, it is determined whether or not it is the braking start timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the control targets this time (step S1111). Specifically, when the processing of step S810 in the reel control processing (FIG. 27) is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the control targets this time, the braking setting processing is performed assuming that it is the braking start timing. Execute (step S1112). In the braking setting process, the stop table is read from the main ROM 73, and control according to the stop table is started. Specifically, the excitation data for performing the four-phase excitation is stored in the main RAM 74. By executing the braking setting process, in the next motor control process to be controlled this time, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101 and the braking process is executed (step S1113). As a result, 4-phase excitation is continued for 100 interrupts according to the stop table, and when 4-phase excitation for 100 interrupts is completed, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled is controlled. finish.

Returning to the explanation of the acceleration process (FIG. 33), when an affirmative determination is made in step S901 or when the process of step S914 is executed, the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S915). When the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is "0", it means that the acceleration period has ended for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, if "1" is set in the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S916: YES), the reacceleration process at the time of reel effect is executed (step S917). The processing content of the reacceleration processing will be described later. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S916: NO), "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 (step S918). The start set flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S919).

By setting "1" to the constant speed flag 74c, as described above, in the reel control process (FIG. 27), the process after step S803 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S801. That is, when the acceleration period ends and constant speed rotation is started on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are enabled, and the stop buttons 42 to 42 to The stop control of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the operation of 44. In the situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the main MPU 72 is a lamp (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been generated. Is lit and displayed to notify the player or the like that it is possible to generate a stop command.

Here, in the main process (FIG. 10) executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, all clear processes (step S104) and clear processes other than the set values (step S113) are performed as described above. When none of the above is executed and the state of the main RAM 74 is normal (step S108, step S110 and step S111: YES), before returning to the address before the power is cut off, for reel control. The clearing process (step S116) is executed and the return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed.

In the clearing process for reel control (step S116), each of the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S117), when the return address is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped during the rotation of at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is supplied. When returning to the address before the power is cut off (step S119) when the power is restarted, the normal process can be started from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Then, when each of the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. Even if the timing is after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started according to the normal acceleration table.

FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the flow of drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating and the supply of the operating power is restarted. .. FIG. 36 (a) shows the period during which the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 36 (b) shows the state of the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 36 (c) shows the main MPU 72. 36 (d) shows the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, FIG. 36 (e) shows the constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and FIG. 36 shows the period during which the main processing is executed. (F) shows the operation validity period of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

By performing the game start operation at the timing of t1 in which the main MPU 72 is supplied with operating power, acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 36D. When the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed at the timing of t2, “1” is set to the constant speed flag 74c as shown in FIG. 36 (b), and as shown in FIG. 36 (e). The constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled at the timing of t2.

After that, at the timing of t3, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped as shown in FIG. 36 (a). Therefore, at the timing of t3, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 36 (e). In this case, since the storage state of the information of the main RAM 74 is maintained by the backup power, the state in which the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36B is the state in which the supply of the operating power is stopped. Be maintained.

After that, at the timing of t4, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted as shown in FIG. 36 (a). At the timing of t4, the main process (FIG. 10) is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 36B, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t5, the execution of the main process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72 is completed as shown in FIG. 36 (c). In the main process (FIG. 10), neither the clear process (step S104) nor the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, and the state of the main RAM 74 is normal (step). S108, step S110 and step S111: YES), the address before the power cutoff is returned, but before returning to the address before the power cutoff, the reel control clearing process (step S116) is executed and the return address is restored. Adjustment process (step S117) is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 36 (b). Further, at the timing of t5, the normal processing (FIG. 13) is restarted from the start address of the reel control processing (FIG. 27). Therefore, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 36 (d), and the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed at the timing of t6, whereby FIG. 36 (b) ) Is set to the constant speed flag 74c, and the constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 36 (e). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled at the timing of t6.

If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the reel control clearing process (step S116) and the return address adjustment process (step S117) are executed. If not, after the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted, the processing of the address after the start address in the reel control processing (FIG. 27) is executed, while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are actually executed. A situation occurs in which the rotation of the game is not performed normally, and the progress of the game is hindered. In particular, if the above-mentioned event occurs when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped during the constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate normally. There is a possibility that the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is effectively accepted even though the situation is not changed, and the stop control is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are not rotating normally. .. On the other hand, when the clear process for reel control (step S116) and the return address adjustment process (step S117) are executed as described above, the timing at which the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped is determined. Even if it is the timing after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated. In such a situation, it is possible to start accelerating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to a normal acceleration table.

<Re-acceleration processing during reel production>
Next, the reacceleration process at the time of reel production executed in step S917 of the acceleration process (FIG. 33) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In the re-acceleration process at the time of reel production, "1" is set in the reel production winning flag, and "1" is not set in the constant speed flag, and the values of all acceleration counters are "0". Is executed when the situation is. Therefore, even in a situation where "1" is set for the reel effect winning flag and "1" is not set for the constant speed flag, if the value of any one of the acceleration counters is 1 or more, the reel is used. The reacceleration process at the time of effect is not executed, and after that, when the values of all the acceleration counters become "0", the reacceleration process at the time of reel effect is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the start target counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1201). The start target counter is whether or not there are reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the execution of the reacceleration process at the time of reel production has not been completed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be executed for the reacceleration process at the time of reel production. This is a counter for specifying the type of the reel on the main MPU 72. When the value of the start target counter is "0" (step S1201: NO), "3" is set in the start target counter (step S1202).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 or when the process of step S1202 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203). In the reel production, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and displayed on the main line ML without requiring a stop operation. Rotation is stopped. Then, after the reel production is completed, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated in order to enable a normal game in which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped corresponding to the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Start again. In this case, when resuming the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R one by one in a predetermined order (specifically, the order of the left reel 32L → the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R). Is started, and after the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed rotation is achieved, the rotation of the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, it is determined whether or not the waiting period is generated when the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and when the waiting period is generated, how long the waiting period should be. When the lottery process is executed and the occurrence of the waiting period is determined, the rotation of the next reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started when the determined waiting period elapses. By adopting a configuration in which a standby period can occur in this way, it is possible to prevent the rotation position of the symbol from being biased when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are re-rotated after the reel effect is executed. Become. The standby counter is a counter for measuring the standby period, and is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the measurement of the standby period is in progress.

When the value of the standby counter is "0" (step S1203: NO), the lottery process for the waiting period after step S1204 is executed. Specifically, first, the waiting period table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1204). In the waiting period table, 0 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds, 0.4 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds and 0.7 seconds are set, respectively. The winning probabilities are the same. In this case, 0 seconds correspond to the non-occurrence of the waiting period, and 0.1 seconds to 0.7 seconds correspond to the occurrence of the waiting period.

After that, the acquisition process from the random number counter is executed (step S1205). In the acquisition process, instead of acquiring a random number from the random number circuit group 100, a random number is acquired from a random number counter provided in the main RAM 74. The random number counter has a configuration in which the numerical value is updated at a relatively short interval, and when the updated numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is updated to the minimum value. Specifically, the numerical value is updated every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed once. Further, the time required for one cycle of updating the random number of the random number counter is 160 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). This time is shorter than the acceleration period when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is accelerated by using a normal acceleration table (FIG. 32).

After that, the random numbers acquired in step S1205 are collated with the waiting period table read out in step S1204 to determine whether or not the waiting period has been won (step S1206). Occurrence of the waiting period When the winning is not achieved, that is, when 0 seconds is selected in the lottery process of the waiting period (step S1206: NO), one reel 32L, 32M, which is the target for starting the rerotation The processing after step S1210 is executed in order to start the acceleration of 32R. Occurrence of the waiting period When the winning is achieved (step S1206: YES), the waiting period selected in the waiting period lottery process is set in the standby counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1207). As a result, the measurement of the waiting period for waiting for the start of acceleration of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the target for starting the re-rotation, is started.

When the value of the standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), the value of the standby counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1208). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1209). When the value of the standby counter is 1 or more (step S1209: YES), the reacceleration process at the time of producing this reel is terminated as it is.

If the value of the standby counter is "0" and an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, or if 0 seconds is selected in the lottery process of the waiting period (step S1206: NO), the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, "25" is set in the acceleration counter corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R which is the target of starting the re-rotation. Then, the normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1211). If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the target of the start of the re-rotation this time are the second and subsequent reels in the start order of the re-rotation, the left reel 32L that is the target of the start of the re-rotation first. Since the normal acceleration table has already been read at the start of the re-rotation, the normal acceleration table is not read again. Further, the normal acceleration table is the same as the normal acceleration table read in step S907 in the acceleration process (FIG. 33), and specifically, the table contents are shown in FIG. 32.

Since the processes of step S1210 and step S1211 are executed, the process of step S917 is not executed by making a negative determination in step S915 in the next acceleration process (FIG. 33). Further, in the motor control process (FIG. 35) of step S1004 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 34), when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the start targets of the rerotation this time are the control targets, the step S1102 is performed. By making an affirmative judgment, the process for accelerating according to the normal acceleration table is executed. As a result, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the target of starting the re-rotation this time, is accelerated according to the normal acceleration table.

After that, the value of the start target counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the start target counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1213). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, it means that the process for starting the re-rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been completed, so that the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". (Step S1214).

Next, a state in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are re-rotated after the reel effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 (a) shows the timing at which the update of the random number in the random number counter of the main RAM 74 makes one round, FIG. 38 (b) shows the execution period of the reel effect, and FIG. 38 (c) shows the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 38 (d) shows the acceleration period of the left reel 32L when the re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38 (e) shows the acceleration period in the re-rotation after the end of the acceleration period. 38 (f) shows the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M when the re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38 (g) shows the acceleration period in the re-rotation. The middle reel 32M shows the constant speed period in which the middle reel 32M rotates at a constant speed, FIG. 38 (h) shows the acceleration period of the right reel 32R when the re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38 (i) shows the acceleration period in the re-rotation. Indicates a constant speed period during which the right reel 32R rotates at a constant speed after the end of.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the reel effect is executed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the timing of t1. Then, at the timing of t2, the reel effect is completed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

At the timing of t2, the left reel 32L is the target for starting the re-rotation, but the waiting period is generated and won in the lottery process of the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the start of re-rotation of the left reel 32L is awaited from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t3, the re-rotation of the left reel 32L is started as shown in FIG. 32 (d). That is, the rotation of the left reel 32L is started using a normal acceleration table to accelerate the operation.

After that, when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L ends as shown in FIG. 32 (d) at the timing of t4, the constant speed rotation of the left reel 32L starts as shown in FIG. 32 (e). At this timing, since the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are not rotating at a constant speed, "1" is not set in the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are valid. Not done.

At the timing of t4, the middle reel 32M is the target for starting the re-rotation, but the waiting period is generated and won in the lottery process of the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the start of the re-rotation of the middle reel 32M is awaited from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5. Then, at the timing of t5, the re-rotation of the middle reel 32M is started as shown in FIG. 32 (f). That is, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is started by using a normal acceleration table, and acceleration is performed.

After that, when the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M ends as shown in FIG. 32 (f) at the timing of t6, the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 32M is started as shown in FIG. 32 (g). Since the right reel 32R is not rotating at a constant speed at this timing, "1" is not set for the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not enabled.

The right reel 32R is the target of the start of re-rotation at the timing of t6, but the waiting period is generated and won in the lottery process of the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the start of re-rotation of the right reel 32R is awaited from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7. Then, at the timing of t7, the re-rotation of the right reel 32R is started as shown in FIG. 32 (h). That is, the rotation of the right reel 32R is started using a normal acceleration table to accelerate the operation.

After that, when the acceleration period of the right reel 32R ends as shown in FIG. 32 (h) at the timing of t8, the constant speed rotation of the right reel 32R starts as shown in FIG. 32 (i). At this timing, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, so "1" is set for the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled. ..

Here, the period T required for one round of random number update in the random number counter used in the lottery process of the waiting period is accelerated by using a normal acceleration table on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The period is shorter than the acceleration period (timing of t3 to timing of t4, timing of t5 to timing of t6, timing of t7 to timing of t8). Specifically, the period required for one round of random number update in the random number counter is 160 interrupts in the number of interrupts of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), whereas in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The acceleration period in which acceleration is performed using a normal acceleration table is 213 interrupts. As a result, in a configuration in which one random number counter of the main RAM 74 is also used when determining the standby period when starting the re-rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R From the acquisition of a random number from the random number counter to determine the waiting period to the acquisition of the random number from the random number counter to determine the waiting period for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order, the random number in the random number counter. It is possible to make the update of one or more laps. Therefore, it is possible to independently perform the lottery process for the waiting period in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and the game section will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section existing in the slot machine 10.

In the slot machine 10, the game states are the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, and the ready state. ST8 and ART state ST9 exist. These gaming states ST1 to ST9 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player stays by executing the all clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 or the clear process (step S113) other than the set value. Further, if the transition to the ready state ST8 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, the transition to the prepared state ST8 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, or the false precursor state ST5 ends, there is a chance. When the state ST7 ends and the transition to the ready state ST8 does not occur, or when the ART state ST9 ends without the transition to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. Will be. The normal game state ST1 is a game state having a lower advantage than the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 in terms of the expected value of the game medium in one game, and the bonus internal state ST2, false. The advantage is substantially the same as the precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Further, as described above, there are a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the normal game state ST1, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. When the entire main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) or a clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set and the normal mode is set.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a game state in which a player stays in a game in which any of the bonus winning data is set and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not established, and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is established. Is a game state that ends when is satisfied. In the bonus internal state ST2, the internal lottery table is referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) as already described. In this case, since the combination for shifting the lottery mode (that is, the index value IV) is not set in the internal lottery table, the shift of the lottery mode does not occur in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 18) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be higher than that in the normal mode. For example, the replay probability in the first RT mode may be the same as that in the second RT mode. It may be the same configuration as the replay probability, it may be the configuration which is the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, or it may be the configuration which is the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. The configuration may have a higher replay probability than in the second RT mode. Further, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than that in the normal mode.

The contents of the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4 are as described above. In the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, the lottery mode shift does not occur.

The false precursor state ST5 stays in the normal game state ST1 by winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the false precursor state ST5. The number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the short number of continuous games is set higher than the winning probability of the long continuous games. The false precursor state ST5 is continued over the determined number of continuous games unless a bonus combination is won, the transition to the main precursor state ST6, and the transition to the chance state ST7 are performed on the way.

In the false precursor state ST5, as the effect content of each game in the image display device 63, an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. Further, in the false precursor state ST5, a flashy effect is executed on the final game side rather than on the start game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the false precursor state ST5, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for making the player recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur in the final game is displayed. As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the false precursor state ST5, any of these lottery modes can be stayed.

This precursor state ST6 stays in the normal game state ST1 or the false precursor state ST5 by winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the present precursor state ST6, and when the present precursor state ST6 ends, it shifts to the ART state ST9. It shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the state before the transition. Further, if the bonus combination is won in the middle of the present precursor state ST6, the present precursor state ST6 ends, but after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination ends, the process shifts to the preparation state ST8. The number of continuous games in this precursor state ST6 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the long continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of the short continuous game number. Further, the expected value of the number of continuous games selected in the present precursor state ST6 is longer than the expected value of the number of continuous games selected in the false precursor state ST5.

In the present precursor state ST6, as the effect content of each game in the image display device 63, an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. The effect executed in this case is an effect that can be executed even in the false precursor state ST5, but the effect in which the present precursor state ST6 is more expected to shift to the ART state ST9 than in the false precursor state ST5 is executed. easy. Further, in the present precursor state ST6, a flashy effect is executed on the final game side rather than on the start game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the present precursor state ST6, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for making the player recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 will occur in the final game is displayed. As described above, when the false precursor state ST5 and the present precursor state ST6 are present and the precursor effects corresponding to these precursor states ST5 and ST6 are executed, the player shifts to the ART state ST9. Will be expected. As described above, there are a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the present precursor state ST6, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In addition, the number of continuous games in this precursor state ST6 may be fixed to a predetermined plurality of games such as 10 games.

The chance state ST7 stays in the normal game state ST1 or the false precursor state ST5 by winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the chance state ST7. The chance state ST7 is a gaming state that continues for five games, and if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is a predetermined lottery result, the winning probability corresponding to the lottery result is entered into the ART state ST9. Execute the transition lottery process. Then, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is won, the transition to the preparation state ST8, which is the state before the transition to the ART state ST9, is performed. In this case, if the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the ART status ST9, even if the number of continuous games in the chance status ST7 is not completely consumed, the game is prepared in the next game of the transition winning game. A transition to state ST8 occurs. Further, if the bonus combination is won in the middle of the chance state ST7, the chance state ST7 ends.

In the chance state ST7, the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is executed as the effect content of each game in the image display device 63. Then, in the game in which the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, an effect indicating that the transition is won is executed. As described above, there are a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the chance state ST7, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. The number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of games.

The preparation state ST8 is a gaming state that stays as a pre-stage to shift to the ART state ST9, and can shift from the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7. As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the ready state ST8, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. In the preparation state ST8, when the winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the prepared state ST8. Further, in the preparation state ST8, when the winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning is notified, and "23" to "23". When the winning number of "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified, and the winning numbers of "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. When the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST8 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the game state shifts to the ART state ST9. In addition, the transition to the ready state ST8 may occur in the situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode, and then the transition to the second RT mode occurs. If so, the state shifts to the ART state ST9.

The ART state ST9 is a gaming state that shifts when the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST8 as described above. The ART state ST9 ends when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 becomes "0". In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. If the bonus is won in the middle of the ART state ST9, the system shifts to the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, or the RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is completed, the process shifts to the ready state ST8 and finally returns to the ART state ST9.

As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the ART state ST9, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. In the ART state ST9, when the winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the ART state ST9. Further, in the ART state ST9, when the winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning is notified, and "23" to "23". When the winning number of "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified, and the winning numbers of "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay prize is notified, and if the winning numbers of "35" to "40" are set, the second fall replay prize is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the above is notified. As a result, in the ART state ST9, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode. The second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than that of the normal mode and the first RT mode. That is, the ART state ST9 is a gaming state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified, and is basically a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase in the number of game media in the ART state ST9. Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST9, the ART state ST9 is maintained and the ART state is not set. The number of remaining games in ST9 is subtracted.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST9 exist as described above, a game section is set separately from these game states ST1 to ST9. A normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set as game sections. That is, in this slot machine 10, as elements that determine the game situation, the set values of "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, and various game states ST1 to ST9 There are a normal section SC1 and a game section of the advantageous section SC2.

The normal section SC1 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a section in which the stop order is not notified, and the probability that the transition condition to the ART state ST9, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is satisfied is lower than that in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the transition condition to the ART state ST9 is not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the entire main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) or a clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set to the normal section SC1. Further, even when the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, it becomes the normal section SC1.

The advantageous section SC2 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish an advantageous winning prize when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a section corresponding to at least one of a section in which the stop order is notified and a section in which the transition probability to the ART state ST9, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher than that in the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 is a reel 32L, which enables the establishment of the winning with the largest number of game media among the winning types included in the winning combinations whose winnings are different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It will surely continue until the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R is executed at least once. Specifically, in the advantageous section SC2, the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning. It will surely continue until the notification of the stop order of is executed at least once. It should be noted that the minimum end condition is satisfied by executing the notification of the stop order at least once, and the minimum end condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first bell winning is actually established. To do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous section SC2 has the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous section SC2 is set, and the number of continuous games of the advantageous section SC2 becomes the upper limit number of games. Continue until one of the conditions to reach is met.

As shown in FIG. 39, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4 may stay in any of the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 do not stay in the normal section SC1 but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the game states ST1 to ST9 and the game sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S617 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The process of step S617 is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state ST3, ST4, the preparation state ST8, or the ART state ST9 (step S1301). When a negative determination is made in step S1301, the processes after step S1302 are executed.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag provided in the main RAM 74. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2, and when the advantageous section flag is set to "1", it is the advantageous section SC2, which is advantageous. When the value of the interval flag is "0", it is the normal interval SC1.

When the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S1302: NO), the winning number of any one of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, a lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1304). In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number having the lower winning probability has a higher probability of being transferred to the advantageous section SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the set values of "1" to "6". The fact that the table is common regardless of the set value corresponds to all the lottery processes other than the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Further, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S1305). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2, the random numbers written in the 14th latch register 103n are acquired from the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Specifically, as described above, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b generates random numbers of "0" to "65535", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). At the timing when the affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 14th latch register 103n is acquired by the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S1305 with the advantageous transition table read out in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won (step S1306).

When the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won (step S1306: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, "1" is set in the unreported flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1307). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2 by the main MPU 72. The unannounced flag is a reel 32L, which enables the establishment of the first bell winning by setting the winning numbers of "1" to "3" in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) after shifting to the advantageous section SC2. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

As described above, the first control process of the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, if the transfer is won in the transfer lottery process to the advantageous section SC2, "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 in the first control process of the game section. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 will occur at the start of the winning game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game may be configured so that the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the next game of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won, and the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won. On the other hand, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 may occur in the game after two or more games.

After setting the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S1308). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section SC2 is started by the advantageous section display unit 67.

By becoming the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified. Here, the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The notification control process is executed in step S620 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The process of step S620 is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In a situation where "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1401: YES), any winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). If this is done (step S1402: YES), either the condition that the game state is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9 and that the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" is satisfied. If so (step S1403 or step S1404: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is executed.

Specifically, first, the stop order grasping process for winning the first bell is executed (step S1405). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning corresponding to the winning number this time is grasped. Then, the combined display unit 66 is displayed and controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started by the combined display unit 66 (step S1406). The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in this game. After that, the bell winning command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S1407). Information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning in this game is set in the bell winning command.

After that, the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1408). In this case, if the value of the unreported flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the unreported flag is "1", it is changed to "0". As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to specify that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell winning, has already been executed in the advantageous section SC2 this time.

In the notification control process, when any of the winning numbers "17" to "28" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1409: YES), the game state is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (Step S1410: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is executed.

Specifically, first, the stop order grasping process for promotion replay is executed (step S1411). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning corresponding to the winning number this time is grasped. Then, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started by the combined display unit 66 (step S1412). The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in this game. After that, the promotion replay command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1413). In the promotion replay command, information is set so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 1st RT replay winning or the 2nd RT replay winning in this game can be specified by the directing MPU 92. Will be done.

In the notification control process, when any of the winning numbers "29" to "40" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1414: YES), the game state is the ART state ST9. As a condition (step S1415: YES), a process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning or the second falling replay winning is executed.

Specifically, first, the stop order grasping process for avoiding the fall replay is executed (step S1416). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started by the combined display unit 66 (step S1417). The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in this game. After that, a fall replay avoidance command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1418). The command for avoiding the fall replay is to enable the effector MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize in this game. Information is set.

Although detailed description is omitted, when the winning number of any of "29" to "34" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) when the game state is the preparation state ST8, the first A process for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the fall replay winning is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is the preparation state ST8, even if any of the winning numbers "35" to "40" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the second fall replay winning is established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the above is not notified. Since the condition for transition from the ready state ST8 to the ART state ST9 is that the second RT replay prize is established, the establishment of the second fall replay prize is not avoided when the transition to the prepared state ST8 occurs in the second RT mode. This makes it possible to once fall into the first RT mode and give an opportunity to win the second RT replay prize.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1501: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time. Is set in order to display the image on the image display device 63 (step S1502). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1503). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 milliseconds. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured by using the measurement counter of the effect side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1504: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S1505). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1502. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. The display of the image display device 63 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game.

In the case of the above configuration, the directing side MPU 92 directly after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on the combined display unit 66 which is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72. The display-controlled image display device 63 starts the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, when the notification regarding the winning combination is executed by the image display device 63, the notification regarding the winning combination is surely executed by the combined display unit 66, and the reel executed by the image display device 63. When confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is due to fraudulent activity using the display contents of the combined display unit 66, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing. It will be possible.

The notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is completed after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 is completed. The notification corresponding to the above may be terminated, and the order may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section, when "1" is set in the advantageous section flag in the game before this game (step S1302: YES), or this game. When "1" is set in the advantageous section flag (step S1307), it is determined whether or not the current game state is the chance state ST7 (step S1309). When the chance state is ST7 (step S1309: YES), the chance state process is executed (step S1310). The processing for the chance state will be described later.

If the chance state is not ST7 (step S1309: NO), has the winning number of "4" to "8", "15", or "16" been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this role? It is determined whether or not (step S1311). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1311, on condition that the current gaming state is not the present precursor state ST6 (step S1312: NO), the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and At least one of the transition lottery processes for the false precursor state is executed.

In detail, first, the transition lottery process for this precursor state will be described. In the transition lottery process, first, the present precursor transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1313). In this case, the present precursor transition table is set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being a transition winning to the present precursor state ST6. Further, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S1314). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process for this precursor state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S1314 with the present precursor transition table read out in step S1313, it is determined whether or not the transition to the present precursor state ST6 has been won (step S1315).

When the transition to the present precursor state ST6 is won (step S1315: YES), "1" is set in the present precursor winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1316). This precursor winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the transition to the present precursor state ST6 has been won at the start of this game, and "1" is set for this precursor winning flag. If so, a process for shifting to the present precursor state ST6 is executed at the end of the game. That is, the game state shifts to the present precursor state ST6 in the next game of the winning game.

If the transition to the present precursor state ST6 is not won (step S1315: NO), the transition lottery process for the chance state is executed (step S1317). The details of the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described later. After that, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won in this game, or whether or not the current game state is the false precursor state ST5 (step S1318). If a negative determination is made in step S1318, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed (step S1319).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a transition lottery process for a false precursor state. In the transition lottery process, first, the false precursor transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1601). In this case, the false precursor transition table is set so that the winning number having a higher winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the false precursor state ST5. Further, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S1602). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. Transition to false precursor state ST5 In the lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is changed to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the written random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S1602 with the false precursor transition table read in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the transition to the false precursor state ST5 has been won (step S1603).

When the transition to the false precursor state ST5 is won (step S1603: YES), "1" is set in the false precursor winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1604). The false precursor winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the transition to the false precursor state ST5 has been won at the start of this game, and "1" is set in the false precursor winning flag. If so, a process for shifting to the false precursor state ST5 is executed at the end of the game. That is, the transition to the false precursor state ST5 The gaming state shifts to the false precursor state ST5 in the next game of the winning game.

By executing each transition lottery process as described above, in the case of the present precursor state ST6 or the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, and the chance state None of the transition lottery processes are executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 from being newly set in the situation where the present precursor state ST6 or the chance state ST7 has already been started.

On the other hand, even in the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize a new transition to the present precursor state ST6 or chance state ST7 that leads to the transition to the ART state ST9 over the execution of the false precursor state ST5 that does not lead to the transition to the ART state ST9. ..

If the false precursor state ST5 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the new false precursor state ST5 from being executed in duplicate even though the false precursor state ST5 has already been executed.

If none of the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7, the execution priority of each of the above transition lottery processes is the highest in the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, and the transition lottery process for the chance state is. It is the next highest, and the transition lottery process for false precursor states is set to the lowest. Further, in the case of the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state is set to have a higher execution priority than the transition lottery process for the chance state. As a result, the transition to the present precursor state ST6, which ensures the transition to the ART state ST9, is given the highest priority, and the priority of the chance state ST7 where the transition to the ART state ST9 can occur is changed to the ART state ST9. It is possible to raise the priority of the false precursor state ST5 in which the transition of the above does not occur.

In a game in which any of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" is set, if the transition lottery process for this precursor state does not result in a transition winning, the chance status is used. The transition lottery process is executed, and if the transition lottery process for the chance state does not result in a transition win, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which any of the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7 is set.

Here, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Will be done. The winning combinations corresponding to these winning numbers are all winning combinations having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". That is, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when the winning combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability is won. This makes it possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values of "1" to "6" with respect to the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2.

On the other hand, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are "4" to "8", "15" in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It is executed when any winning number of "16" is set. Of these winning numbers, "4", "6", "8", and "15" are roles in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" as described above. These winning numbers are the same as the winning numbers that trigger the execution of the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at least one of the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is the same. May be executed in the game.

Of the above winning numbers, "5", "7", and "16" are roles in which the winning probabilities differ between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are executed when a winning combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability is won, and also won. It is executed when a role with a difference in probability is won. As a result, there may be advantages or disadvantages between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the transition probability to the false precursor state ST5, the transition probability to the present precursor state ST6, and the transition probability to the chance state ST7. It becomes possible to.

However, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are executed on the condition that the game section is the advantageous section SC2. That is, the transition lottery process for this precursor state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are provided on the condition that the game is already started in the advantageous section SC2 or the game is won for the transition to the advantageous section SC2. And the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed. Therefore, regarding the transition to the advantageous section SC2, which is the pre-stage for causing the transition to the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7, it is advantageous between the set values of "1" to "6". After shifting to the advantageous section SC2, there is an advantage or disadvantage between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the transition to the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 while preventing any disadvantage. It is possible to make it possible.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The corresponding process at the end of the game is executed in step S411 in the normal process (FIG. 13). Since the process of step S411 is executed after the reel control process (step S409), it is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game.

First, a bonus process for performing transition control or progress control of the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is executed (step S1701). The bonus processing will be described in detail later. After that, the lottery mode control process is executed (step S1703) on condition that it is neither the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, nor the RB state ST4 (step S1702: NO). In the control process of the lottery mode, if the 1st RT replay winning is established in this game, the mode is shifted from the normal mode to the 1st RT mode, and if the 2nd RT replay winning is established in this game, the first Shift from 1RT mode to 2RT mode, and if the 1st fall replay prize is established in this game, shift from 1RT mode to normal mode, and the 2nd fall replay prize is established in this game. If so, the mode is changed from the second RT mode to the first RT mode.

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1704). Specifically, when the game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7, the normal process is executed (step S1705), and the game state is the ready state. If it is ST8, the preparation state process is executed (step S1706), and if the game state is the ART state ST9, the ART state process is executed (step S1707). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, or when any of the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 is executed, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S1708). In the second control process of the game section, a process for shifting the game section to the normal section SC1 is executed when the transition condition from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is satisfied.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control processing of the game section is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. It is executed after all the rotations of are stopped.

In steps S1801 to S1811, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, a process for terminating the advantageous section SC2 is executed. The contents of these processes will be described in detail later.

In the advantageous section SC2 (step S1803: YES), when a negative determination is made in step S1806, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 and the value of the advantage maintenance counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1812). The advantage maintenance counter is used when the advantage section SC2 is maintained over the number of advantageous maintenance games even after the transition to the normal game state ST1 when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the ART state ST9 ends. It is a counter for specifying the remaining number of games of the advantageous maintenance game number by the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1813). As already explained, after shifting to the advantageous section SC2, the unannounced flag is set with the winning numbers of "1" to "3" in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 17), and the first bell winning can be established. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has already occurred. Then, when the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the non-notification flag is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1813, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S1814). In the initialization process of the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if the player stays in any of the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating that the game states are ST5 to ST9, including a counter for storing the number of games. Since the process of step S1814 is executed on the condition that the normal game state is ST1, the process of clearing the advantageous section flag is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data. After that, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1815). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section in the advantageous section display unit 67 is terminated.

As described above, when the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, the transition to the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 may occur. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is terminated on condition that it is in the normal game state ST1, it is possible to establish the first bell prize in the case of the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed.

Although the details will be described later, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the advantageous section SC2, it becomes easier to shift to the ART state ST9 than when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the normal section SC1. In this case, as described above, when the false precursor state ST5 is maintained, the false precursor state ST5 is maintained in the advantageous section SC2, so that the player can expect the false precursor state ST5 to be the present precursor state ST6. It is possible to set not only the state but also the state in which the degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the false precursor state ST5.

Further, even in the normal game state ST1, if the unreported flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not terminated. As a result, even if the false precursor state ST5 ends or the chance state ST7 ends without the transition to the ART state ST9, the first bell winning is established after the advantageous section SC2 is started. The advantageous section SC2 will be continued until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the above is executed once. Then, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started in the situation where the advantageous section SC2 continues, the expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 becomes high. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning in the false precursor state ST5 or the chance state ST7 is notified, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible to plan.

The processes of steps S1816 to S1822 in the second control process of the game section are executed in the predetermined bonus internal state ST2. The process will be described in detail later.

Here, a state in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the return to the normal section SC1 are performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 46 (a) shows the period of the normal section SC1, FIG. 46 (b) shows the period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 46 (c) shows no setting difference in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The timing of winning a combination that is a combination and triggers the execution of the various transition lottery processes is shown. FIG. 46 (d) shows the combination having a setting difference in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the various transition lottery is described above. FIG. 46 (e) shows the execution period of the present precursor state ST6, and FIG. 46 (f) shows the execution period of the false precursor state ST5.

First, a case will be described in which a shift to the present precursor state ST6 also occurs in a game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), at the timing of t1 which is the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), “4”, “6”, “ By setting any of the winning numbers 8 ”and“ 15 ”(hereinafter, also referred to as the trigger winning numbers with no setting difference), the transfer lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transfer winning is achieved. As a result, at the timing of t1, the gaming section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). Further, at the timing of t1, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state is executed with the setting of the trigger winning number without the above setting difference as an opportunity, and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), the gaming state shifts to the present precursor state ST6. That is, in the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2, the shift to the present precursor state ST6 also occurs. Then, when the state shifts to the present precursor state ST6, the state finally shifts to the ART state ST9.

Next, a case where the transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs in a game after the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, and the advantageous section SC2 also ends when the false precursor state ST5 ends will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), at the timing of t2, which is the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), “5”, “7”, “ Win any of the winning numbers of "16" (hereinafter, also referred to as the opportunity winning number with a setting difference). In this case, even if the normal section SC1 and the trigger winning number with a setting difference are set, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is not executed. Therefore, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition for the present precursor state The lottery process is not executed. The transition lottery process for the chance state is not executed either.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 executed thereby is performed. As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. However, at the timing of t3, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the present precursor state are executed, but the transition lottery process does not win the transition.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the trigger winning number with a setting difference is set in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the present precursor state are executed. Then, by winning the transition in the transition lottery process for the false precursor state, the transition to the false precursor state ST5 is performed as shown in FIG. 46 (f).

After that, at the timing of t5, the number of continuous games remaining in the false precursor state ST5 becomes "0", and the end condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false precursor state ST5 becomes as shown in FIG. 46 (f). It ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, the information of the winning number of any of "1" to "3" is already set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) by the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, and the first bell winning is established. Since the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the above is notified, the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the end condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied at the timing of t5, the end condition of the advantageous section SC2 is also satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the gaming section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing of t5.

Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs in the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2, and the advantageous section SC2 ends in the game after the game in which the false precursor state ST5 ends. ..

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), at the timing of t6, which is the situation of the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By doing so, the transfer lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transfer is won. As a result, at the timing of t6, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). Further, at the timing of t6, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed triggered by the setting of the trigger winning number without the above setting difference, and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the gaming state shifts to the false precursor state ST5. That is, in the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2, the shift to the false precursor state ST5 also occurs.

After that, at the timing of t7, the number of remaining continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 becomes "0", and the end condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false precursor state ST5 becomes as shown in FIG. 46 (f). It ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. However, since the information of the winning numbers of "1" to "3" has not already been set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, it is possible to establish the first bell prize. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, and the unnotified flag of the main RAM 74 remains set to "1". Therefore, even if the end condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied at the timing of t7, the end condition of the advantageous section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the advantageous section SC2 is maintained at the timing of t7.

After that, at the timing of t8, the winning number information of any of "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the reels 32L, 32M that enable the establishment of the first bell winning. By notifying the stop order of, 32R, the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the gaming section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing of t8.

As described above, the advantageous section SC2 ends together in the game in which the false precursor state ST5 ends according to the timing at which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is executed. In some cases, it may end in a game after the game in which the false precursor state ST5 has ended. As a result, it is possible to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2, and it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous section SC2 is maintained even if the false precursor state ST5 ends. Become. The advantageous section SC2 does not end before the false precursor state ST5 ends. Further, regarding the chance state ST7, the advantageous section SC2 may end together in the game in which the chance state ST7 ends, or the advantageous section SC2 may end in the game after the game in which the chance state ST7 ends. is there.

Next, a case where the transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs in the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2, and the transition to the main precursor state ST6 occurs in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), at the timing of t9, which is the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By doing so, the transfer lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transfer is won. As a result, at the timing of t9, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). Further, at the timing of t9, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed triggered by the setting of the trigger winning number without the above setting difference, and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the gaming state shifts to the false precursor state ST5. That is, in the game in which the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2, the shift to the false precursor state ST5 also occurs.

After that, at the timing of t10, which is a situation in which the false precursor state ST5 continues as shown in FIG. 46 (f), there is a setting difference in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46 (d). The winning number is set. In this case, since it is already set in the advantageous section SC2 and is in the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process for the present precursor state is executed. Then, by winning the transition in the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated in the middle and the present precursor state ST6 is newly added as shown in FIGS. 46 (e) and 46 (f). Is started on. When the state shifts to the present precursor state ST6, the state finally shifts to the ART state ST9.

As described above, even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, if the trigger winning number with a setting difference is set, the transition to the present precursor state ST6 occurs, so the production corresponding to the precursor states ST5 and ST6 is executed. Even in the middle of the game, the player expects to win the role corresponding to the winning number with the setting difference. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player in the situation where the effects corresponding to the precursor states ST5 and ST6 are being executed.

<Regarding the execution control of the effects of the precursor states ST5, ST6 and the chance state ST7>
Next, the execution control of the effects of the precursor states ST5 and ST6 and the chance state ST7 will be described. First, the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The transition lottery process for the chance state is executed in step S1317 in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section. Since the first control process of the game section is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, the transition lottery process for the chance state is also executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game. ..

First, the chance transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1901). In this case, the chance transition table is set so that the winning number having the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the chance state ST7. Further, the chance state ST7 has a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 is relatively high or low. In the chance transition table, the random number range for the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode, and the random number range for the chance state ST7, which is the low probability mode, are set separately as the random number range for the transition to the chance state ST7. ing. In this case, the chance transition table is set so that the winning number having the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S1902). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition lottery process for the chance state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S1902 with the chance transition table read in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won (step S1903).

When the transition to the chance state ST7 is won (step S1903: YES), "1" is set in the chance winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1904). The chance winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won at the start of this game, and when "1" is set in the chance winning flag. Is executed to shift to the chance state ST7 at the end of the game. That is, the game state shifts to the chance state ST7 in the next game of the winning game. Further, when the transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode, is won (step S1905: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1906). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the high-probability mode is in the chance state ST7.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. The normal process is executed in step S1705 in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Will be executed.

When "1" is set in the chance winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2001: YES), it means that the transition to the chance state ST7 was won at the start of this game. In this case, the transition setting process of the chance state ST7 is executed. Specifically, "5" is set as information on the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 in the chance state counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2002). The chance state counter is a counter for specifying that the chance state is ST7 and the number of continuous games remaining in the chance state ST7 by the main MPU 72. When a positive judgment is made in step S2001, the chance winning flag is cleared to "0".

After that, a chance start command indicating that the chance state ST7 is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2003). The production side MPU 92 receives the chance start command to start the production corresponding to the chance state ST7.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the false precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2004). The false precursor counter is a counter for specifying the false precursor state ST5 and the number of remaining continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 by the main MPU 72. When the value of the false precursor counter is 1 or more (step S2004: YES), the termination process of the false precursor state ST5 is executed in order to terminate the false precursor state ST5 (step S2005). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". That is, the chance state ST7 may be started even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and if the chance state ST7 is started in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is interrupted. It will be terminated even if it is in the middle.

When the game shifts to the chance state ST7, a positive judgment is made in step S1309 in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of one game, and the chance state Process is executed (step S1310).

<About processing for chance state>
Here, the processing for the chance state will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the process for the chance state.

First, by determining whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the chance state ST7 this time is the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S2101). .. When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S2101: NO), the low probability lottery table 112 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2102). On the other hand, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S2101: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2103).

FIG. 50 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-probability lottery table 112, and FIG. 50 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-probability lottery table 113.

In either of the low-probability lottery table 112 and the high-probability lottery table 113, lottery value information is set corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination. Each of these lottery value information has a data capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). For the winning numbers "9" to "14" corresponding to the bonus winning data in either the low-probability lottery table 112 or the high-probability lottery table 113, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. The lottery value information corresponding to those winning numbers is set so as to be performed. As for the other winning numbers, the lottery numbers having a lower probability of being won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) regardless of whether the lottery table 112 for low probability or the lottery table 113 for high probability The lottery value information corresponding to those winning numbers is set so that the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 is high. In this case, when compared with the same winning number, the lottery value information is such that the lottery table 113 for high probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the lottery table 112 for low probability. It is set. In particular, for the winning numbers of "15" and "16", the lottery value information is set so that the lottery table 112 for low probability may not be won in the transition to the ART state ST9. In the lottery table 113 for high probability, lottery value information is set so that the transition winning to the ART state ST9 is confirmed.

When the process of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2104). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition process to the ART state ST9, the random numbers written in the 16th latch register 103p are acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, since the 7-bit random number is updated in the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d, random numbers of "0" to "127" are generated, and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and normal processing is performed. The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). The acquired random numbers are stored in the acquired random number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, the lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination in this game is acquired from the lottery tables 112 and 113 read out in step S2102 or step S2103 (step S2105). For example, when the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination process (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode, the information of "80" in decimal number and "01010000" in binary number is acquired as the lottery value information. To do. Further, when the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the information of "255" in decimal number and "11111111" in binary number is used as the lottery value information. get.

After that, the subtraction process is executed (step S2106). In the subtraction process, the lottery value information acquired from the low-probability lottery table 112 or the high-probability lottery table 113 in step S2105 was subtracted from the random numbers acquired in the acquisition random number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 in step S2104. Perform arithmetic processing to obtain the result. In the calculation process, the lottery value information may be actually subtracted from the random numbers acquired by the acquired random number counter 74e, the 2's complement of the lottery value information is calculated, and the calculated 2's complement is used by the acquired random number counter 74e. By adding, the same result as when the lottery value information is actually subtracted from the random numbers acquired in the acquired random number counter 74e may be derived.

In the case of the configuration in which the lottery value information is actually subtracted, the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further subtracted from the all-zero state in the subtraction process, and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1". In other words, when the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the minimum value to the maximum value, "1" is set in the carry flag 114 provided on the main MPU 72, and the update from the minimum value to the maximum value is performed. If is not performed, the state in which the carry flag 114 is set to "0" is maintained. Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than all zero and a carry has occurred.

On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the two's complement of the lottery value information is added, the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further added from the state of all "1" in the process of addition, and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are added. When the all-zero state is reached, that is, when the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, "1" is set in the carry flag 114 provided on the main MPU 72, and the minimum value is set to the minimum value. If the value is not updated, the state in which "0" is set in the carry flag 114 is maintained. Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "0", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than all zero and a carry has occurred.

When the result of the subtraction process is less than all zero and a carry occurs (step S2107: YES), it is assumed that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won, and the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". "(Step S2108). The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of this game, and when "1" is set in the ART winning flag. Is executed at the end of the game to shift to the ready state ST8. That is, the transition to the ART state ST9 In the next game of the winning game, the gaming state shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the pre-stage to the ART state ST9.

The handling of numerical information when the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51. A case where the lottery value information is actually subtracted from the random number of the acquired random number counter 74e in the subtraction process of step S2106 will be described.

First, a case where the result of the subtraction process does not fall below all zero will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (a1) to 51 (a4).

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51 (a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51 (a2). After that, since the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode this time, FIG. 51 (a3) is used as lottery value information from the low probability lottery table 112. The information of "01010000" is acquired as shown in. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51 (a3) is subtracted from the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 51 (a2), so that the acquired random number counter 74e is shown in FIG. 51 (a4). The information of is "00010000". In this case, an event in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further subtracted from the all-zero state and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1", that is, the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is the minimum value. Since the event of updating to the maximum value has not occurred, the state in which "0" is set in the carry flag 114 is maintained. Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, a case where the result of the subtraction process is less than all zero will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (b1) to 51 (b4).

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51 (b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51 (b2). After that, since the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode this time, FIG. 51 (b3) is used as lottery value information from the high probability lottery table 113. The information of "11111111" is acquired as shown in. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51 (b3) is subtracted from the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 51 (b2), so that the acquired random number counter 74e is shown in FIG. 51 (b4). The information of is "01100001". In this case, an event in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further subtracted from the all-zero state and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1", that is, the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is the minimum value. Since the event of updating to the maximum value has occurred, the carry flag 114 is set to "1". Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is a bit number less than the number of 1-byte bits. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery will be performed in any situation where a situation in which 100% winning is achieved and a situation in which the situation is likely to be lost occur. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, and if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for causing a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, it will be all zero after subtraction. Unless the situation is treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to the 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if the situation where all zeros are obtained after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to exclude the acquisition of all zeros as random numbers. Therefore, when the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as the number of bits larger than the number of bits of 1 byte. It ends up. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of 1-byte bits, so that the lottery value corresponds to 100%. It is possible to use 1-byte lottery value information as information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the lottery value information in advance.

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 48), when the value of the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and the gaming state is the chance state ST7 (step S2006: YES), the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether or not "1" is set (step S2007). When "1" is set in the ART winning flag (step S2007: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, both the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 and the chance status counter are cleared to "0". In addition, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2009). The production side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command to start the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the ART winning flag (step S2007: NO), the value of the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2010). Then, when the value of the chance state counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2011: YES), the chance state ST7 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a chance end command indicating that the chance state ST7 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2012). When the production side MPU 92 receives the chance end command, the production corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1 is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main precursor winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2013). When "1" is set in the main sign winning flag, it means that the transition to the main sign state ST6 was won at the start of this game. In this case, the transition setting process of this precursor state ST6 is executed. Specifically, the setting process of the precursor counter is executed (step S2014). The precursor counter is a counter for specifying that the precursor state is ST6 and the number of continuous games remaining in the precursor state ST6 by the main MPU 72. In the setting process of the precursor counter, the number of continuous games in the precursor state ST6 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l corresponding to the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuous games selected by this lottery is any of 5 to 10, and the winning probability of the long continuous games is set higher than the winning probability of the short continuous games. When an affirmative decision is made in step S2013, the precursory winning flag is cleared to "0".

After that, the present precursor start command indicating that the present precursor state ST6 has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2015). Information on the number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6 to be started this time is set in the present precursor start command. By receiving the present precursor start command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the present precursor state ST6 to be started.

After that, on condition that the value of the false precursor counter is 1 or more (step S2016: YES), the termination process of the false precursor state ST5 is executed in order to terminate the false precursor state ST5 (step S2017). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". That is, the present precursor state ST6 may be started even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and if the present precursor state ST6 is started in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is interrupted. It will be terminated even if it is in the middle of the process.

When a negative determination is made in step S2013, the value of the precursor counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2018: YES) (step S2019). Then, when the value of the precursor counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2020: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S2021). In the setting process, as described above, both the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 and the chance status counter are cleared to "0", and the preparation status process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. The information of the main RAM 74 is set so as to be performed. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2022). The production side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command to start the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

When a negative determination is made in step S2018, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2023). When "1" is set in the false precursor winning flag, it means that the transition to the false precursor state ST5 was won at the start of this game. In this case, the transition setting process of the false precursor state ST5 is executed. Specifically, the setting process of the false precursor counter is executed (step S2024). The false precursor counter is a counter for specifying the false precursor state ST5 and the number of remaining continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 by the main MPU 72. In the setting process of the false precursor counter, the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l corresponding to the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuous games selected by this lottery is any of 5 to 10, and the winning probability of the short continuous games is set higher than the winning probability of the long continuous games. When an affirmative decision is made in step S2023, the false precursor winning flag is cleared to "0".

After that, a false precursor start command indicating that the false precursor state ST5 has been started is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S2025). Information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 to be started this time is set in the false precursor start command. By receiving the false precursor start command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the false precursor state ST5 to be started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2023, the value of the false precursor counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the false precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2026: YES) (step S2027). The main MPU 72 identifies that the gaming state is the false precursor state ST5 when the value of the false precursor counter is 1 or more, and false precursor when the value of the false precursor counter after 1 subtraction becomes "0". Identify that the state ST5 has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S2026, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the advantage maintenance counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2028: YES) (step S2029). As described above, the advantage maintenance counter maintains the advantageous section SC2 over the number of advantageous maintenance games even after the transition to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST9 ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining games in the number of advantageous maintenance games. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 identifies the advantage maintenance section, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter after subtraction becomes "0", the advantage maintenance section ends. Identify that.

Next, a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal effect control process is repeated in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the effect side MPU 92 when the game states are the normal game state ST1, the false precursor state ST5, the present precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Will be executed.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main precursor effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2201). This precursor effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the present precursor state ST6 is being executed. When the value of the present precursor effect flag is "0" (step S2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the present precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2202). When this precursor start command is received (step S2202: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2203). The false precursor effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the false precursor state ST5 is being executed.

When "1" is not set in the false precursor effect flag (step S2203: NO), the start setting process of the present precursor effect is executed (step S2204). In the start setting process of the present precursor effect, the information on the number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6 set in the present precursor start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table of the present precursor effect corresponding to the information on the number of continuous games is read, and the content of the series of present precursor effects in the present precursor state ST6 is determined by lottery using the determination table of the present precursor effect. , The present precursor effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the present precursor effect table, the present precursor effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Although the details will be described later, in the main MPU 72, although the game state is not the chance state ST7, the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 may be executed. When the main precursor start command is received from the main MPU 72 under such a situation, the start setting process of the present precursor effect in step S2204 is executed, so that the chance effect is ended and the present precursor effect is started. .. In this case, the chance effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

When "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag (step S2203: YES), it means that the present precursor state ST6 is started in the middle of the false precursor state ST5. In this case, the adjustment process of the precursor effect is executed (step S2205). In the adjustment process of the precursor effect, the present precursor effect table for executing the present precursor effect having continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false precursor effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side RAM 94. To memorize. In this case, the present precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6 set in the present precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the present precursor effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image have contents that are continuous with the contents of the false precursor effect that have been executed until then. This precursor effect is executed on the display device 63. If the present precursor effect is started in the middle of the false precursor effect, the number of games of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far and the main precursor effect that will be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 The precursory effect of the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

When the process of step S2204 or step S2205 is executed, "1" is set for the main precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94, and the value of the false precursor effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S2206).

When "1" is set in this precursor effect flag (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2207). Receiving the preparation start command means that the precursor state ST6 has ended and the state has shifted to the preparation state ST8. In this case, the start setting process of the preparation effect is executed (step S2208). In the start setting process of the preparatory effect, the preparatory effect table that enables the execution of the preparatory effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparatory effect table, the preparatory effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the preparation state is ST8 by confirming the effect. After that, the value of this precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2209).

When the preparation start command has not been received (step S2207: NO), the update setting process of this precursor effect is executed (step S2210). In the update setting process, if it is the update timing of the present precursor effect by newly executing one game, the range to be referred to in the present precursor effect table currently being referred to is the range of one game. Execute the process to change according to the new start. As a result, the execution content of the present precursor effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the present precursor effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2211). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. When the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S2211: NO), it is determined whether or not the chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2212). When the chance start command is received (step S2212: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2213).

When "1" is not set in the false precursor effect flag (step S2213: NO), the chance effect start setting process is executed (step S2214). In the chance effect start setting process, the chance effect table that enables the execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. As already explained, the chance state ST7 will continue for 5 games unless the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in the middle. Therefore, in the chance effect table, data corresponding to the effect that continues for 5 games is set. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the chance effect table, the chance effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the chance state is ST7 by confirming the effect. After that, "1" is set in the chance production flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S2215).

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag (step S2213: YES), "1" is set in the chance standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2216). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that it is in a state of waiting for the start of the chance effect because the false precursor effect corresponding to the false precursor state ST5 is being executed. Here, in the main MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated in the middle and the transition to the chance state ST7 is performed. On the other hand, even if the production side MPU 92 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor effect, the main side MPU 72 does not end the false precursor effect in the middle, and the control corresponding to the chance state ST7 is performed. Even if it is executed, the false precursor effect is continued. As a result, the transition to the chance state ST7 is prioritized over the continuation of the false precursor state ST5 as the game state, so that the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7 is secured, and the false precursor effect is produced as the production. By continuing it, it is possible to prevent the content of the production from giving a sense of discomfort.

When "1" is set in the chance effect flag (step S2211: YES), it is determined whether or not the preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2217). Receiving the preparation start command means that the player has transitioned to the ready state ST8 by winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7. In this case, the start setting process of the preparation effect is executed (step S2218). In the start setting process of the preparatory effect, the preparatory effect table that enables the execution of the preparatory effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparatory effect table, the preparatory effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the preparation state is ST8 by confirming the effect.

When the preparation start command is not received (step S2217: NO), it is determined whether or not the information to be referred to in the chance effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect. Thereby, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the chance effect (step S2219). When the number of continuous games is exhausted in the chance state ST7, the chance end command is transmitted from the main MPU 72, but whether or not the production side MPU 92 has received the chance end command when grasping the end timing of the chance production. Does not specify. Furthermore, even if the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72, if the information to be referred to in the chance effect table is not the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect, it is not determined that it is the end timing of the chance effect. .. As a result, although the details will be described later, when the execution of the chance effect is delayed due to the execution of the false precursor effect, the chance effect is executed over 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. It becomes possible.

When it is the end timing of the chance effect (step S2219: YES), the end setting process of the chance effect is executed (step S2220). In the end setting process of the chance effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93 and produced. It is stored in the side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 correspond to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1. After the normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the chance state ST7 has ended and returned to the normal game state ST1.

When the process of step S2218 or step S2220 is executed, the value of the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2221). If a negative determination is made in step S2219, the chance effect update setting process is executed (step S2222). In the update setting process, if it is the update timing of the chance effect due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referred to in the chance effect table currently being referred to is the new range of one game. Execute the process to change according to the start. As a result, the execution content of the chance effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the chance effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S2212, or when the process of step S2216 is executed, the effect control process for the false precursor state is executed (step S2223). FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for a false precursor state.

When "1" is not set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2301: NO), it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2302). When the false precursor start command is received (step S2302: YES), the start setting process of the false precursor effect is executed (step S2303). In the false precursor effect start setting process, the information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 set in the false precursor start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table of the false precursor effect corresponding to the information on the number of continuous games is read, and the content of the series of false precursor effects in the false precursor state ST5 is determined by lottery using the determination table of the false precursor effect. , The false precursor effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the false precursor effect table, the false precursor effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2304).

When "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2301: YES), the information to be referred to in the false precursor effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false precursor effect. By determining whether or not it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S2305). When it is the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S2305: YES), the start of the chance effect is awaited by determining whether or not the chance wait flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S2306).

When "1" is set in the chance waiting flag (step S2306: YES), the chance effect start setting process is executed (step S2307). In the chance effect start setting process, the chance effect table that enables the execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the chance effect table, the chance effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the chance state is ST7 by confirming the effect.

Even if the chance production start setting process is triggered by the chance standby flag being set to "1", the chance production start setting is immediately executed when the chance start command is received from the main MPU 72. Similar to the processing, the chance effect table in which the data corresponding to the chance effect to be continued for 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7, is set is used. Then, as described above, in the situation where the chance production is being executed, the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72 unless the information to be referred to in the chance production table is the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance production. Even so, the chance production is not finished. As a result, the chance state ST7 is reached while the false precursor effect is being executed, and the chance effect is waited until the false precursor effect is completed, and the chance effect is started after the false precursor effect is completed. However, the chance effect is executed over 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the chance state ST7 is to be continued for 5 games.

After that, the chance standby flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", the chance production flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the false precursor effect flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2308).

If "1" is not set in the chance standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 at the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S2305: YES, step S2306: NO), has the false precursor start command been received from the main MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S2309). As already explained, in the main MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated and the chance state ST7 is started, whereas the production side MPU 92 continues the false precursor effect. In this case, for example, if the first false precursor state ST5 becomes the chance state ST7 one game after it is determined to continue for 10 games, and the chance state ST7 does not win the transition to the ART state ST9, the effect is produced. At the stage where the seventh game of the false precursor effect is executed on the side MPU 92, the game state of the main MPU 72 is neither the false precursor state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. Then, if the main MPU 72 decides to shift to the false precursor state ST5 under the situation, the directing MPU 92 will newly receive the false precursor start command in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed. ..

When the false precursor start command has not been received (step S2309: NO), the end setting process of the false precursor effect is executed (step S2310). In the end setting process of the false precursor effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false precursor state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. It is stored in the production side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, the false precursor state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the precursor effect has ended and has returned to the normal game state ST1.

When the false precursor start command is received (step S2309: YES), the false precursor effect adjustment process is executed (step S2311). In the adjustment process of the false precursor effect, the false precursor effect table for executing the false precursor effect having the continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false precursor effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side. Store in RAM 94. In this case, the false precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 set in the false precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the false precursor effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image have contents that are continuous with the contents of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far. A false precursor effect is executed on the display device 63. If the false precursor effect is started in the middle of the false precursor effect, the number of games of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far and the false precursor effect that will be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed. The precursory effect of the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

When it is not the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S2305: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2312). When "1" is set in the chance waiting flag (step S2312: YES), it is determined whether or not the preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2313). As described above, even in the situation where the effect side MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false precursor effect, the game state in the main side MPU 72 may be the chance state ST7. Then, in such a situation, the main MPU 72 wins the transition in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7, so that even in a situation where the false precursor effect is executed, the main MPU 72 A preparation start command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92.

When the preparation start command is received (step S2313: YES), the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S2314). In the start setting process of the preparatory effect, the preparatory effect table that enables the execution of the preparatory effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparatory effect table, the preparatory effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the preparation state is ST8 by confirming the effect. In addition, when the start setting process of the preparatory effect is executed in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in a way that interrupts the series of stories of the false precursor effect. The production to be performed is executed. After that, the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", and the chance standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2315).

When the chance wait flag is set to "1" and the preparation start command is not received from the main MPU 72 (step S2312: YES, step S2313: NO), the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (step S2316). When the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 controlled by the main MPU 72 is exhausted in the situation where the false precursor effect is executed, the main MPU 72 sets the chance standby flag to "1". Receive the chance end command. When the chance end command is received (step S2316: YES), the chance wait flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2317).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2312 or a negative determination is made in step S2316, it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2318). As already explained, in the main MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated and the chance state ST7 is started, whereas the production side MPU 92 continues the false precursor effect. In this case, for example, if the first false precursor state ST5 becomes the chance state ST7 one game after it is determined to continue for 10 games, and the chance state ST7 does not win the transition to the ART state ST9, the effect is produced. At the stage where the seventh game of the false precursor effect is executed on the side MPU 92, the game state of the main MPU 72 is neither the false precursor state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. Then, if the main MPU 72 decides to shift to the false precursor state ST5 under the situation, the directing MPU 92 will newly receive the false precursor start command in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed. ..

When the false precursor effect start command has not been received (step S2318: NO), the update setting process of the false precursor effect is executed (step S2319). In the update setting process, if it is the update timing of the false precursor effect due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referred to in the false precursor effect table currently being referred to is the range of one game. Execute the process to change according to the new start. As a result, the execution content of the false precursor effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the false precursor effect.

When the false precursor effect command is received (step S2318: YES), the false precursor effect adjustment process is executed (step S2320). In the adjustment process of the false precursor effect, the false precursor effect table for executing the false precursor effect having the continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false precursor effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side. Store in RAM 94. In this case, the false precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 set in the false precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the false precursor effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image have contents that are continuous with the contents of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far. A false precursor effect is executed on the display device 63. If the false precursor effect is started in the middle of the false precursor effect, the number of games of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far and the false precursor effect that will be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed. The precursory effect of the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

Next, a state in which the false precursor effect and the chance effect are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 (a) shows the period of stay in the false precursor state ST5, FIG. 54 (b) shows the period of stay in the chance state ST7, and FIG. 54 (c) shows the period of stay in the ready state ST8. FIG. 54 (d) shows the period during which the false precursor effect is executed, FIG. 54 (e) shows the period during which the chance effect is executed, and FIG. 54 (f) shows the ART state ST9. Indicates the period during which the effect indicating that the winner has been won is being executed.

First, a case where the chance state ST7 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 but the chance state ST7 ends before the end of the false precursor effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the false precursor state ST5 is started by the control by the main MPU 72 at the timing of t1, and as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the false precursor effect is produced by the control by the effect side MPU 92. To be started. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the gaming state shifts from the false precursor state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54 (e), and the false precursor effect continues as shown in FIG. 54 (d). Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 is exhausted at the timing of t3, which is the situation in which the false precursor effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b). The chance state ST7 ends under the control of the main MPU 72. Even in this case, since the number of continuous games of the false precursor effect set at the timing when the transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs at the timing of t1 is not digested, the false precursor state is false as shown in FIG. 54 (d). The precursory production will continue. After that, at the timing of t4, the number of continuous games of the false precursor effect is exhausted, so that the false precursor effect is completed as shown in FIG. 54 (d).

Next, a case where the transition to the chance state ST7 is performed in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 and the transition to the ART state ST9 is won while the false precursor effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the false precursor state ST5 is started by the control by the main MPU 72 at the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the false precursor effect is produced by the control by the effect side MPU 92. To be started. After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the gaming state shifts from the false precursor state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54 (e), and the false precursor effect continues as shown in FIG. 54 (d). Will be done.

After that, at the timing of t7, the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed in the chance state ST7 controlled by the main MPU 72, and the transition winning is achieved in the transition lottery process. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the gaming state shifts from the chance state ST7 to the preparation state ST8 under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c). Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 54 (d) and 54 (f), the false precursor effect is ended, and the effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won is started. Then, the effect is executed until the timing of t8.

As described above, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness by suddenly executing the effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won in the middle of the false precursor effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a case will be described in which the chance effect shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and the chance effect is continuously started by being in the chance state ST7 even at the timing when the false precursor effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the false precursor state ST5 is started by the control by the main MPU 72 at the timing of t9, and as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the false precursor effect is produced by the control by the effect side MPU 92. To be started. After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the gaming state shifts from the false precursor state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54 (e), and the false precursor effect continues as shown in FIG. 54 (d). Will be done.

After that, at the timing of t11, which is the situation where the chance state ST7 is maintained in the control by the main MPU 72, the false precursor effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 54 (d), and is shown in FIG. 54 (e). The chance production is started. In this case, since the predetermined number of games has already been consumed after shifting to the chance state ST7 at the timing of the t11, the remaining number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 is from 5 games which is the end reference game number of the chance state ST7. The number of games is small. However, the number of continuous games of the chance effect started at the timing of t11 is set to 5 games, which is the number of end reference games of the chance state ST7.

After that, at the timing of t12, the chance state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 54 (b). However, since the number of continuous games for chance production still remains at the timing of t12, the chance production is continued as shown in FIG. 54 (e). Therefore, after the timing of t12, the chance effect is executed even though the game state is not the chance state ST7. After that, at the timing of t13, the chance effect is completed as shown in FIG. 54 (e).

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 before and after the timing of t11 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b). FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which an image corresponding to the false precursor effect is displayed on the image display device 63 at a timing before the timing of t11, and FIG. 55 (b) shows an image after the timing of t11. It shows how the display device 63 has started to display the image corresponding to the chance effect.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the false precursor effect, the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed on the image display device 63, and the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed. The video is displayed as if they were facing each other. It should be noted that such a moving image display that confronts each other is also executed in this precursory production. In addition, if the precursory effect ends without winning the transition to the ART state ST9, a moving image is finally displayed such that the first character image G4 is defeated by the second character image G5, and the ART state ST9 is reached. When the precursory effect is completed after the transition is won, the moving image is displayed so that the first character image G4 finally wins the second character image G5.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the chance effect, the suggestion image G6 suggesting that the chance state is ST7 is displayed on the image display device 63, and the number of games image G7 indicating the number of continuous games remaining in the chance effect. Is displayed. In this case, the false precursor effect is terminated when the chance effect is started at the timing when the control by the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7, or when the control by the main MPU 72 is in the chance state ST7. In any case where the chance effect is started following the precursor effect, an image showing 5 games, which is the number of end reference games of the chance state ST7, is displayed as the game number image G7. As a result, since the game in the chance state ST7 has already been digested in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed, the number of remaining continuous games in the chance state ST7 at the timing when the chance effect is started following the false precursor effect. Even if the number of games is less than the number of end reference games, it is possible to expect the player to win the transition to the ART state ST9 over the number of end reference games.

Further, in the chance state ST7, each game is given an opportunity to execute the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, and even in the middle of the chance state ST7, if the transition to the ART state ST9 is won. A transition to the ready state ST8 occurs. Therefore, if the number of continuous games of the chance effect is larger than the number of remaining continuous games of the chance state ST7 in the case where the chance effect is executed following the false precursor effect, even before the end of the chance state ST7. For example, a transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur while the chance effect is being executed, and in a situation where the chance effect is being executed after the chance state ST7 is completed, the chance state ST7 is changed to the ART state ST9. It is possible to make the player recognize that the transition has not been won.

<About processing related to bonus status>
Next, the processing related to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus process is executed in step S1701 in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the bonus processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Will be executed.

When the BB winning data corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S2401: YES), "1" is set in the BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2402). The BB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the BB state is ST3.

When the BB prize established this time is the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize (step S2403: YES), "1" is set in the specific bonus flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2404). The third BB winning data that enables the establishment of the third BB prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22). Is also set to the index value IV = 7, and the 4th BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 4th BB winning is set to the index value IV = 8 in any of these lottery tables. Then, these index values IV = 7 and 8 are set as the winning probabilities having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". That is, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus prize has been established in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability. Details will be described later, but if a bonus prize with a setting difference in the winning probability is established, the setting to shift the game section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 is not made at the start of the bonus state. If a bonus prize is established in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, the game section is set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, when the RB winning corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S2405: YES), "1" is set in the RB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2406). The RB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the RB state is ST4.

Further, when the RB prize established this time is the first RB prize (step S2407: YES), "1" is set in the specific bonus flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2408). The first RB winning data that enables the establishment of the first RB prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22). Is also set to the index value IV = 9. Then, the index value IV = 9 is set as a winning combination having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order to specify in step S2408 that the RB winning this time corresponds to the establishment of the bonus winning in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, "1" is set in the specific bonus flag in step S2408. Set.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2403, when the process of step S2404 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S2407, or when the process of step S2408 is executed, the bonus combination corresponding to the current bonus prize is won. It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of playing is the present precursor state ST6 (step S2409). The precursor state ST6 is a gaming state in which the transition to the preparation state ST8 is confirmed when the number of continuous games in the precursor state ST6 is exhausted. Therefore, in the case of the present precursor state ST6 (step S2409 :: YES), the ART winning process is executed in order to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the end of the current bonus state (step S2410). In the ART winning process, "1" is set in the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the end of the bonus state. Further, in the ART winning process, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 is set after the end of the current bonus state at the start of the current bonus state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409 or the process of step S2410 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2411). The total payout counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given to the player in the bonus state by the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 specifies whether or not the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

After that, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2412). Information indicating whether the bonus state to be started this time is the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is set in the bonus start command. By receiving the bonus start command, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the type of bonus state to be started this time to be started.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2413). The main ending effect flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, which will be described in detail later. is there. If a negative determination is made in step S2413, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2414).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this way, in a state where the start of a new game is awaited, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state, thereby shifting to the bonus state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the occurrence of the above, and it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes “0”.

When "1" is set in the BB flag or RB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2415: YES), the bonus state process is executed (step S2416). In the bonus state processing, the progress of the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is controlled.

Next, the bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. The bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S618 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The process of step S618 is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

If this is the start game of the bonus state, which is the first game to be executed after the transition to the bonus state (step S2501: YES), the process for the start game of the bonus state shown in steps S2502 to S2520 is executed. Specifically, by first determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the bonus state of this time is started in the advantageous section SC2. (Step S2502). When "1" is set in the advantageous section flag (step S2502: YES), a process for giving the player a profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2506 is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of starting the bonus state in the situation of the advantageous section SC2.

As described above, when the false precursor state ST5 is reached, although the false precursor effect is executed, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the false precursor state ST5 is completed. However, in the false precursor state ST5, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained. In this case, if the bonus state is started in the situation of the advantageous section SC2 as described above, the profit regarding the ART state ST9 can be given to the player. As a result, the false precursor state ST5 is made to function not only as a game state for the player to expect the present precursor state ST6, but also as a game state which is advantageous to the player by starting the bonus state. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the precursory effect.

Even if "1" is not set in the advantageous section flag (step S2502: NO), if "1" is set in the specific bonus flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2503: YES), the main side The advantageous section flag of the RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504), and the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S2505). The case where "1" is set in the specific bonus flag is a case where the bonus state of this time is triggered by a bonus combination in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability as already explained. That is, when the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability is reached, the game in which the bonus state is started even if the game section before the bonus state is the normal section SC1. Will be set in the advantageous section SC2. Then, by setting the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state is started, a process for giving the player a profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2506 is executed. Therefore, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which the setting difference does not exist in the winning probability may be set to the more advantageous bonus state than the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which the setting difference exists in the winning probability. It will be possible.

Here, as a bonus combination in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, a combination in which the third BB winning data is set (index value IV = 7) and a combination in which the fourth BB winning data is set (index value IV = 8). However, in the case of the bonus internal state ST2 in which the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data is set in the advantageous section SC2, an opportunity to shift from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is given. Be done. Since the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated when the number of continuous games reaches the upper limit, the number of games digested in a situation other than the ART state ST9 may not be measured as the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 as much as possible. preferable. In this case, if the bonus state is reached and the situation is such that the advantageous section SC2 is surely set in the starting game, the game is temporarily shifted to the normal section SC1 before the bonus state is started. By obtaining, for example, in the false precursor state ST5, when the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability is started, the false precursor state ST5 is the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to clear the number of games digested in 1 and then move to the advantageous section SC2.

The processing configuration for causing the action will be described. In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 45), when the bonus internal state ST2 in which the third BB winning data or the fourth BB winning data is set (step S1816: YES), the gaming state in which the winning data is set is set. Is any of the present precursor state ST6, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 (step S1817). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1817, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is prevented from being executed. In the case of shifting to the normal section SC1, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the right to execute the ART state ST9 is also lost. The initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is not executed so as not to cause the loss of the right.

When a negative determination is made in step S1817, it is determined whether or not the information of the winning number of any of "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1818). These winning numbers are winning numbers in which the first bell winning is established when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the correct stopping order. In the bonus internal state ST2, even if it is the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified even if the information of the winning number is set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1818, it is determined whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game is the stop order corresponding to the fall (step S1819). The stop order for falling is the stop order in which the first bell winning is not established, and is set as a different stop order for each of the winning numbers "1" to "3". Further, the stop order for falling is a stop order in which the stop orders of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are defined. By setting the stop order for the fall, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by the player accidentally matches the stop order for the fall. It becomes possible to do so. The stop order for falling is not limited to the stop order of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, and the reel 32L of the first stop, The configuration may be defined only by the types of 32M and 32R. Further, although the effect of suggesting to the player that the advantageous section SC2 is temporarily terminated due to the stop order for falling is not executed, the effect may be executed.

In the case of a fall-corresponding stop order (step S1819: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed on condition that the value of the unreported flag of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1820: YES). At the same time (step S1821), the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1822). As a result, the game section is temporarily shifted to the normal section SC1. Further, even if the game is once shifted to the normal section SC1, if the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize is established and the game shifts to the BB state ST3, the game section is definitely advantageous in the first game of the BB state ST3. Along with shifting to the section SC2, the profit generated by being an advantageous section SC2 will also be given.

In addition, the player may be notified of the stop order of the fall response. In this case, it is possible to positively cause the transition to the normal section SC1 in the above situation.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 57), when an affirmative judgment is made in step S2502 or when the processing of step S2505 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the current bonus state in the advantageous maintenance section It is determined whether or not the bonus winning that triggered the start of the game has been established (step S2506). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2507). That is, when the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section in the normal game state ST1, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus winning ends on condition that the start game of the bonus state is executed in the advantageous section SC2. After that, it will shift to the ready state ST8. As a result, the player expects that the bonus prize will be established in the advantage maintenance section. After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2508). By receiving the ART winning command, the directing side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the directing indicating that the ART state ST9 is set after the end of the current bonus state in the start game of the bonus state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2506 or when the process of step S2508 is executed, it is a condition that the game state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (Step S2509: YES), or on condition that "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2510: YES), to add the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Execute the process. As the process for adding, first, the addition table at the start of the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2511). The additional table at the start of the bonus is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of winning an additional winning and the expected number of additional games differs depending on the type of bonus state. It may be configured. In addition, the additional table at the start of the bonus is common between the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the additional winning and the expected number of additional games differs depending on the set value. It may be configured as such.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2512). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process at the start of the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2512 with the additional table at the start of the bonus read in step S2511, it is determined whether or not the additional winning has been achieved (step S2513). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is "0" is set in the additional table at the start of the bonus, and there are a plurality of types of lottery results for the number of additional games that are one or more games. It is set. In step S2513, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games, which is one or more of those games, is selected.

When the additional winning is won (step S2513: YES), the additional setting process is executed (step S2514). In the addition setting process, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, an additional command in the bonus indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the directing side MPU 92 (step S2515). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the additional command in the bonus, the effecting side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been granted.

On the other hand, when the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and "1" is not set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S2509 and step S2510: NO), a process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9, first, the ART direct hit table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2516). The ART direct hit table is common regardless of the type of the bonus state this time, but the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may differ depending on the type of the bonus state. Further, although the ART direct hit table is common among the set values of "1" to "6", the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 differs depending on the set value. Good.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2517). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition process to the ART state ST9, the random numbers written in the 16th latch register 103p are acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as described above, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). At the timing when the affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2517 with the ART direct hit table read out in step S2516, it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2518).

When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S2518: YES), "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2519). After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2520). By receiving the ART winning command, the directing side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the directing indicating that the ART state ST9 is set after the end of the current bonus state in the start game of the bonus state.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2501, a negative judgment is made in step S2503, a negative judgment is made in step S2513, a process of step S2515 is executed, a negative judgment is made in step S2518, or When the process of step S2520 is executed, the process at the start of the game during the bonus is executed (step S2521). That is, in the game in which the bonus state is started, even if the process of adding the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, or the process of shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed, the bonus is executed. The process at the start of the game inside is executed. Then, in the game start processing during the bonus, an additional lottery process for the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 or a lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the game start processing during the bonus. In the game start processing during the bonus, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74, that is, whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2601). In the case of the advantageous section SC2 (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger has been won in this game (step S2602). Specifically, when the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first watermelon winning or the winning combination that enables the establishment of the cherry winning is won, it is determined that the winning role is the lottery trigger.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2602, the game state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2603: YES), or On condition that "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2604: YES), a process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. As the process for adding, first, the adding table in the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2605). The additional table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of winning an additional winning and the expected number of additional games differs depending on the type of bonus state. May be. In addition, the additional table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of lottery trigger that was won this time, but the probability of additional winning and the expected additional game according to the type of lottery trigger that was won this time. At least one of the numbers may be different. In addition, the additional table in the bonus is common among the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the additional winning and the expected number of additional games differs depending on the set value. It may be configured as such.

Here, the additional table during the bonus is set to have a lower probability of being an additional winning than the additional table at the start of the bonus read from the main ROM 73 in step S2511 in the bonus processing (FIG. 57) at the start of the game. At the same time, the number of games expected to be added is small. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected degree of addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state is started, as compared with the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning an additional game and the expected number of additional games may be the same or substantially the same for the additional table in the bonus and the additional table at the start of the bonus.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2606). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process during the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l was written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2606 with the additional table in the bonus read in step S2605, it is determined whether or not the additional winning has been achieved (step S2607). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is "0" is set in the additional table during the bonus, and a plurality of types of lottery results for the number of additional games that are one or more games are set. Has been done. In step S2607, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games, which is one or more of those games, is selected.

When the additional winning is won (step S2607: YES), the additional setting process is executed (step S2608). In the addition setting process, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 by the main MPU 72. After that, an additional command in the bonus indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the directing side MPU 92 (step S2609). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the additional command in the bonus, the effecting side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been granted.

On the other hand, when the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and "1" is not set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S2603 and Step S2604: NO), a process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9, first, the transition table during bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2610). The transition table during the bonus is common regardless of the type of the bonus state this time, but the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may differ depending on the type of the bonus state. In addition, the transition table during bonus is common regardless of the type of lottery trigger that was won this time, but the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 according to the type of lottery trigger that was won this time. May be different. In addition, the transition table during bonus is common among the set values of "1" to "6", but the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 differs depending on the set value. Good.

Here, the transition table during the bonus has a lower probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the ART direct hit table read from the main ROM 73 in step S2516 in the bonus process (FIG. 57) at the start of the game. It is set. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state is started as compared with the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be the same or substantially the same in the transition table during the bonus and the ART direct hit table.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2611). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the transition process to the ART state ST9, the random numbers written in the 16th latch register 103p are acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as described above, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). At the timing when the affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2611 with the bonus middle transition table read in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2612).

When the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S2612: YES), "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2613). After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2614). By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the production indicating that the ART state ST9 is set after the end of the current bonus state in the current game.

Next, the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. The bonus state process is executed in step S2416 in the bonus process (FIG. 56). Since the bonus processing is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the bonus state processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Reel.

When the game medium is assigned in the current game (step S2701: YES), a value corresponding to the number of the game media granted this time is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or more than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S2703). Specifically, when the current bonus state is the BB state ST3, it is determined whether or not the number is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and when the current bonus state is the RB state ST4. Determines whether or not the number is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (for example, "150").

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2703, the game state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2704: YES). Or, on condition that "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2705: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S2706). In the setting process, the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state after the end of the bonus state this time becomes the preparation state ST8.

When a negative determination is made in step S2705, or when the process of step S2706 is executed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state ends is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2707). In the bonus end command, information indicating whether the game state after the end of the bonus state is the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST8 is set. By receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 starts an effect indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the end of the effect, an effect corresponding to the game state after the end of the bonus state is provided. Let it start.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2708). The main ending effect flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, which will be described in detail later. is there. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2709).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this way, the bonus state has ended by executing the effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the state of waiting for the start of the new game. Can be clearly recognized by the player. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes “0”.

<About ART state ST9>
Next, the ART state ST9 will be described. First, the preparation state processing executed in the case of the preparation state ST8 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The preparation state process is executed in step S1706 in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Will be executed.

First, it is determined whether or not any of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination (step S2801). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the direct addition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this time is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2802). In this case, the direct addition table is set so that the winning number having a low winning probability has a higher probability of being directly added and won, and the number of games expected to be added is large. The direct addition table is common among the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the direct addition and the expected number of additional games differs depending on the set value. It may be configured to have.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2803). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the direct addition lottery process, the random numbers written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l are input. get. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S2803 with the direct addition table read in step S2802, it is determined whether or not the direct addition winning has been won (step S2804). Specifically, a lottery result indicating that the number of additional games is "0" is set in the direct addition table, and a plurality of types of lottery results for the number of additional games of one or more games are set. There is. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games, which is one or more of those games, is selected.

When the direct addition is won (step S2804: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2805). In the addition setting process, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a preparatory addition command indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the preparation state ST8 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2806). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the additional command being prepared, the production side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been assigned.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801, a negative determination is made in step S2804, or the process of step S2806 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning is established in this game (step S2807). ). When the second RT replay winning is established (step S2807: YES), it means that the transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 has occurred, so the ART start process is executed (step S2808). In the ART start process, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process of step S1707 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state becomes the ART state ST9.

Further, in the ART start processing, if the gaming state before the start of the preparation state ST8 is the bonus state and the gaming state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST9, it means that the game state has returned to the ART state ST9. Therefore, a setting is made to return to the game status in the ART state ST9 immediately before the transition to the bonus state. However, if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in the bonus state, the game returns to the ART state ST9 from the state in which the number of added games is added. Further, in the ART start processing, when the preparation state ST8 this time is triggered by the transition to the ART state ST9 in the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the present precursor state ST6 or the chance state ST7, , Information on 50 games, which is the number of started games in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74. In this case, when the game state before the preparation state ST8 is a bonus state and not only the transition winning to the ART state ST9 but also the additional winning of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 occurs in the bonus state. Will start the ART state ST9 in a state where the number of continuous games given to the winning is added. In addition, if an additional winning of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the preparation state ST8, the number of continuous games given to the additional winning has been added to the ART state ST9. Will be started.

After that, an ART start command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2809). Information indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 this time corresponds to the return to the ART state ST9 is set in the ART start command, and if it does not correspond to the return to the ART state ST9, the ART state is set. Information indicating that 50 games have been assigned as the number of starting games of ST9 is set. By receiving the ART start command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has been started to be executed, and after the effect is completed, the effect corresponding to the ART state ST9 is executed. To do so. Further, when the effect side MPU 92 corresponds to the return of the ART state ST9, the execution state of the effect at the timing when the previous ART state ST9 ends in the middle is restarted.

<Addition in ART state ST9>
Next, the addition in the ART state ST9 will be described.

FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 61A, the main RAM 74 is provided with an ART game number counter 121, a B loop continuation counter 122, and a temporary setting flag 123. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 by the main MPU 72. The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which the B-loop is continued, which will be described later, in which the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in each game. The tentative setting flag 123 mainly determines whether or not the winning is directly added in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) when one game is started in the ART state ST9. It is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 72.

FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the effect side RAM 94 used by the effect side MPU 92 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 61B, the effect side RAM 94 is provided with an ART subtraction target counter 125, a display counter 126, a stock game number counter 127, and a stock area 128 for a special additional effect.

The ART subtraction target counter 125 is a counter that is subtracted by 1 by the effect side MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. When the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 becomes "0", an effect indicating whether or not the ART state ST9 ends is executed.

Similar to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126 is a counter that is subtracted by 1 by the effect side MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. In the ART state ST9, the value set in the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

The stock game number counter 127 is a counter in which the difference between the actual remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 is set. In other words, the stock game number counter 127 is a counter for the directing MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is actually acquired although it is not notified to the player.

The stock area 128 of the special additional effect is information indicating that the special additional effect should be executed, which is an effect as if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games, and the type of the special additional effect. It is an area for storing the information of.

Next, the addition process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. The addition process is executed in step S619 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The process of step S619 is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not the ART state is ST9 (step S2901). If it is not in the ART state ST9, the processes after step S2902 are not executed. As a result, the processing after step S2902 is not executed in the gaming state other than the ART state ST9.

Here, for example, any BB winning data or RB winning data may be set in the middle of the ART state ST9, but in the bonus internal state ST2 in which these bonus winning data are set, the processing after step S2902 is executed. Not done. Even if the bonus internal state ST2 is set in the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 unless the transition condition to the normal section SC1 as described above is satisfied, and the advantageous section SC2 is maintained in the subsequent bonus state. Be maintained. Further, when the transition to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is performed in the middle of the ART state ST9, the processing after step S2902 is not executed regardless of whether or not the transition has passed through the bonus internal state ST2. In this case, after the end of the bonus state, the ART state ST9 is restored via the preparation state ST8, but when the ART state ST9 is restored, the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle. It will be the situation just before it is done. For example, if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the A loop described later, the A loop is restarted after returning to the ART state ST9, and if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the B loop described later, the ART state is ART. After returning to the state ST9, the B loop is restarted. This also applies to the production on the production side MPU 92.

When the ART state is ST9 (step S2901: YES) and the processes of steps S2902 to S2905 are executed, the processes after step S2906 are executed. In the processes after step S2906, as a process for determining whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, a direct addition generation lottery process, an A loop generation lottery process, and a B loop generation lottery process And execute. The direct addition is an addition mode in which the addition occurs only in the game in which the direct addition is won in the lottery process for the direct addition, and the number of the additional games is notified to the player. On the other hand, the A loop and the B loop are in an additional state in which a fixed number of additional games (specifically, 50 games) are given in each game while the continuous winning is performed in the continuous lottery process. However, even if the number of additional games is given in the A loop and the B loop, the number of additional games is not immediately notified to the player, and when the notification condition is satisfied, the number of additional games is notified to the player. Will be done. In addition, the conditions for shifting to the additional state are different between the A loop and the B loop, and the mode of notifying the player of the number of additional games is also different.

In step S2906, the direct addition process is executed. In the direct addition process, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in this game, and when the addition is generated, the number of additional games is determined. In the direct addition process, the number of additional games may be determined based on the processing result of the constant lottery process executed in step S406 of the normal process (FIG. 13). Therefore, first, the constant lottery process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the constant lottery process.

First, it is determined whether or not the ART state is ST9 (step S3001). If the ART state is not ST9 (step S3001: NO), the regular lottery process is terminated as it is. As a result, when the game state is other than the ART state ST9, the processes after step S3002 are not executed.

When the ART state is ST9 (step S3001: YES), the common addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3002). FIG. 64A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the common addition table. Random numbers corresponding to winning are set in the common addition table so that the probability of winning directly on top is 5%. In addition, only one type of additional game is set in the case of winning the direct addition, and specifically, there are 10 games. Here, the constant lottery process is executed before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the lottery process is always executed regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 17). That is, the lottery process is always executed in the same manner regardless of whether the combination is not won in the lottery process (FIG. 17) or the combination is won. Regardless of the type of winning combination in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the lottery process is always executed in the same manner.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3003). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the constant lottery process, the random numbers written in the 15th latch register 103o are acquired from the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. In detail, as already described, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c generates random numbers of "0" to "255", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and proceeds to step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). At the timing when the affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 15th latch register 103o is acquired by the third dedicated random number circuit 102c.

After that, the random numbers acquired in step S3003 are collated with the common addition table read out in step S3002 to determine whether or not the direct addition has been won (step S3004). As already explained, since the random number corresponding to the winning that is directly added and won is set in the common addition table, in step S3004, the random number acquired in step S3003 is any of the random numbers corresponding to the winning set in the common addition table. It is determined whether or not it matches the random number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S3005).

Next, the direct addition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. The direct addition process is executed in step S2906 of the addition process (FIG. 62).

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not any of "4", "6", "8", and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S3101, the step The process of S3102 to step S3107 is not executed.

The winning numbers of "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". That is, when the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the winning combination shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is drawn. When the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (FIG. 17) is executed and the result is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), or the winning probability is between the set values of "1" and "6". If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. As described in steps S3102 to S3107, on condition that the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By configuring the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) to be executed, let's predict the set value based on the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process. Even so, it is possible to make it impossible.

In the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3102). FIG. 64B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the directly placed table. In the direct addition table, the winning probability and the range of the number of additional games in the case of winning are set corresponding to each of the winning numbers of "4", "6", "8", and "15".

Specifically, a random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning probability is 10% for the winning number of "4", and 15 to 30 games are set as the number of additional games. The number of additional games of 15 to 30 games is 15 games, 20 games, 25 games, and 30 games, and the winning random number corresponding to the direct additional winning is associated with any of these additional games. Random numbers corresponding to winning are set for the winning number of "6" so that the winning probability is 25%, and 20 to 40 games are set as the number of additional games. The number of additional games of 20 to 40 games is 20 games, 25 games, 30 games, 35 games, and 40 games, and the winning random number corresponding to the direct additional winning is associated with any of these additional games. .. Random numbers corresponding to winning are set for the winning number of "8" so that the winning probability is 60%, and 25 to 50 games are set as the number of additional games. The number of additional games of 25 to 50 games is 25 games, 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games, and the winning random number corresponding to the direct additional winning is associated with any of these additional games. For the winning number of "15", a random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning probability is 100%, and 50 to 100 games are set as the number of additional games. The number of additional games of 50 to 100 games is 50 games and 100 games, and the random number corresponding to the winning of the direct additional winning is associated with any of these additional games.

When the additional lottery process is executed using the direct addition table as described above, the probability of winning the direct addition is always when the additional lottery process is executed using the common additional table in the lottery process (FIG. 63). The probability is higher than the probability of winning directly. In addition, the number of additional games selected by winning the direct addition is always higher when the additional lottery process is executed using the direct additional table using the common additional table in the lottery process (FIG. 63). The number of games is larger than when the additional lottery process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage of executing the additional lottery process using the direct addition table higher than the advantage of executing the additional lottery process at all times.

In order to make the advantage of executing the additional lottery process using the direct addition table higher than the advantage of always executing the lottery process, the additional lottery process is performed using the direct addition table. A configuration in which the expected value of the number of additional games selected when executed is higher than the expected value of the number of additional games selected when the additional lottery process is executed by using the common additional table in the constant lottery process. May be. In this case, the number of additional games selected when the additional lottery process is executed using the direct addition table is greater than the number of additional games selected when the additional lottery process is executed using the common additional table. It may be configured in which a small number of games is set.

After executing the process of step S3102, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3103). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random numbers written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l are input. get. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

After that, the random numbers acquired in step S3103 are collated with the direct addition table read in step S3102 to determine whether or not the direct addition winning has been won (step S3104). If any of the number of additional games is applicable (step S3104: YES), the additional setting process is executed (step S3105). In the addition setting process, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3106). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given.

After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As described above, the temporary setting flag 123 is set to "1" by being directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). In this case, by setting the temporary setting flag 123 to be cleared to "0" in step S3107, even if the player is directly added to the lottery process (FIG. 63) and won, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). If the direct addition winning is achieved in the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the above, the result of the direct addition winning in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games from being given in duplicate, and it is possible to target the number of additional games on the side where the player has a high advantage.

When a negative determination is made in step S3101 or a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S3108). That is, it is determined by the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) whether or not the winner is directly added. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3108, the addition setting process is executed (step S3109). Specifically, the value of "10", which is the fixed number of additional games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3110). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given. After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3111).

FIG. 66 is a time chart showing how the number of additional games is directly added by the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) and the direct addition process (FIG. 65). FIG. 66 (a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 66 (b) shows the timing when the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed, and FIG. 66 (c) shows the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). FIG. 66 (d) shows the timing of execution, FIG. 66 (d) shows the timing of execution of the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and FIG. 66 (e) shows the number of ART games in the main RAM 74. Indicates the timing at which the number of additional games is added to the counter 121.

First, a case where both the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) and the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) are executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), one game is newly started at the timing of t1, so that the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 66 (b). Then, at the timing of t2, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (c). In this case, one of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, at the timing of t3 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed.

In this case, if the additional lottery process results in a direct addition and winning, the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is displayed on the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66 (e). Will be added. On the other hand, even if the additional lottery process does not result in a direct additional winning, if the direct additional winning is achieved in the constant lottery process (Fig. 63) executed before that, the number of additional games is fixed. Is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66 (e).

Next, a case will be described in which the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed, but the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), one game is newly started at the timing of t4, so that the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 66 (b). Then, at the timing of t5, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (c). In this case, none of the winning numbers of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, in this game, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is not executed.

However, in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed at the timing of t4, the winner is directly added. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), the fixed number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

As described above, the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed regardless of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination. As a result, it is possible to give an additional number of games in the ART state ST9 regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to give the number of additional games in each game in the ART state ST9.

If the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is a predetermined result, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed. Then, when the additional lottery process results in a direct addition and winning, the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is always given regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 63). As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is given in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

Returning to the explanation of the addition process (FIG. 62), after executing the direct addition process (step S2906), "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers of "" has been set (step S2907). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2907, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74, so that the current state is in the A loop or the B loop. (Step S2908). If a negative determination is made in step S2908, the A loop generation lottery process is executed. Specifically, first, the A loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2909). The A-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the A-loop generation lottery process, and is also common among the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

FIG. 67A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A loop lottery table. In the A loop lottery table, as the lottery result, the loss result, the selection result of the first continuous lottery table, the selection result of the second continuous lottery table, the selection result of the third continuous lottery table, and the selection result of the fourth continuous lottery table There is a selection result. When any of the 1st to 4th continuous lottery tables is selected in the A loop generation lottery process, the A loop generation is won. Further, in the A loop lottery table, the selection rates of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables are the same, but the selection rate is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other. It should be noted that the probability of winning the A-loop generation may differ depending on the type of the winning number that triggered the execution of the A-loop generation lottery process. For example, the A-loop lottery table may be set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the occurrence of the A-loop. Further, although the A-loop lottery table is common among the set values of "1" to "6", the probability of winning the occurrence of the A-loop may differ depending on the set value.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), data for determining the continuation rate of the A loop according to the number of games in which the A loop has continued is set in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables. In this case, the setting mode of the continuation rate is different depending on the type of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables. Specifically, as the continuation rate of the first game, 90% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 50% is set in the second continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table. 10% is set in the 4th continuous lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, 10% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the second continuous lottery table, 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table, and the fourth continuation is set. 90% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the third game, 10% is set in the first continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the second continuous lottery table, 30% is set in the third continuous lottery table, and the fourth continuous lottery table is set. 30% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the 4th to 10th games, 10% is set in the 1st continuous lottery table, 20% is set in the 2nd continuous lottery table, and 30% is set in the 3rd continuous lottery table. 10% is set in the 4th continuous lottery table. Then, when the A loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. That is, 10 games are set as one cycle, and the continuous lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle.

Returning to the description of the addition process (FIG. 62), after reading the A loop lottery table in step S2909, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2910). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the A loop generation lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l was written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random numbers acquired in step S2910 with the A loop lottery table read out in step S2909, it is determined whether or not the A loop has been won (step S2911).

When the generation of the A loop is won (step S2911: YES), "1" is set in the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2912). As a result, the addition by the A loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected by using the A loop lottery table in step S2911 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2913).

After that, the addition process of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2914). In the addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is "0" and the A loop is won, the ART state ST9 can be continued and the addition by the A loop can be generated. Become. In addition, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even when the game is directly added and won. This makes it impossible for the player to distinguish whether the addition of 10 games occurs due to the winning of the occurrence of the A loop, whether it is due to the direct addition or the winning of the occurrence of the A loop. It becomes possible.

After that, an A-loop winning command indicating that the A-loop has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2915). The A-loop winning command includes not only information indicating that the A-loop has been won, but also information indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added by "10" and the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. Information on the number of continuous games is also set. By receiving the A-loop winning command, the production side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the expected production for expecting the player to generate a special addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2907, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74, so that the current state is in the A loop and B. It is determined whether it is in the loop (step S2916). When a negative determination is made in step S2916, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter provided in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value (step S2917). The cycle counter is a counter for specifying the timing for executing the B loop generation lottery process on the main MPU 72, and a new game is started in the ART state ST9 and neither the A loop nor the B loop. In that case, 1 is added, and "0" is cleared by executing the B loop generation lottery process. "100" is set as the cycle reference value. Therefore, when 100 or more games are executed in the ART state ST9 and neither the A loop nor the B loop, the B loop generation lottery process is executed.

Here, even if the value of the cycle counter becomes equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, the B loop generation lottery process is not executed when the direct addition generation lottery process or the A loop generation lottery process is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of lottery processes that occur twice at the start of one game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 72.

When the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value (step S2917: YES), the B loop generation lottery process after step S2919 is executed. Further, even when the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or higher than the cycle reference value, even when the winning number of "41" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S2918: YES). , The B loop generation lottery process after step S2919 is executed. The winning number of "41" corresponds to the index value IV = 17 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 22), and only the normal replay winning data is set for the winning combination.

In the B-loop generation lottery process, first, the B-loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2919). The B-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the B-loop generation lottery process, and is also common among the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

FIG. 67 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. In the B loop lottery table, as the lottery result, the loss result, the selection result of the 5th continuation lottery table, the selection result of the 6th continuation lottery table, the selection result of the 7th continuation lottery table, and the selection result of the 8th continuation lottery table There is a selection result. When any of the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables is selected in the B loop generation lottery process, the B loop generation is won. In this case, the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop is set lower than the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop, but the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop is the same as or abbreviated as the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop. The configuration may be the same, or the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop may be set higher than the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop. Further, in the B loop lottery table, the selection rates of the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables are the same, but the selection rate is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the B loop is different depending on whether the value of the cycle counter is equal to or higher than the cycle reference value or the winning number of "41" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It may be configured as such. For example, the former may have a higher probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop than the latter case, and the former may have a lower probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop than the latter case. Further, although the B loop lottery table is common among the set values of "1" to "6", the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop may differ depending on the set value.

As shown in FIG. 67B, data for determining the continuation rate of the B loop according to the number of games in which the B loop has continued is set in the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables. In this case, the setting mode of the continuation rate is different depending on the type of the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables. Specifically, as the continuation rate of the first game, 10% is set in the 5th continuous lottery table, 100% is set in the 6th continuous lottery table, and 25% is set in the 7th continuous lottery table. 60% is set in the 8th continuous lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, 90% is set in the 5th continuous lottery table, 50% is set in the 6th continuous lottery table, 80% is set in the 7th continuous lottery table, and the 8th continuation is set. 60% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the third game, 90% is set in the 5th continuous lottery table, 100% is set in the 6th continuous lottery table, 80% is set in the 7th continuous lottery table, and the 8th continuation is set. 60% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the 4th to 10th games, 90% is set in the 5th continuous lottery table, 50% is set in the 6th continuous lottery table, and 80% is set in the 7th continuous lottery table. 60% is set in the 8th continuous lottery table. Then, when the B loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. That is, 10 games are set as one cycle, and the continuous lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle.

Returning to the description of the addition process (FIG. 62), after reading the B loop lottery table in step S2919, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2920). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the B loop generation lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l was written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random numbers acquired in step S2920 with the B loop lottery table read out in step S2919, it is determined whether or not the B loop has been won (step S2921).

When the B loop is won (step S2921: YES), "1" is set in the B loop flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2922). As a result, the addition by the B loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected by using the B loop lottery table in step S2921 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2923).

After that, the addition process of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2924). In the addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is "0" and the B loop is won, the ART state ST9 can be continued and the addition by the B loop can be generated. Become.

In step S2924, a direct addition command corresponding to the addition of 10 games is transmitted instead of a command indicating that the B loop has been won. Information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set in the direct addition command. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games of 10 games has been given. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to winning the B loop is not executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added internally in a situation not recognized by the player. By the way, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even if the game is directly added and won. This makes it impossible for the player to distinguish whether the addition of 10 games occurs due to the winning of the occurrence of the B loop, whether it is due to the direct addition or the winning of the occurrence of the B loop. It becomes possible.

Next, the processing for the A loop executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The A-loop process is executed in step S2903 when "1" is set in the A-loop flag of the main RAM 74 in the addition process (FIG. 62) (step S2902: YES). As described above, since the addition process is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, the A-loop processing is also executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3201). That is, in the A loop, 50 games are added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed. After that, an A loop addition command indicating that the addition by the A loop has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3202). The production side MPU 92 executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 by receiving the A loop addition command, but does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the A loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is internally added in a situation not recognized by the player.

After that, the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuous lottery table of the target to be used stored in the main RAM 74 of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables (step S3203). Specifically, the main RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" in the situation where the A loop is started. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set in the first game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the object to be used this time. In addition, the value of the continuation rate pointer is added by 1 each time one game is digested in the A loop. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set in the second game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the target to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer becomes. When it is "3", the continuation rate set in the third game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the target to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is "4" to "10". In any case, the continuation rate set after the fourth game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate of the object to be used this time. If the value of the continuation rate pointer after 1 addition exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables will be repeatedly used in a cycle of 10 games.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3204). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of the A loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l was written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S3204 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S3203, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning has been achieved (step S3205).

If the continuation is won (step S3205: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is added by 1 (step S3206). Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer after 1 addition exceeds "10" (step S3207: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S3208). As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables will be repeatedly used in a cycle of 10 games.

On the other hand, when the continuous winning is not achieved (step S3205: NO), the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3209). As a result, the A loop ends. After that, an A loop end command indicating that the A loop has ended is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3210). By receiving the A loop end command, the production side MPU 92 executes the process corresponding to the end of the A loop.

As described above, in the A loop, every time one game is executed, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games, and the continuous lottery process of the A loop is executed. The continuation rate of the A continuous lottery process is defined as a scenario according to the number of continuous games in the A loop in the first to fourth continuous lottery tables. Then, the A loop will be continued while the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process of the A loop. As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 can be greatly increased by forming the A loop.

Next, the B loop process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. The B-loop processing is executed in step S2905 when "1" is set in the B-loop flag of the main RAM 74 in the addition processing (FIG. 62) (step S2904: YES). As described above, since the addition process is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, the B-loop processing is also executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3301). That is, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time the game is executed. The number of games to be added is the same as the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time a game is executed in the A loop. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage of the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the A loop and the B loop the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game may be substantially the same although it differs between the A loop and the B loop. The A loop may have a larger number of games than the B loop, or the B loop may have a larger number of games than the A loop.

After that, the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3302). The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for specifying the number of games in which the B-loop is continuing by the main MPU 72 as described above.

After that, a B loop addition command indicating that the addition by the B loop has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3303). The production side MPU 92 executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 by receiving the B loop addition command, but does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the B loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is internally added in a situation not recognized by the player.

After that, the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuous lottery table of the target to be used stored in the main RAM 74 of the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables (step S3304). Specifically, the main RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" in the situation where the B loop is started. Although the continuation rate pointer is also used in the A loop, since the A loop and the B loop do not occur at the same time, there is no problem even if the A loop and the B loop are used together.

When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set in the first game in the 5th to 8th continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the object to be used this time. In addition, the value of the continuation rate pointer is added by 1 each time one game is digested in the B loop. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set in the second game in the 5th to 8th continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate of the target to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer becomes. When it is "3", the continuation rate set in the third game in the 5th to 8th continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate of the target to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is "4" to "10". In any case, the continuation rate set for the fourth and subsequent games in the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables is the continuation rate of the object to be used this time. If the value of the continuation rate pointer after 1 addition exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables will be repeatedly used in a cycle of 10 games.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3305). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of the B loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l was written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S3305 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning has been achieved (step S3306).

If the continuation is won (step S3306: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is added by 1 (step S3307). Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer after 1 addition exceeds "10" (step S3308: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S3309). As a result, the continuous lottery table to be used among the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables will be repeatedly used in a cycle of 10 games.

On the other hand, when the continuous winning is not achieved (step S3306: NO), the B loop flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). As a result, the B loop ends.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is 21 or more (step S3311). That is, it is determined whether or not the B loop has continued for 21 games or more.

Here, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in each game as described above. Therefore, the situation where the B loop continues for 21 games or more means that the number of continuous games of 1050 games or more is added in the B loop. Then, in the B loop, even if the number of continuous games is added, the effect of notifying that the addition has occurred is not performed each time, but the B loop is in a situation where the B loop continues for 21 games or more. When is finished, the effect of notifying the addition of the number of continuous games at once is performed.

In this case, since the condition that the number of continuous games of the B loop is 21 games or more is set as a condition for the effect to be performed, it is possible to collectively notify the addition of 1000 games or more. .. In other words, if 1000 games are added, it is sufficient for the B loop to continue 20 games, but the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 will also be consumed over the 20 games in which the B loop continues. Therefore, if the B loop is started in a situation where the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is 10, it is necessary to digest the number of games added in the B loop from the 11th game of the B loop. Occurs. Then, since a part of the 1000 games has already been digested before the additional notification of 1000 games is executed, it becomes impossible to execute the effect of notifying the additional 1000 games. On the other hand, as a condition for executing the effect of collectively notifying the additions in the B loop, a condition that the B loop continues for 21 games or more is set, so that the number of games exceeding 20 games can be determined. Since the number of additional games generated is equal to or greater than the number of games digested in the B loop, it is possible to guarantee the notification of additional games of 1000 or more.

When the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 is 21 or more, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is advantageous. It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (specifically, 1500 games) (step S3312). Then, when the affirmative determination of step S3312 is performed, the process of step S3313 and step S3314 is not executed, so that the effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more is not executed.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated, and the ART state even if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 remains accordingly. ST9 is forcibly terminated. In this case, if the addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 including the amount exceeding the upper limit game number is notified even though the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded, the advantageous section SC2 When the number of continuous games in the ART state reaches the upper limit, the player may be strongly impressed that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been forcibly invalidated. This impression becomes stronger as the number of remaining continuous games increases. On the other hand, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, 1500 games). If it exceeds the limit, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the above-mentioned disadvantageous feeling by not executing the effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more.

If a negative determination is made in step S3312, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3313). Further, a special freeze command indicating that the special freeze effect should be executed is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3314). The special freeze command contains information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop.

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the B loop process, the process waits in step S408 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, even if a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation. In the state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waiting in this way, the effect side MPU 92 executes the special freeze effect on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in response to the reception of the special freeze command. To be done. In the special freeze effect, an effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more is executed. In addition, since the special freeze command contains information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop, the directing MPU 92 is asked to select ("Number of games continued in the B loop"-"" Digested in the B loop. " The value obtained by dividing "the number of games" by "the number of games added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 (50 games) for each game in the B loop") x "1 in the B loop" For each game, the number of games (50 games) to be added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is derived, and the derived result is notified. As a result, even if the number of games digested in the B loop is taken into consideration, it is possible to collectively notify the addition of 1000 or more games that have not been digested.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312 or when the process of step S3314 is executed, the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3315).

As described above, in the B loop, every time one game is executed, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games, and the continuous lottery process of the B loop is executed. The continuation rate of this continuous lottery process is defined as a scenario according to the number of continuous games in the B loop in the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables. Then, the B loop will be continued while the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process of the B loop. As a result, it becomes possible to greatly increase the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 by becoming a B loop. Further, the number of added games in the B loop is notified to the player on condition that the additional games of 1000 games or more can be notified. As a result, it becomes possible to positively provide an additional notification having an impact of adding 1000 games or more.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70. The ART state process is executed in step S1707 in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the ART state processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game. Will be executed.

First, the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3401). Then, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3402: YES), the ART end processing after step S3403 is executed.

In the ART termination process, the termination process of the ART state ST9 is first executed (step S3403). In the end process, data is set to shift the game state from the ART state ST9 to the normal game state ST1. As a result, for example, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44), the normal process of step S1705 is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the number of sustainable games (step S3404). The number of sustainable games is set to 1200 games. That is, it is determined whether or not the end timing of the ART state ST9 has come in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is 1200 games or less, which is the number of sustainable games. The number of continuous games is set to be smaller than the maximum number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, and is set to be smaller than the number of continuous games in which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is started. ing.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3405). The winning value corresponding to the advantageous maintenance winning is set in the advantageous maintenance lottery table. The advantage maintenance lottery table is common regardless of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 ending this time and the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9, but the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the games acquired in the ART state ST9 A plurality of types may be set so that the selection target differs depending on the number of media. For example, when the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is less than the predetermined number of games, the advantageous maintenance lottery table having a higher probability of winning the advantageous maintenance than when the number of continuous games is larger than the predetermined number of games may be selected. When the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 is less than the predetermined number, the advantageous maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning the advantageous maintenance may be selected as compared with the case where the number is larger than the predetermined number. In this case, the smaller the profit obtained in the ART state ST9, the higher the probability that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained after the end of the ART state ST9.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3406). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the generation lottery process of the advantageous maintenance section, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S3406 with the advantage maintenance lottery table read out in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the advantage maintenance winning has been achieved (step S3407).

When the advantage maintenance is won (step S3407: YES), a value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3408). As a result, even after the ART state ST9 is completed, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of games for which the number of advantageous maintenance games is maintained is exhausted. After that, an advantage maintenance command indicating that the section has shifted to the advantage maintenance section is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3409). By receiving the advantage maintenance command, the effect side MPU 92 so that the effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 is executed, and the effect corresponding to the advantage maintenance section is executed after the end of the effect. To.

When a negative determination is made in step S3404 or a negative determination is made in step S3407, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3410). By receiving the ART end command, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 executed, and after the end of the effect, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not the advantageous maintenance section. To be executed.

<About the production in ART state ST9>
Next, the effect in the ART state ST9 will be described. First, an outline of the effect generated in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71. FIG. 71 (a) shows the execution period of the A loop, FIG. 71 (b) shows the execution period of the B loop, FIG. 71 (c) shows the occurrence timing of the direct addition, and FIG. 71 (d) shows the direct addition. The execution period of the effect is shown, FIG. 71 (e) shows the execution period of the special additional effect, FIG. 71 (f) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect, and FIG. 71 (g) shows the execution period of the stock release effect. FIG. 71 (h) shows the execution period of the ending effect.

At the timing of t1 in the ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is directly added to the main MPU 72. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the direct mounting effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. In the direct addition effect, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the direct addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and the image display device 63 shows an image showing the number of direct addition games determined on the main MPU 72. Is displayed.

In the ART state ST9, at the timing of t3, the A loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71 (a). At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the special additional effect is not executed, but the expected effect that makes the player expect the occurrence of the special additional effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To. The expected effect can be executed even in a situation where the special additional effect is not executed. When the expected effect is executed, the player expects that a special additional effect will occur after that. After that, the timing of t4 is the end timing of the expected production. In this case, even if the A loop is continued in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the A loop is generated by the timing of the t4 as shown in FIG. 71 (e). A special additional production corresponding to the number of additional games will be started. The special additional effect continues over a plurality of games, and the number of additional games corresponding to the execution of the special additional effect this time is distributed and notified in each game of the plurality of games. For example, in the case of a special addition effect that corresponds to the addition of 100 games and continues for 2 games, the addition of 50 games is notified in each game.

Even in the situation where the special addition effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71 (c) at the timing of t5. As shown in FIG. 71 (d), the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at the timing of t7. In this case, in the situation where the A loop is executed, the execution of a plurality of special additional effects is determined according to the number of additional games generated by the A loop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the special addition effect may be continuously executed even after the A loop is completed. The special addition effect ends at the timing of t8.

In the ART state ST9, at the timing of t9, the B loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71 (b). At the timing of t9, the effect corresponding to the occurrence of the B loop is not executed. Even in the situation where the B loop is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71 (c) at the timing of t10. When the direct addition is generated, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the B loop ends at the main MPU 72 at the timing of t12. In this case, the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, although one game is started in the main MPU 72, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation, and as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the upper part is from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13. A special freeze effect is executed by the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the special freeze effect, the number of additional games of 1000 or more is notified as the number of additional games of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

After that, at the timing of t14, the number of continuous games on the production side of the subtraction target measured by the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, when a value of 1 or more is set in the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is not the subtraction target exists. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71 (g), the stock release effect corresponding to the continuation of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. To.

At the timing of t16 in the ART state ST9, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 ends in a situation where the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 corresponds to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It will be the number of games that trigger the start of the production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71 (h), the ending effect is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 at the timing of t16. Then, the ending effect continues until the timing of t17 when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Hereinafter, the processing contents in the production side MPU 92 for enabling the execution of the various effects as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an unusual effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. Note that the extraordinary effect control process has a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the effect side MPU 92 when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9. ) Is repeated.

When the ending effect command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3501: YES), "1" is set in the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3502). Then, when "1" is set in the ending effect flag on the effect side (step S3503: YES), the ending effect process is executed (step S3504). The ending effect processing will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined whether or not the additional command being prepared is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3505). As already explained, the addition command being prepared is transmitted from the main MPU 72 by being directly added and won in the direct addition lottery process in the preparation state ST8. When the addition command being prepared is received (step S3505: YES), the number of the addition games set to the addition command being prepared this time is set to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94, respectively. Is added to (step S3506). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games this time becomes a subtraction target after shifting to the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games this time is added. After the resulting number of continuous games shifts to the ART state ST9, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is displayed on the image display device 63.

After that, the additional effect setting process being prepared is executed (step S3507). In the additional effect setting process during preparation, an additional table that enables execution of an effect indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the prepared state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93. The additional table corresponds to the number of additional games this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the addition table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and an image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

As described above, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 may be added even in the bonus state. In this case, the main MPU 72 sends an additional command during the bonus. When the production side MPU 92 receives the addition command during the bonus from the main MPU 72, the number of the addition games this time set in the addition command during the bonus in the other production processing (step S3520) is set to the production side RAM 94. It is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. In addition, the addition table that enables the execution of the effect indicating that the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the bonus state is read out. The additional table corresponds to the number of additional games this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the addition table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and an image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S3505 or when the process of step S3507 is executed, it is determined whether or not an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3508). The ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST9 is started as described above. When the ART start command is received (step S3508: YES), it is determined whether or not the current transition of the ART state ST9 corresponds to the return to the ART state ST9 based on the information set in the ART start command. (Step S3509).

If it does not correspond to the return to the ART state ST9 (step S3509: NO), the number of start games (specifically, 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST9 set in the ART start command is set to the production side RAM94. Is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3510). In this case, if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is not added in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the start of the ART state ST9, the respective values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are obtained. Is "50" corresponding to the number of starting games. On the other hand, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the start of the ART state ST9, the number of games generated by the addition is added to the number of started games. The added value is set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3509, or when the process of step S3510 is executed, the ART start effect setting process is executed (step S3511). In the ART start effect setting process, when this time is not the return of the ART state ST9 but a new start of the ART state ST9, the ART start effect table corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and the ART corresponding to the ART state ST9 The middle effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. First, the execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART start effect table, so that the effect corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the effect table during ART, so that the effect corresponding to the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, in the ART start effect setting process, when this time is the return of the ART state ST9, data setting for returning to the execution content of the effect immediately before the ART state ST9 is interrupted is performed. The data for specifying the execution content of the effect of the return destination is stored in the effect side RAM 94 when the ART state ST9 is interrupted. Then, the execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 by the data setting for returning, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the effect. The production corresponding to the ART state ST9 is resumed. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

When a negative determination is made in step S3508, or when the process of step S3511 is executed, the direct addition effect process is executed in step S3512, the A loop effect process is executed in step S3513, and the A loop effect process is executed in step S3514. Execute the B loop effect processing. These processes will be described in detail later.

After that, when a game start command indicating a new start of one game is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9 (step S3515 and step S3516: YES), the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 is set. At the same time as subtracting 1, the value of the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1 (step S3517). Then, when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3518: YES), the stock release process is executed (step S3519). The stock release process will be described in detail later.

In the extraordinary effect control process, other effect processes other than the above-mentioned various processes are executed (step S3520). In the other effect processing, the game state executes a process for controlling the execution of the effect in the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, or preparation state ST8.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the direct addition effect processing in step S3512 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 72).

First, it is determined whether or not a direct addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601). As described above, the direct addition command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the direct addition is won in the lottery process for generating the direct addition in the ART state ST9 or when the B loop is set. In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 is also set.

When the direct addition command is received (step S3601: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the direct addition command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the stock game number counter 127. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of and the number of additional games generated this time set in the direct addition command exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). Step S3602). That is, even if the number of additional games generated this time is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, at least a part of the added additional games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Judge whether or not it will be done. As described above, not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 is referred to to determine whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded, and although it has already been given, it is still given. Notification and digestion of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that is not the target of notification to the player is added by the direct addition generated this time. It is possible to prioritize over the number of games.

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the number of additional games generated this time is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3603). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games this time is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games this time is added to the continuous game. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S3602, the sum of the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the additional command received this time, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127. However, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, “1500”) is exceeded (step S3604). In other words, it is not necessary to add the number of additional games generated this time, and whether or not the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded by digesting the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that has already been granted. judge.

When a negative determination is made in step S3604, the sum of the current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. The number of games resulting from this is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 as the number of additional games generated this time (step S3605). By adding to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games after this adjustment becomes the subtraction target in the ART state ST9, and by adding to the display counter 126, the number of additional games after this adjustment is added. The number of continuous games as a result is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9. By adding the number of additional games after this adjustment to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126, it is possible to add the number of games within the range of the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

When the process of step S3603 or step S3605 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current state is executing the special addition effect (step S3606). The special additional effect is a kind of effect for notifying the player of the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. The special addition effect is, for example, an effect performed when an A loop occurs, and as described above, an effect as if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games is executed.

When the special addition effect is not being executed (step S3606: NO), the normal direct addition effect setting process is executed (step S3607). In the direct addition effect setting process, a normal direct addition table that enables execution of an effect indicating that the number of games added this time has been added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 is provided from the effect side ROM 93. It is read out and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal direct addition table, the direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the number of additional games this time is increased. The image to be shown is displayed on the image display device 63.

When the special addition effect is being executed (step S3606: YES), the direct addition effect setting process during the special addition effect is executed (step S3608). In the direct addition effect setting process, while continuing the special addition effect currently being executed, the effect indicating that the number of games added this time has been added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 is executed. The direct addition table during the special addition effect that is possible is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the direct addition table during the special addition effect, the direct addition effect is performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. At the same time as the effect is executed, an image showing the number of additional games this time is displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the direct addition effect is executed even in the situation where the special addition effect is being performed. Therefore, in the situation where the special addition effect is being executed, the number of additional games accompanying the execution of the special addition effect It is possible to make the player expect not only the occurrence but also the occurrence of the number of additional games based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination in each game.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S3604, the number of additional games generated this time is not added to any of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126, and the stock game number counter 127, and the direct addition effect is further executed. do not. As a result, when it is already determined that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded, it is possible to prevent the direct addition effect from being executed.

Next, the A-loop effect processing executed in step S3513 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.

First, it is determined whether or not the expected effect by the A loop is being executed (step S3701). The expected effect by the A loop is an effect executed before the special additional effect is executed, and is continued for three games as the execution period of the expected effect. In the expected effect by the A loop, an effect that enables the player to expect the occurrence of a special additional effect in each game included in the execution period of the expected effect is executed. By executing the expected effect by the A loop in this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special additional effect.

Even in a situation where the A loop does not occur and the special additional effect is not executed, the false expectation effect can be executed. When the expected production by the A loop is started, the false expected production is the addition of 10 games, which is the same as the number of the additional games, in correspondence with the occurrence of the addition of 10 games based on the generation of the A loop. It starts following the execution of the direct addition effect. Then, the false expected effect is also continued for three games as the execution period of the expected effect as in the expected effect of the A loop, and each game included in the execution period of the expected effect is also executed in the expected effect of the A loop. The effect to be obtained is executed. By executing the false expected effect in this way, when the expected effect is executed in the ART state ST9, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the special additional effect is executed after that.

When the expected effect by the A loop is not being executed (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3702). The A-loop winning command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the main MPU 72 shifts to the A loop as described above. When the A-loop winning command is received (step S3702: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the A-loop winning command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the number of stock games. The sum of the value of the counter 127 and "10", which is the information on the number of additional games set in the A loop winning command, exceeds the maximum number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2. Whether or not it is determined (step S3703).

That is, even if the number of additional games generated this time at the time of winning the A loop is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, at least the number of added additional games is added in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Determine if part of it will be invalidated. As described above, not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 is referred to to determine whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded, although it has already been given. A loop that newly generated notification and digestion to the player of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that is not the target of notification to the player It is possible to prioritize the number of additional games at the start of.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, even if the A loop is being executed by the main MPU 72, the expected effect by the A loop is not executed and the special additional effect is not executed. As a result, even though it has already been confirmed that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded, it is possible to prevent the effect of notifying the further increase in the number of continuous games from being executed. Become.

If a negative determination is made in step S3703, the start setting process of the expected effect is executed (step S3704). In the start setting process, the direct addition table at the time of winning the A loop is read from the production side ROM 93, which enables the execution of the effect indicating that the addition of 10 games, which is the number of additional games at the time of winning the A loop, has occurred. Store in RAM 94. Further, the execution pattern of the expected effect to be executed this time is determined by lottery over the execution period of the expected effect, and the expected effect table corresponding to the execution pattern determined by the lottery is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. .. In this case, in the expected effect by the A loop, it is easy to select an effect having a higher degree of expectation for execution of the special additional effect than the false expected effect. After the production execution control is performed by the production side MPU 92 according to the direct placement table, the production execution control is performed by the production side MPU 92 according to the expected production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are affected. First, the direct addition effect of 10 games is executed, and an image showing the number of additional games of the 10 games this time is displayed on the image display device 63, and then the expected effect is executed over the execution period of the expected effect. ..

After that, "3" corresponding to the execution period of the expected effect is set in the expected effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3705). The expected effect counter is a counter for specifying that the expected effect is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the expected effect on the effect side MPU 92. The value set in the expected effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

After that, the respective values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are added by "10" (step S3706). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games this time is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games this time is added to the continuous game. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9.

After that, "1" is set in the A loop effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3707). The A-loop effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the main MPU 72 is the A-loop and the effect corresponding to the A-loop should be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3702, an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, or the process of step S3707 is executed, whether or not "1" is set in the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is determined. Determine (step S3708). When "1" is set in the A loop effect flag (step S3708: YES), the stock game number counter 127 is provided on condition that the A loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3709: YES). The addition process to is executed (step S3710). In the A loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed as described above. Therefore, in the addition process of step S3710, the stock game number counter 127 is set to " 50 "is added. When a negative determination is made in step S3709, or when the process of step S3710 is executed, the special addition effect process is executed (step S3711). The special addition effect processing will be described in detail later.

When the expected effect by the A loop is being executed (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not an opportunity to update the expected effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3712). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the expected effect counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the expected effect counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S3714). .. When the value of the expected effect counter is not "0" (step S3714: NO), the expected effect update setting process is executed (step S3715). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the expected effect table, which is currently the reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the expected effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the expected effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the expected effect counter is "0" (step S3714: YES), the selection process of the special additional effect is executed (step S3716). FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a selection process of the special addition effect.

First, the sum of the current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the number of minimum special additional games exceeds the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). Whether or not it is determined (step S3801). The current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 grasped from the A loop winning command when the A loop winning command is received, and the number of games digested after receiving the A loop winning command. Is derived by adding. Further, in the special addition effect, an effect is executed to make the player recognize that the number of games already stored in the stock game number counter 127 has been added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of special addition effect. As shown in FIG. 76, as the special addition effect, the first special addition effect that allows the player to recognize the addition of 50 games by performing the effect that the addition of 25 games has occurred in each of the two games, and the first special addition effect. The second special addition effect that makes the player aware of the addition of 100 games by performing the effect that the addition of 25 games has occurred in each of the 4 games, and the effect that the addition of 50 games has occurred. The third special addition effect that allows the player to recognize the addition of 100 games by being performed in each of the two games, and the effect that the addition of 50 games occurs in each of the three games 150 games. The fourth special addition effect that makes the addition recognizable to the player and the effect that the addition of 50 games have occurred are performed in each of the four games, so that the player can recognize the addition of 200 games. The 6th special addition effect that makes the player aware of the addition of 200 games and the addition of 100 games are performed in each of the 2 games by performing the 5 special addition effect and the effect that the addition of 100 games has occurred. In each of the three games, the 7th special addition effect that makes the player can recognize the addition of 300 games by performing the effect that occurred in each of the three games, and the effect that the addition of 200 games occurred in each of the three games. The eighth special addition effect is set so that the player can recognize the addition of 600 games by being performed. In this case, in the A loop, as described above, 50 games are added each time one game is executed. Therefore, any of the first to eighth special addition effects is finally notified of the addition game. The number is 50 x n games (n is an integer of 1 or more). Since the first to eighth special additional effects are set as described above, the minimum number of special additional games is 50 games when the first special additional effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the selection process of the special addition effect (FIG. 75), in step S3801, the game notified to the player as the number of games already digested in the advantageous section SC2 this time and the number of continuous games already remaining in the ART state ST9. It is determined whether or not the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the numbers from the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the minimum number of special additional games. Then, if the number is not more than the minimum number of special additional games, the special additional effect is not executed. As a result, even though the special additional effect is generated and the number of additional games is notified, a part of the notified additional games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to prevent the event from occurring.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, a special additional lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S3802). Here, the number and types of special additional effects that can be executed differ depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. In addition, the sum of the number of games already digested in the current ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 so as not to exceed the remaining maximum number of games. It is necessary to set the number and types of special additional effects. Therefore, the special additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the production side ROM 93.

In the special additional effect lottery table, there are not only lottery results in which only one unit of special additional effect is selected, but also lottery results in which a plurality of units of special additional effect are selected. For example, in the special addition lottery table referred to when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "800" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 800 games or more, the second special addition effect → the fifth special addition effect → 6th special additional production → 7th special additional production type and lottery result to determine the execution order exist, and 5th special additional production → 8th special additional production type And there is a lottery result that determines the execution order. Further, in the special addition lottery table referred to when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "300" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 300 games or more, the third special addition effect → the sixth special addition effect There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special additional effect, and there is also a lottery result that only the 7th special additional effect is used.

Here, when a plurality of types of special additional effects are selected, the type of special additional effects, which is the number of games in which the total number of additional games to be notified is large, is the later execution order. As a result, when 1 unit of special addition effect is executed after 1 unit of special addition effect is completed, the rear side 1 unit special addition effect is more than the front side 1 unit special addition effect. The number of additional games will be notified, and it will be possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special addition effect of the type in which the total number of additional games to be notified is small may be the configuration in which the execution order is later, and the total addition to be notified may be added. The execution order may be set regardless of the number of games.

After reading the special addition lottery table, the lottery process for the special addition effect is executed (step S3803). In the lottery process, the current numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the special additional lottery table read in step S3802. The type of the special additional effect to be executed this time is specified, and if there are multiple types of the special additional effect to be executed this time, the execution order is specified.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S3801, it means that there is no room for executing a special additional effect in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" so as to disable the execution of the special additional effect (step S3804).

Returning to the description of the A-loop effect processing (FIG. 74), after executing the special addition effect selection process in step S3716, whether or not the value of the A-loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is "0" is determined. Determine (step S3717). When the value of the A loop effect flag is "0" (step S3717: YES), the special additional effect cannot be executed due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, so the processing after step S3718 is performed. Do not execute.

When "1" is set in the A loop effect flag (step S3717: NO), the setting process of the special addition effect is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, the type of the special additional effect to be executed first selected in the selection process of the special additional effect is grasped, and the special additional effect table that enables the execution of the grasped special additional effect is generated on the production side ROM93. Is read from and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the stored special addition effect table, the special addition effect targeted for execution this time on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is added. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the production.

After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special additional effect to be executed this time is set in the special additional effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3719). For example, if the special additional effect targeted for execution this time is the first special additional effect, "2" is set, and if it is the fifth special additional effect, "4" is set. The special additional effect counter is a counter for specifying that the special additional effect is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the special additional effect on the effect side MPU 92. The value set in the special addition effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

After that, on the condition that a plurality of units of the special additional effect are selected in the selection process of the special additional effect in step S3716 (step S3720: YES), the stock process of the special additional effect is executed (step S3721). As described above, the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for a special additional effect. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and it is possible to store information on the type of special additional effect waiting to be executed according to the execution order.

When a negative determination is made in step S3720, or when the process of step S3721 is executed, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect selected in the selection process of the special additional effect in step S3716 is subject to ART subtraction. The game is added to the counter 125 (step S3722), and the total number of additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3723). In this case, if a plurality of units of special addition effects are selected in the selection process of the special addition effects in step S3716, the total number of additional games notified by the special addition effects of the plurality of units is calculated by the ART subtraction target counter. It is added to 125 and subtracted from the stock game counter 127.

However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the notification of the number of additional games is executed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can be made to correspond to the execution of the special addition effect. After executing the process of step S3723, the processes of steps S3709 to S3711 already described are executed.

Next, the special addition effect processing executed in step S3711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

When the special addition effect is being executed (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether or not an opportunity to update the special addition effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3902). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, the value of the special addition effect counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3903). In addition, the number of additional games notified in this game in the currently set 1 unit special additional effect is grasped from the special additional effect table currently referred to, and the grasped number of additional games is displayed. It is added to the counter 126 (step S3904). As a result, the number of additional games notified in this game as a special additional effect is added to the display of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. In addition, the update setting process of the special addition effect is executed (step S3905). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the special addition effect table currently being referred to is executed according to a new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the special additional effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the special additional effect.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the special additional effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the special additional effect of one unit currently being executed is completed ( Step S3906). When a negative determination is made in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or greater than the creation reference value corresponding to the number of games for which a special additional effect of 1 unit can be newly created. (Step S3907). Specifically, the creation reference value is set to 50 games, which is the minimum number of special additional games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, the creation lottery process is executed (step S3908). In the creation lottery process, the numerical information read from the random number counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 is collated with the creation lottery table stored in the production side ROM 93. The creation lottery table is set so that there is a 50% chance of winning the creation. When the creation is won in the creation lottery process (step S3909: YES), it is determined whether or not it is possible to stock the special additional effect (step S3910).

Specifically, as in step S3801 in the selection process of the special addition effect (FIG. 75), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special addition games (specifically). In addition to determining whether or not the sum with "50") exceeds the maximum number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2, the stock area 128 of the special additional effect in the effect side RAM 94 It is determined whether or not there is a free area for stocking the information of the special addition effect. If the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded and there is an empty area in the stock area 128 of the special addition effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3910.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3910, the lottery process is executed on the way (step S3911). In the midway lottery process, first, the special additional lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the production side ROM 93. Specifically, the type of special additional effect that can be executed differs depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. In addition, the sum of the number of games already digested in the current ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 so as not to exceed the remaining maximum number of games. It is necessary to set the type of special addition effect to. Therefore, the special additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the production side ROM 93. In this case, the special addition lottery table read in step S3802 in the selection process of the special addition effect (FIG. 75) had a lottery result in which a plurality of special addition effects were selected at one time, but in step S3911 In the special addition lottery table read out, there is no lottery result in which a plurality of special addition effects are selected at one time. In the midway lottery process, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read special additional lottery table. In this way, the type of special additional production to be stocked this time is specified.

After that, the stock processing of the special additional effect is executed (step S3912). As described above, the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for a special additional effect. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and it is possible to store information on the type of special additional effect waiting to be executed according to the execution order. In step S3912, information on the type of special additional effect selected in step S3911 is written in the area of the free area in the stock area 128 of the special additional effect that has the earliest execution order.

After that, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect selected in step S3911 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3913), and the total number of additional games is further subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (Step S3914). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the notification of the number of additional games is executed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, it is possible to make the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special addition effect.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S3906 in the process for the special additional effect, that is, when the special additional effect that was being executed is completed, the stock of the special additional effect exists by referring to the stock area 128 of the special additional effect. It is determined whether or not (step S3915). When the stock exists (step S3915: YES), the setting process of the special addition effect is executed (step S3916). In the setting process, information on the type of special additional effect stored in the area that is the earliest execution order in the stock area 128 of the special additional effect is grasped, and the grasped special additional effect can be executed. The additional effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the stored special addition effect table, the special addition effect targeted for execution this time on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is added. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the production. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special additional effect to be executed this time is set in the special additional effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3917).

When the stock does not exist (step S3915: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has not yet been received from the main MPU 72 and the special additional effect can be created (step). S3918). Regarding the determination of whether or not it is possible to create a special additional effect, specifically, as in step S3801 in the selection process of the special additional effect (FIG. 75), the current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 and ART. Whether or not the sum of the value of the subtraction target counter 125 and the minimum number of special additional games (specifically, "50") exceeds the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). judge.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3918, the type of special additional effect is selected by lottery by executing the midway lottery process in the same manner as in step S3911 (step S3919). Even in the midway lottery process in this case, one unit of special additional effect is selected. Then, the setting process of the special addition effect is executed (step S3920). In the setting process, the special addition effect table selected in step S3919 that enables execution of the special addition effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the stored special addition effect table, the special addition effect targeted for execution this time on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is added. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the production. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special additional effect targeted for execution this time is set in the special additional effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3921).

After that, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect set as the execution target this time is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3922), and the total number of additional games is further subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (Step S3923). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the notification of the number of additional games is executed along with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can be made to correspond to the execution of the special addition effect.

When the special additional effect is not being executed (step S3901: NO) and the expected effect is not being executed (step S3924: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901: NO). Step S3925). The A-loop end command is transmitted when the A-loop ends in the main MPU 72 as described above. When the A-loop end command has been received (step S3925: YES), the A-loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3926). When the A-loop effect flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S3708 of the A-loop effect process (FIG. 74), so that the special additional effect process is not executed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 78, when an A loop occurs in the main MPU 72, the expected effect and the special additional effect are executed under the control of the effect side MPU 92. FIG. 78 (a) shows the execution period of the A loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 78 (b) shows the execution period of the expected effect, and FIG. 78 (c) shows the execution period of the special additional effect. d) indicates the period during which the special additional effect is stocked.

First, the case where the special additional production is not stocked will be described.

At the timing of t1, the A loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 78 (a). As a result, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed although the player is not notified. Further, at the timing of t1, the expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 78 (b). As already explained, the expected effect is executed over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop is continued on the main MPU 72.

After that, at the timing of t2, which is a situation in which the expected effect continues as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 78 (a). However, even if the A loop ends, the expected effect is continuously executed for three games, so that the expected effect is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the expected effect ends at the timing of t3. At the timing of t3, the number and type of special additional effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, since the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends early and the number of additional games stored in the stock game number counter 127 is small, one unit of special additional effect is selected. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the special addition effect of the selected 1 unit is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. The special additional effect continues over a plurality of games, and the number of additional games is notified to the player in each game.

Next, a case where a special additional effect is stocked will be described.

At the timing of t5, the A loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 78 (a). As a result, every time one game is executed, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games. Further, at the timing of t5, the expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 78 (b). As already explained, the expected effect is executed over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop is continued on the main MPU 72.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 78 (b) at the timing of t6 in which the A loop continues in the main MPU 72. At the timing of t6, the number and type of special additional effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, the execution of the special additional effect of 3 units is determined. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the special addition effect of 1 unit is started at the timing of t6, and as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the execution of the special addition effect of 2 units is stocked. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the special addition effect of one unit ends at the timing of t7. In this case, since the execution of the special addition effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the special addition effect is newly started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 78 (c). As shown in FIG. 78 (a), since the A loop is still continuing in the main MPU 72, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games in each game, although the player is not notified. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the special addition effect started at the timing of t8 is being executed. Further, at the timing of t10 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the special addition effect of one unit ends. In this case, since the execution of the special addition effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the special addition effect is newly started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 78 (c). With the start of the special additional effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the execution of the special additional effect is not stocked. After that, at the timing of t12, the special addition effect is completed as shown in FIG. 78 (c).

Next, the B-loop effect processing executed in step S3514 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

When the B loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4001: YES), the addition process to the stock game number counter 127 is executed (step S4002). In the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed as described above. Therefore, in the addition process of step S4002, the stock game number counter 127 is set to " 50 "is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, it is determined whether or not a special freeze command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4003). The special freeze command is when the number of continuous games of the B loop in the main MPU 72 is 21 or more, and all the number of games added by the B loop is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. However, it is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded. Further, as already explained, the situation where the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 or more is not notified to the player at the end of the B loop even if the number of games digested in the B loop is taken into consideration. This means that the number of additional games is 1000 or more. Therefore, when the special freeze command is received, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect in which the addition of 1000 games or more is notified.

When the special freeze command is received (step S4003: YES), the start setting process of the special freeze effect is executed (step S4004). In the start setting process, the information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop set in the special freeze command is grasped. Then, ("the number of games continued in the B loop"-"the number of games digested in the B loop" is added to "the number of games continued in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop" (50 games). ) ”) ד The number of games added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games) ”is derived as the number of specially added games. , The special freeze effect table that enables notification of the derived number of special additional games is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94.

In the special freeze effect table, information that enables the display of the number of special additional games derived above is set, and information that enables execution of the special freeze effect is set. In addition, since the special freeze effect is executed over the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect set by the main MPU 72, it is a special freeze effect table showing the number of additional games. However, the execution period of the production is set to the freeze period for the special freeze production. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the special freeze effect table, the special freeze effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and more than 1000 games derived as described above are executed. An image showing the number of additional games is displayed on the image display device 63.

After that, the number of special addition games derived above is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and added to the display counter 126 (step S4005). As a result, the number of special additional games becomes the number of games to be subtracted due to the digestion of the games in the ART state ST9 on the production side MPU 92, and the number of special additional games is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the image display device 63. It will be added. After that, the number of the special additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S4006).

Next, a state in which a special freeze effect is executed under the control of the effect side MPU 92 when a B loop occurs in the main side MPU 72 with reference to the time chart of FIG. 80 will be described. FIG. 80 (a) shows the execution period of the B loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 80 (b) shows the execution period of one game, and FIG. 80 (c) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect.

First, a case where the special freeze effect is not executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the B loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 80 (a). As a result, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed although the player is not notified. When the A loop is started, the expected effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, but the expected effect triggered by the start of the B loop is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the timing of t1 to t2, the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, which are the situations in which the B loop continues, are shown in FIG. 80. As shown in (b), one game is executed. Since each of these games is executed in the B-loop situation, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games in each game, and the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process of the B-loop.

After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 80 (b) at the timing of t7, which is a situation in which the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80 (a). When the one game is started, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. However, it will be out of continuation due to the continuous lottery process of B loop. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 80 (a). In this case, since the number of consecutive games in the B loop is not 21 games or more, the special freeze effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 80 (c).

Next, a case where the special freeze effect is executed will be described.

At the timing of t9, the B loop is started at the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 80 (a). As a result, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed although the player is not notified.

After that, in a situation where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, and the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Twenty games are executed, including the timing of ~ t14. After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 80 (b) at the timing of t15, which is a situation in which the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80 (a). When the one game is started, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. However, it will be out of continuation due to the continuous lottery process of B loop. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 80 (a).

In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), although one game is started at the timing of t15, the freeze period for the special freeze effect is set in the main MPU 72, and the freeze period is set from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Even when a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation. Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the special freeze effect is executed from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Then, at the timing of t16, the freeze period for the special freeze effect elapses in the main MPU 72, and the special freeze effect ends as shown in FIG. 80 (c). As a result, the game involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17.

Next, the stock release process executed in step S3519 in the extraordinary effect control process (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81. The stock release process is executed when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 is 1 or more (step S4101). A situation in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more means that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, which is the target of digestion in the main MPU 72, is 1 or more, and the value of the production side MPU 92 is the target of digestion. The number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is "0". Then, in this situation, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, which is the target of digestion in the main MPU 72, is stored in the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first emission reference value (step S4102). The first release reference value corresponds to the value of 10 games. As already described, the ART state ST9 has various additional effects, but the minimum number of games that can be notified in these various additional effects is 10 games. That is, the first emission reference value is set as the minimum number of games that can be notified in various additional effects.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, all the values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S4103). As a result, all the games stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. After that, the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4104). As a result, although the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is newly set, the number of games is not displayed as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. In addition, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4105).

After that, the start setting process of the first emission effect is executed (step S4106). In the start setting process, the first emission effect table that enables the execution of the first emission effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the first emission effect table, the first emission effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the first release effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 is about to end is executed. Further, in the first release effect, an image indicating that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is unknown is displayed on the image display device 63.

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b). When the value of the display counter 126 is 1 or more in the ART state ST9 and various additional effects are not executed, the moving image is displayed by the effect character G8 for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 82 (a). , The number of games image G9 for notifying the value stored in the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is displayed. The number of games displayed in the number of games image G9 is subtracted by 1 each time one game is digested. Then, as a result of subtracting 1, the number of games displayed in the game number image G9 becomes "0" and the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more and less than 10. The first release effect is started. In the first release effect, as shown in FIG. 82B, an end suggestion image G10 indicating that the end of the ART state ST9 is near is displayed, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is unknown. The number of games unknown image G11 is displayed. When the first release effect is executed in this way, the player recognizes that the ART state ST9 is approaching the end.

In the situation where the first release effect is being executed, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is directly added and an addition by the A loop or an addition by the B loop occurs, the first release effect is terminated. At the same time, the production corresponding to the addition is executed. Then, after that, the normal effect for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 82A is executed. Further, although the description of the specific processing is omitted, when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in the situation where the first release effect is executed, it corresponds to the effect that triggered the addition. The number of additional games is not notified as it is, but the number of games that is the sum of the number of additional games corresponding to the effect that triggered the addition and the remaining number of continuous games of the first release effect is notified as the number of additional games. At the same time, it is notified as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the normal effect for the ART state ST9 started after that.

Returning to the description of the stock release processing (FIG. 81), when a negative determination is made in step S4102, whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or greater than the first emission reference value and equal to or less than the second emission reference value. (Step S4107). The second emission reference value corresponds to the value of 100 games. As already described, the ART state ST9 has a direct addition effect, but the maximum number of games that can be notified in the direct addition effect is 100 games. That is, the second emission reference value is set as the maximum number of games that can be notified in the direct addition effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, all the values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S4108). As a result, all the games stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. Further, the number of games newly set as the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4109).

After that, the start setting process of the second emission effect is executed (step S4110). In the start setting process, the second emission effect table that enables the execution of the second emission effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the second emission effect table, the second emission effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the second release effect, an effect indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the number of added games is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Image is displayed.

FIG. 82 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second emission effect is executed. In the second release effect, an additional notification image G12 indicating that 100 games have been added is displayed, and the number of games displayed in the additional notification image G12 is added to the number of games image G9 which is 0 games. Image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that an additional 100 games have occurred. After the second emission effect is executed, the normal effect for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 82A is executed.

Returning to the description of the stock release process (FIG. 81), when a negative determination is made in step S4107, it means that the number of games exceeding 100 games is stored in the stock game number counter 127. In this case, the process of selecting the number of released games is executed (step S4111). In the selection process, the release selection table corresponding to the value of the current stock game number counter 127 is read from the effect side ROM 93, and the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read out. Then, by collating the read numerical information with the release selection table, the number of games to be released is selected as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, in the release selection table, a plurality of types of release games are set at intervals of 10 games up to a value stored in the stock game number counter 127, and the selection rate of each release game number is constant or It is almost constant.

After that, the value of the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S4112). As a result, the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is set as the number of games to be digested in the ART state ST9 in the effect side MPU 92. Further, the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, the value of the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S4113).

After that, the start setting process of the third emission effect is executed (step S4114). In the start setting process, the third emission effect table that enables the execution of the third emission effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the third emission effect table, the third emission effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the third release effect, an effect indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the number of added games is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Image is displayed. The specific content of the third release effect is the same as the content of the second release effect shown in FIG. 82 (c).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4101 because the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", the start setting process of the ART end effect is executed (step S4115). In the start setting process, the ART end effect table that enables execution of the ART end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART end effect table, the ART end effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the ART end effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is executed, and in the image display device 63, the number of games digested in the current ART state ST9 and the player in the current ART state ST9 are displayed. The number of game media given is notified.

Next, a state in which various emission effects are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 83A shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 83B shows the execution period of the normal effect in the ART state ST9, and FIG. 83C shows the value of the stock game number counter 127 being 1 or more. 83 (d) shows the execution period of the first release effect, FIG. 83 (e) shows the execution period of the second release effect, and FIG. 83 (f) shows the execution period of the third release effect. The execution period is shown, and FIG. 83 (g) shows the occurrence timing of the direct addition effect.

First, a case where only the first emission effect is executed among the first to third emission effects will be described.

When the ART state ST9 is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 83 (b). After that, at the timing of t2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately terminated, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2 is less than the first emission reference value, the first emission effect is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 83 (d). This first release effect continues for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2. At the timing of t2, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is “0” as shown in FIG. 83 (c).

After that, in the situation where the first release effect is being executed, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is not added, so that the ART measured by both the main MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t3 The number of continuous games remaining in the state ST9 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t3, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the first emission effect ends as shown in FIG. 83 (d).

Next, a case where each of the first to third emission effects is executed will be described.

When the ART state ST9 is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 83 (b). After that, at the timing of t5, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately terminated, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t5 is less than the first emission reference value, the first emission effect is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 83 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (g), a direct addition effect is generated at the timing of t6, which is the situation where the first release effect is being executed. In the direct addition effect, the number of games that is the sum of the number of games to be added by the direct addition and the remaining number of continuous games of the first release effect is notified as the number of additional games. Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 83 (b) and 83 (d), the first emission effect is completed and the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately terminated, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t7 exceeds the second emission reference value, the third emission effect is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 83 (f). .. In this case, the number of games selected in the release game number selection process (step S4111) is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83B, the normal effect of the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Then, at the timing of t9, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes “0”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately terminated, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t9 is equal to or greater than the first emission reference value and equal to or less than the second emission reference value, it extends from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 83 (e). The second release effect is executed. In this case, the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. At the timing of t9, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is “0” as shown in FIG. 83 (c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83B, the normal effect of the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. Then, at the timing of t11, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by both the main MPU 72 and the directing MPU 92 becomes “0”. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the normal effect of the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83 (b).

<About the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2>
Next, the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 will be described. First, the processes of steps S1801 to S1811 in the second control process of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45 again.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the freeze standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1801). The freeze standby flag is an ending effect until the bonus state ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the bonus state when the bonus state is reached in the middle of the ending effect. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in a state of waiting for a freeze setting at the end of.

When "1" is set in the freeze standby flag (step S1801: YES), the freeze setting process is executed (step S1802). The freeze setting process will be described in detail later. When "1" is not set in the freeze standby flag (step S1801: NO), the game section is the advantageous section SC2 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S1803). When "1" is set in the advantageous section flag (step S1803: YES), the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1804). After that, the ending correspondence process is executed (step S1805).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an ending correspondence process executed by the main MPU 72. The ending correspondence process is executed in step S1805 in the second control process (FIG. 45) of the game section. As described above, the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, so that the ending correspondence process is all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Executed after stopping.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4201). The main-side ending effect flag is a flag for the main-side MPU 72 to specify that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed.

When "1" is not set in the main ending effect flag (step S4201: NO), the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main RAM 74, is the ending compatible game. It is determined whether or not the number (specifically, "1450") or more is equal to or greater than the number (specifically, "1450") (step S4202). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500" ) Or not (step S4203). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games digested in the ART state ST9 and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, it means that it is confirmed that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in relation to the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9. In this case, "1" is set in the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4204). Further, an ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4205). By receiving the ending effect command, the production side MPU 92 starts the ending effect even if other effects such as an expected effect or a special additional effect are being executed. In addition, information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending effect command. As a result, the production side MPU 92 can grasp the number of remaining games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

With the above configuration, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the maximum number of games in relation to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 even when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games. When it is confirmed that the ending effect will be reached, the ending effect will be executed. In this case, since the ending effect execution period is set on condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 is 1 or more, the game states in which the ending effect execution period is started include the ART state ST9 and the ART state ST9. It is either a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) generated in the middle of the process, or a preparation state ST8 after the bonus state generated in the middle of the ART state ST9 is completed.

The contents of the processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described. When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending production command from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 makes an affirmative determination in step S3501 in the unusual production control process (FIG. 72), and the production side ending effect flag provided in the production side RAM 94. Is set to "1" (step S3502). The effect side ending effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the ending effect execution period of the advantageous section SC2 is set. When "1" is set in the ending effect flag on the effect side (step S3503: YES), the ending effect process is executed (step S3504).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an ending effect processing executed by the effect side MPU 92.

When it is the start timing of the ending effect (step S4301: YES), the process of grasping the number of games to be executed of the ending effect is executed (step S4302). In the grasping process, the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is grasped from the ending effect command received this time. Then, the grasped number of games is set in the ending effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The ending effect counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining executed games of the ending effect on the effect side MPU 92, and when the ending effect counter is set to a value of 1 or more, one game is newly started. Each time, the value of the ending effect counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the ending effect counter is already "0", that state is maintained even if one game is newly started.

After that, the start setting process of the ending effect is executed (step S4303). In the start setting process, the ending effect table that enables the execution of the ending effect over the number of games grasped in step S4302 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, the ending effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When it is not the start timing of the ending effect (step S4301: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the ending effect (step S4304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, the ending effect update setting process is executed (step S4305). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the ending effect table, which is currently the reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the ending effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the ending effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S4304, or when the process of step S4305 is executed, it is determined whether or not any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306). When the main MPU 72 sends a game start command in which information that enables identification of the type of the set bonus winning data is set at the start of the game in which the bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning is established. Sends the corresponding commands, so that the production side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on those commands.

When any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306: YES), the first is provided on condition that both the first notification and the second notification are not executed (step S4307: NO). The effect setting process of the notification is executed (step S4308). In the effect setting process of the first notification, data is set so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is reduced and displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 86A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the first notification in which the image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 86A, the partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area is set wider than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63. Then, in the area other than the partial display area, the image G13 for the ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and in the partial display area, the bonus notification image G14 corresponding to one of the bonus winning data being set in the main RAM 74 is displayed. It is displayed. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the bonus winning is possible even in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. .. Further, in the first notification, the ending effect image G13 is displayed more prominently than the bonus notification image G14. This makes it possible to display the bonus notification image G14 while keeping the visibility of the ending effect image G13 as low as possible. The situation in which the first notification is being executed ends when the second notification, which will be described later, is started, or when a bonus prize is established.

When a negative determination is made in step S4306, an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, or the process of step S4308 is executed, the predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) has been reached since the bonus internal state ST2 was reached. It is determined whether or not it has been digested (step S4309). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4309, the effect setting process of the second notification is executed on condition that the second notification has not been executed (step S4310: NO) (step S4311). In the effect setting process of the second notification, the image corresponding to the bonus winning is enlarged and displayed more than in the case of the first notification in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is reduced and displayed on the image display device 63. Set the data to do so.

FIG. 86B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the second notification in which the image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area is set wider than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63. Then, in the partial display area, the image G13 for the ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and the bonus notification image G14 corresponding to the fact that any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 in the area other than the partial display area. It is displayed. That is, the areas where the images G13 and G14 are displayed have the opposite relationship to the case of the first notification. By enlarging the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the player who is concentrating on the ending effect and is not aware of the bonus winning is winning the bonus. The situation in which the second notification is being executed ends when the bonus prize is established.

When a negative determination is made in step S4309, an affirmative determination is made in step S4310, or the process of step S4311 is executed, on condition that either BB winning is established (step S4312: YES). , "1" is set in the BB effect standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4313), and provided in the effect side RAM 94 on condition that one of the RB prizes is established (step S4314: YES). “1” is set in the RB effect standby flag (step S4315). The BB effect standby flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the BB state ST3 is set during the execution of the ending effect, and the RB effect standby flag is the RB state ST4 during the execution of the ending effect. This is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that it is present. If the final game in the BB state ST3 is started before the number of remaining executed games of the ending effect becomes "0" in the situation where the BB effect standby flag is set to "1", the BB effect standby flag is set. Is cleared to "0". In addition, if the final game in the RB state ST4 is started before the number of remaining executed games of the ending effect becomes "0" in the situation where "1" is set in the RB effect standby flag, the RB effect standby flag is set. Is cleared to "0".

Here, as described above, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started, the freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2414 in the bonus process (FIG. 56) of the main MPU 72, which is new. The game is waiting to start. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting is performed, the effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state on the effect side MPU 92 is executed. In this case, when "1" is set in the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74, the process of step S2414 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2413. As a result, even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the bonus state from being performed. When the bonus state is reached in the situation where the ending effect is being executed, the control corresponding to the bonus state is executed in the main MPU 72, but the effect corresponding to the bonus state is executed in the effect side MPU 92. The ending effect is continued as it is without any control. In this case, even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed as described above, the freeze setting is not performed so that the flow of the ending effect is not hindered by the freeze setting. Is possible.

Further, as described above, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is terminated, the freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2709 in the bonus state process (FIG. 59) of the main MPU 72, which is new. The game is waiting to start. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting is performed, the effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state is executed by the effect side MPU 92. In this case, when "1" is set in the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74, the process of step S2709 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2708. As a result, even if the bonus state is terminated while the ending effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the termination of the bonus state from being performed. If the ending effect is set in the middle of the bonus state or if the ending effect is executed and the bonus state is set, the main MPU 72 will execute the control corresponding to the bonus state. The side MPU 92 controls the execution of the ending effect without controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, even if the bonus state is terminated while the ending effect is being executed as described above, the freeze setting is not performed so that the flow of the ending effect is not obstructed by the freeze setting. Is possible.

In the ending effect processing (FIG. 85), when the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the game in which the value of the ending effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0" (step S4316: YES). , The process for ending the ending effect is executed (step S4317). That is, the ending effect ending process is executed when the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect set when the ending effect is started is the end timing of the game of "0".

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a process for ending the ending effect.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the effect extension flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4401). The effect extension flag is set to a bonus state in the middle of the ending effect, and the ending effect is extended because the bonus state continues even if the number of remaining executed games of the ending effect is "0". This is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the situation is present.

When "1" is not set in the effect extension flag (step S4401: NO), the BB state ST3 is determined by determining whether or not "1" is set in the BB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94. Whether or not it is determined (step S4402). When "1" is set in the BB effect standby flag (step S4402: YES), after clearing the BB effect standby flag "0" (step S4403), the game given to the player in the current BB state ST3. It is determined whether or not the total number of media to be given is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S4404). As described above, the BB state ST3 ends when the total number of game media given in the BB state ST3 exceeds the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). The total number of the above is measured not only in the main MPU 72 but also in the directing MPU 92 based on the command transmitted from the main MPU 72. In addition, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number. Specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100", which is less than half of the BB end reference number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific reference number may be set to 1/3 or less of the BB end reference number, or may be set to 1/4 or less.

When the total number of game media granted to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S4404: YES), the BB effect start setting process is executed (step S4405). After that, the effect side ending effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4406).

In the start setting process of the BB effect, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the BB effect that enables the execution of the BB effect. The effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending end effect table, the ending end effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the BB effect table, so that the BB effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. That is, when the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" in the middle of the BB state ST3, the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3. If is still less than or equal to the specific reference number, the ending effect is ended and the BB effect is started even if it is in the middle of the BB state ST3. As a result, when the BB state ST3 is started just before the end of the ending effect, it is possible to create a situation in which the BB effect is executed following the ending effect.

Here, although the details will be described later, it is the end timing of the game in which the value of the ending effect counter becomes "0" in the situation where the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number. When the ending end effect is executed including the case where the ending is executed, the main MPU 72 is set to forcibly wait for the start of a new game for the freeze period at the end of the ending. The freeze period at the end of the ending corresponds to the execution period of the ending effect, and is specifically set to 15 seconds. By executing the ending end effect in a state where the start of a new game is forcibly waited in this way, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending end effect.

Further, when the BB effect is executed following the ending end effect, an image indicating that the BB state ST3 is continuously started is displayed in the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the ending end effect. That is, when the BB effect is started after the ending end effect, the freeze period corresponding to the ending end effect is set, but the freeze period at the start of the bonus corresponding to the start of the bonus state is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the freeze period from becoming excessively long while sufficiently securing the execution period of the ending end effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the RB state ST4 is set by determining whether or not the RB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set (step S4407). .. When "1" is set in the RB effect standby flag (step S4407: YES), the RB effect standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4408).

When a negative determination is made in step S4404, or when the process of step S4408 is executed, a process for extending the ending effect is executed. That is, when the number of remaining executed games set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0", the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is already the specific reference. If the number is exceeded, the ending effect is extended until the BB state ST3 is completed. Further, when the number of remaining execution games set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" and the RB state is ST4, the ending effect is extended until the RB state ST4 ends.

As a process for extending the ending effect, first, an extension setting process for the ending effect is executed (step S4409). In the extension setting process, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the extension table, the execution of the ending effect on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, the production of one game is executed so as to have the continuity of the production with respect to the content of the immediately preceding ending production. After that, "1" is set in the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4410).

When "1" is not set in any of the effect extension flag, the BB effect standby flag, and the RB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 in the ending effect end process (step S4401, step S4402, and step S4407: NO), it is normal. The start setting process of the effect is executed (step S4411). In the start setting process, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. The normal effect table to be enabled is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, first, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending end effect table, so that the ending end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When "1" is set in the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S4412). When the bonus state is not completed (step S4412: NO), the extension setting process of the ending effect is executed (step S4413). In the extension setting process, as in step S4409, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the extension table, the execution of the ending effect on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, the production of one game is executed so as to have the continuity of the production with respect to the content of the immediately preceding ending production.

When the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is completed (step S4412: YES), the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4414), and the effect side ending of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. Clear the effect flag to "0" (step S4415). After that, the start setting process of the normal effect is executed (step S4416). In the start setting process, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. The normal effect table to be enabled is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, first, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending end effect table, so that the ending end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Returning to the description of the second control process (FIG. 45) of the game section, after executing the ending correspondence process in step S1805, the value of the advantageous continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 (specifically). Determines whether or not the value corresponds to "1500") (step S1806). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S1807). In the initialization process of the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if the player stays in any of the false precursor state ST5, the main precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating that the game states are ST5 to ST9, including a counter for storing the number of games. After that, the advantageous section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1808). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section in the advantageous section display unit 67 is terminated.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1809). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the freeze setting process is executed (step S1810).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1809, a forced termination command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1811). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the forced end command, the effect side MPU 92 executes the normal effect start setting process in the other effect process of step S3520 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 72). In the start setting process, the effect side provides a normal return effect table that enables execution of a normal return effect indicating that the user returns to the normal game state ST1 and a normal effect table that enables execution of an effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. It is read from the ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, first, the execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal return effect table, so that the normal return effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the effect is produced according to the normal effect table. By controlling the execution of the effect on the side MPU 92, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1802 or step S1810 in the second control process (FIG. 45) of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. Since the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the freeze setting process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

When "1" is not set in the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4501: NO), it means that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. To do. In this case, first, the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4502). After that, if the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is the BB state ST3 (step S4503: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game in the BB state ST3 (step S4504). If the current game is not the final game in the BB state ST3 (step S4504: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media granted to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S4504: NO). Step S4505). The specific reference number is the same as the specific reference number determined in step S4404 of the ending effect end processing (FIG. 87) in the effect side MPU 92. That is, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, and specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is less than half of the BB end reference number.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S4505, the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4506). In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4506, it waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. As described above, in the state where the start of the new game is awaited, the ending end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, so that the player pays attention to the ending end effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes “0”.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in both steps S4504 and S4505, "1" is set in the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 without executing the freeze counter setting process. If the total number of game media granted to the player in the BB state ST3 is not less than or equal to the specific reference number, not the final game in the BB state ST3, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit and is advantageous. Even after the initialization process of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending effect on the effect side MPU 92 is extended in the situation where the normal section SC1 is in the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect is waited until the end of the extension of the ending effect, that is, the timing of the end of the BB state ST3. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the standby state of the freeze setting.

When the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is not the BB state ST3 (step S4503: NO), it is determined whether or not the current game is other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508: NO), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4509). In the freeze counter setting process, similarly to step S4506, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4509, it waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. As described above, in the state where the start of the new game is awaited, the ending end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, so that the player pays attention to the ending end effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes “0”.

By executing the freeze counter setting process in each of steps S4506 and S4509 as described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, the game is played. If it is not in the bonus state, if it is the final game in the bonus state although it is in the bonus state, or if the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is less than or equal to the specific reference number, the game A freeze period at the end of the ending occurs at the end of. Then, the ending end effect is executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

When the current game is in the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508: YES), "1" is set in the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 without executing the freeze counter setting process. (Step S4510). In the case of the RB state ST4 and not the final game of the RB state ST4, the normal section is executed even after the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. In the situation where the SC1 is in the RB state ST4, the execution of the ending effect on the effect side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect is waited until the end of the extension of the ending effect, that is, the timing of the end of the RB state ST4. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the standby state of the freeze setting.

When "1" is set in the freeze standby flag (step S4501: YES), it is determined whether or not the game is the final game in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 (step S4511). If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4511, the state in which the ending effect is extended in this game ends. Therefore, after clearing the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 to “0” (step S4512), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4513).

In the freeze counter setting process, similarly to steps S4506 and S4509, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4509, it waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. As described above, in the state where the start of the new game is awaited, the ending end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, so that the player pays attention to the ending end effect. It becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes “0”.

Next, a state in which the ending effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 89. 89 (a) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, FIG. 89 (b) shows the execution period of the BB state ST3, and FIG. 89 (c) shows the execution period of the RB state ST4. Indicates the execution period of the ending effect, FIG. 89 (e) shows the execution period of the bonus effect (BB effect or RB effect), and FIG. 89 (f) shows the freeze period.

First, a case where the ending effect ends in a situation in which neither the BB state ST3 nor the RB state ST4 is described will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games at the timing of t1, which is the situation in the advantageous section SC2, and in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 89 (d). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes the end timing of the game when the maximum number of games is reached, so that a new game is created as shown in FIG. 89 (f). A freeze period is started in which the start of is forcibly waited. The ending end effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, when the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89 (f) at the timing of t3, the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 89 (d).

Next, a case where the ending effect ends in the middle of the BB state ST3 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), at the timing of t4, which is the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games, and in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 89 (d). After that, the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 89 (b) at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the BB state ST3 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being obstructed by the freeze setting.

After that, at the timing of t6 in which the BB state ST3 is being executed as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reached the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89 (a). It is the end timing of the game. In this case, since the total number of game media granted so far in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the ending effect is not extended. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), a freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly waited for is started. The ending end effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, when the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89 (f) at the timing of t7, the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 89 (d). Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 is started.

After that, the end timing of the game in which the BB state ST3 ends is reached at the timing of t8. Therefore, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), a freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly waited for is started. The effect corresponding to the end of the BB state ST3 during the freeze period is executed. After that, when the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89 (f) at the timing of t9, the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 is completed as shown in FIG. 89 (e).

Next, a case where the ending effect is extended when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RB state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), at the timing of t10, which is the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games, and in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 89 (d). After that, the RB state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 89 (c) at the timing of t11, which is the situation where the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the RB state ST4 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being obstructed by the freeze setting.

After that, at the timing of t12, which is the situation in which the RB state ST4 is being executed as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reached the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89 (a). It is the end timing of the game. In this case, since the RB state ST4 continues, the ending effect is extended.

After that, the end timing of the game in which the RB state ST4 ends is reached at the timing of t13. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 89 (f), a freeze period in which the start of a new game is forcibly waited for is started. The ending end effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, when the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89 (f) at the timing of t14, the RB state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 89 (c) and the ending as shown in FIG. 89 (d). The production is finished.

<About advantageous maintenance section>
Next, the advantageous maintenance section will be described.

As described above, when the processes of steps S3404 to S3409 of the ART state processing (FIG. 70) are executed, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 up to that point is the number of games that can be continued (when the ART state ST9 ends. Specifically, if it is "1200") or less, the advantage maintenance section generation lottery process is executed, and if the advantage maintenance winning is achieved in the advantage maintenance section generation lottery process, the advantage maintenance of the main RAM 74 is performed. A value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of advantageous maintenance games is set in the counter, and the advantageous maintenance section SC2 is maintained. In the advantageous maintenance section, the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is subtracted by 1 each time one game is digested, and when the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is "0", the value of the game section is changed. The initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed based on the affirmative determination in step S1812 of the second control process (FIG. 45), and the advantageous section SC2 ends.

If a bonus prize is established in the advantage maintenance section, if the first game in the bonus state started by the establishment of the prize is the advantageous section SC2, it will be confirmed that the game will shift to the ART state ST9 after the end of the bonus state. .. In this case, if the bonus state is associated with the establishment of the 3rd BB winning, the 4th BB winning, or the 1st RB winning, which is a bonus winning with no setting difference, the bonus state starts regardless of the game section in the game in which the bonus winning is established. It becomes an advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, even if the bonus winning is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, it is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 in the start game of the bonus state, so that it is confirmed that the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed after the end of the bonus state. Become.

On the other hand, if the bonus state is associated with the establishment of the first BB prize, the second BB prize, or the second RB prize, which is a bonus prize with a setting difference, the advantageous section SC2 is not maintained or set with the start of the bonus state. .. Then, if the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, it will be the normal section SC1 in the start game of the bonus state, so even if the bonus prize occurs in the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. do not. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in the advantageous maintenance section, the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the type of the winning combination and the number of digested games in the advantageous maintenance section. The processing configuration for controlling the execution of the effect will be described below.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section. The effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section is executed after the normal effect control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not an advantage maintenance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4601). The advantage maintenance command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the advantage maintenance section is started when the ART state ST9 ends. When the advantage maintenance command is received (step S4601: YES), the start setting process of the advantage maintenance effect is executed (step S4602). In the start setting process, the advantageous maintenance effect table that enables execution of the advantageous maintenance effect corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section over the number of advantageous maintenance games (specifically, “10”) is read from the effect side ROM 93 and is produced on the effect side. Store in RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the advantage maintenance effect table, the advantage maintenance effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the advantageous maintenance effect of the image display device 63, although the image corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed, the remaining number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect is not displayed. Further, not only the image display device 63 but also the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are not notified about the remaining number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect.

When the advantage maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604). When any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S4605).

If it is not the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S4605: NO), the bonus winning notification setting process is executed on condition that the bonus winning notification is not being executed (step S4606: NO) (step S4607). In the bonus winning notification setting process, data is set so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 91A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus winning notification image G15. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the image display device 63 displays a bonus winning notification image G15 with the characters "Establish a bonus!". By displaying the bonus winning notification image G15 in this way, it is possible to urge the player to establish the bonus winning within the range of the advantageous maintenance section. The display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is terminated when the display of the bonus type notification image G16, which will be described later, is started, or when the bonus winning is established.

In the case of the final game of the advantageous maintenance section (step S4605: YES), the winning data currently set in the main RAM 74 is the winning data in which there is a setting difference in the winning probability, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning. It is determined whether or not it is either the data or the second RB winning data (step S4608). The production side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on the game start command transmitted from the main side MPU 72, and can also specify the type of the bonus winning data. it can.

In the case of any of these winning data (step S4608: YES), even if the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the game section is usually in the start game of the bonus state corresponding to the establishment of the bonus prize. Since it becomes the section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. Therefore, on the condition that the normal effect is not being executed (step S4609: NO), the start setting process of the normal effect is executed (step S4610). In the start setting process of the normal effect, the normal effect table which is in the normal game state ST1 and enables the execution of the normal effect corresponding to the normal section SC1 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, the normal effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Unless a bonus winning is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section where there is a setting difference in the winning probability, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section. In this case, if the bonus winning data for which there is a setting difference in the winning probability is set and the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is reached, the normal production is started at the start of the game. As a result, it becomes difficult to give the player the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not occurred even though the bonus winning has been established in the advantage maintenance section.

If a negative determination is made in step S4608, the bonus type notification setting process is executed on condition that the bonus type notification is not being executed (step S4611: NO) (step S4612). In the notification setting process of the bonus type, it is possible to establish a bonus prize corresponding to the bonus winning data currently set in the main RAM 74 in the situation where the video corresponding to the advantageous maintenance effect is displayed on the image display device 63. Set the data so that the image showing the combination of the symbols to be displayed is displayed.

FIG. 91B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus type notification image G16 in the situation where the third BB winning data is set in the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image G16 of "red 7, red 7, white 7" corresponding to the combination of symbols that establish the third BB prize. By displaying the bonus type notification image G16 in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the bonus winning will be established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability. The display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends when the bonus winning is established.

When the advantage maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES) and the update timing of the advantage maintenance effect comes due to the start of a new game (step S4613: YES), the update setting process of the advantage maintenance effect Is executed (step S4614). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the advantage maintenance effect table currently being referred to is executed according to a new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the advantageous maintenance effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the advantageous maintenance effect.

Next, a state in which the advantageous maintenance section progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 92 (a) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance section, FIG. 92 (b) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 92 (c) shows the bonus winning data in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability. FIG. 92 (d) shows the set timing, FIG. 92 (d) shows the timing when the bonus winning data having a setting difference in the winning probability is set, and FIG. 92 (e) shows the execution period of the bonus state. (F) shows the timing of winning the transition to the ART state ST9, FIG. 92 (g) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance effect, and FIG. 92 (h) shows the execution period of the bonus winning or the bonus type notification effect. 92 (i) shows the execution period of the normal effect.

First, a case where a bonus is won with a setting difference in the advantage maintenance section and a bonus prize is established in a game before the final game in the advantage maintenance section will be described.

At the timing of t1, which is the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the advantageous maintenance section is started as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the advantageous maintenance is maintained as shown in FIG. 92 (g). The production starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), a bonus winning with a setting difference is obtained at the timing of t2, which is the timing when the game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started. In this case, at the timing of t2, the bonus winning notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

The player who confirms the bonus winning notification image G15 establishes a bonus winning in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at the timing of t3, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance section is ended and the bonus state is started as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (e). Further, at the timing of t3, the advantageous maintenance effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (g), and the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t4. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92B, the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the start game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 92 (f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

Next, a case where a bonus winning with a setting difference is established in the advantageous maintenance section and a bonus winning is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section will be described.

At the timing of t5, which is the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the advantageous maintenance section is started as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the advantageous maintenance is maintained as shown in FIG. 92 (g). The production starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), a bonus winning with a setting difference is obtained at the timing of t6, which is the timing when the game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started. In this case, at the timing of t6, the bonus winning notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

Although the bonus winning notification image G15 is confirmed, the player cannot establish the bonus winning, and the final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t7. In this case, even if the main MPU 72 is maintained in the advantageous maintenance section as shown in FIG. 92 (a), at the timing of t7 as shown in FIGS. 92 (g) and 92 (i). The advantage maintenance effect is completed and the normal effect is started. Further, even if the advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started in this way, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is continued as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Then, a bonus prize is established in the final game. In this case, at the timing of t8, which is the end timing of the final game, the advantageous maintenance section is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (a), and the advantageous section SC2 is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (b). Further, at the timing of t8, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 92 (e). In the start game of the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is used instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

As mentioned above, in the game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus is won with a setting difference, and even if the bonus winning notification image G15 is displayed, the bonus winning can be established before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section. If it cannot be done, even if the bonus prize is established in the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 will not be won. That is, in order to win the transition to the ART state ST9, it is necessary to predict the type of bonus winning data for the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 by the game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous maintenance section.

Next, a case where a bonus is won with a setting difference in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section will be described.

The final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t9 in the situation where the advantageous maintenance section is as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the advantageous section SC2 is as shown in FIG. 92 (b). In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), a bonus winning with a setting difference is obtained. If a bonus is won with a setting difference in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus winning notification image G15 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 92 (g) and 92 (i), the advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started. Then, even if the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, not only the advantageous maintenance section is ended at the timing of t10, which is the end timing of the final game, as shown in FIG. 92 (a). As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the advantageous section SC2 is terminated. Further, at the timing of t10, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 92 (e). In the start game of the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is used instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, a case where a bonus is won with no setting difference in the final game of the advantage maintenance section will be described.

The final game of the advantageous maintenance section is started at the timing of t11 in the situation where the advantageous maintenance section is as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the advantageous section SC2 is as shown in FIG. 92 (b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the bonus is won with no setting difference at the timing of t11. If the bonus is won with no setting difference and it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the bonus type notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is started.

The player who confirms the bonus type notification image G16 establishes a bonus prize in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at the timing of t12, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance section is ended and the bonus state is started as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (e). Further, at the timing of t12, the advantageous maintenance effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (g), and the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is terminated as shown in FIG. 92 (h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t13. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92B, the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the start game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 92 (f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

<About game history management>
Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 72 in order to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93. The management process is executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When one game is newly executed (step S4701: YES), the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S4702). The total number of games counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of the game state and the game section. The total number of games counter 74a is composed of 3 bytes, and it is possible to measure the number of games up to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless all clear processing in step S104 or clear processing other than the set value in step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games in a plurality of business days in the game hall.

When one game is newly executed (step S4701: YES) and the advantageous section SC2 (step S4703: YES), not only the value of the total number of games counter 74a is added by 1, but also the main RAM 74 The value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in the above is added by 1 (step S4704). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74, and even if the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0". Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 is generated a plurality of times with the normal section SC1 in between, the total number of games digested in the plurality of advantageous section SC2 can be measured by the advantageous game number counter 74b. .. The advantageous game number counter 74b is composed of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless all clear processing in step S104 or clear processing other than the set value in step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games of the advantageous section SC2 executed on a plurality of business days in the game hall.

When a negative determination is made in step S4701, a negative determination is made in step S4703, or the process of step S4704 is executed, it is determined whether or not the game history management result is displayed ( Step S4705). When it is not the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed (step S4705: NO), it is determined whether or not the display instruction of the management result of the game history has been generated (step S4706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54 is operated in a situation where the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. If the reset button 56 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied, it means that an instruction to display the management result of the game history has been generated.

When it is determined that the display instruction of the game history management result has been generated (step S4706: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S4707). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 74b" / "value of the total game number counter 74a".

After that, the display start process is executed (step S4708). In the display start process, the display of the calculation result of step S4707 is started in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. In this case, of the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S4707 by 100, the tens place is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a on the dual-purpose display 66, and the 1s place is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. The combined display unit 66 is displayed and controlled so as to be so as to. The above calculation result is notified as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. To.

However, in the case of display using only the two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b in this way, the display content on the combined display unit 66 differs depending on whether the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". It will be the same. Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", not only "0" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, but also the advantageous section display unit is displayed. When 67 is lit and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", "0" is simply displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. The advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off. If the management result of the game history is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is not "100", it is assumed that the current game section is the advantageous section SC2. The advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off.

On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed (step S4705: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensor 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a It is determined whether or not the ON signal is received from any of the above (step S4709). When the ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, the ON signal indicating that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is stopped. When receiving from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, when receiving the ON signal indicating that the medal has been inserted from the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. When the ON signal indicating that the checkout button 51 has been pressed is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or when the ON signal indicating that the checkout button 51 has been pressed is received from the checkout detection sensor 51a, the step. An affirmative judgment is made in S4709. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not each ON signal is generated during the valid period.

That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the rotation start of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the rotation stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is subject to bet setting or credit increase. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is subject to the bet setting. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of the credited virtual medal.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the display end process is executed (step S4710). In the display end processing, the display of the calculation result on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 is terminated, and the display contents of the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 are immediately before the display of the calculation result is started. The displayed content. For example, when the display of the above calculation result is started in a situation where the number of granted game media corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the combined display unit 66, the display of the number of granted game media is restarted. Let me. Further, when the display of the above calculation result is started in the situation where the information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66, the information corresponding to the stop order is displayed. Resume. Further, when the display of the above calculation result is started in a situation where nothing is displayed on the combined display unit 66, no display is made. Further, when the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off by displaying the calculation result in the situation where the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off, the state is returned to the turned off state. Further, when the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off by displaying the above calculation result in the situation where the advantageous section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the lit state is restored.

Next, a state in which the management result of the game history is displayed by using the combined display unit 66 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 94 (a) shows a period during which the number of game media granted (displaying the number of grants) corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and FIG. 94 (b) shows the combined display unit 66. The period during which the result of calculating the management result of the game history (hereinafter referred to as the management display) is displayed is shown, and FIG. 94 (c) shows the period during which the front door 12 is in the open state. (D) shows the timing at which the management display instruction is given, and FIG. 94 (e) receives an ON signal from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, and 51a that trigger the display end. Indicates the timing of the operation.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the front door 12 is opened as shown in FIG. 94 (c) at the timing of t1 in which the combined display unit 66 is displaying the number of grants, and the timing of t2 thereafter. As shown in FIG. 94 (d), the reset button 56 is operated as a management display operation. As a result, at the timing of t2, the management display is started on the combined display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 94 (b). After that, the front door 12 is closed as shown in FIG. 94 (c) at the timing of t3 in which the management display is continued. In this case, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the front door 12 is open, but depending on the opening and closing of the front door 12, the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 manage. The end of display does not occur. Therefore, even at the timing of t3, the management display is continued as shown in FIG. 94 (b). Since the opening and closing of the front door 12 does not trigger the end of the management display, the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 is operated to start the management display on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. After that, it is possible to confirm the content of the management display in the state where the front door 12 is closed.

The reel index sensor that detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one round is also excluded from the sensors that generate the end trigger of the management display. As a result, when the management display is started in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the management display ends depending on the rotation state of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R against the intention of the manager of the game hall. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 94 (e), an ON signal is received from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, 51a that trigger the display end. As a result, at the timing of t4, the management display is terminated and the grant number display is restarted as shown in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is set as the use target. Will be done. Further, since a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST9 exist and a game section exists separately from the game states, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. Further, while the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur in the advantageous section SC2, and both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2 are in the normal gaming state. Since the configuration is such that the player can stay in ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4, the player plays the game while expecting that the gaming state is advantageous and the section SC2 is advantageous.

In this case, the bonus state (BB state) corresponding to the bonus combination (specifically, the combination of the first BB winning data, the combination of the second BB winning data, and the combination of the second RB winning data) whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value. The transition to the ART state ST9 may occur based on the occurrence of ST3, RB state ST4) in the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. As a result, the player expects that a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is generated in the advantageous section SC2. Further, according to the configuration, the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 is affected by the probability of occurrence of the bonus state, so that the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 does not have to be directly changed according to the set value. , The transition probability to the ART state ST9 can be indirectly changed according to the set value.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is not executed by itself, and the winning probability is increased according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2. The transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed based on the execution of the game in the bonus state corresponding to the fluctuating bonus combination. As a result, the player who expects to shift to the ART state ST9 not only pays attention to winning the bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value, but also the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. It will be noticed whether or not has been started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination (specifically, a combination of the 3rd BB winning data, a combination of the 4th BB winning data, and a combination of the 1st RB winning data) in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value has occurred in the advantageous section SC2. In that case, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur. This makes it possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming significant.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 with the transition to the bonus state. Therefore, a transition to the ART state ST9 may occur. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section is maintained in the normal section SC1, so that the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. do not. As a result, the player's attention to the former bonus state can be increased as compared with the latter bonus state.

By winning a non-bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value in the normal section SC1, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and the game section becomes the normal section by winning in the transition lottery process. The transition from SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. As a result, the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2 can be prevented from fluctuating according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming significant.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is not executed, and the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. Is executed, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, the player who expects to shift to the ART state ST9 not only pays attention to winning the bonus combination, but is it an advantageous section SC2 when the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is executed? We will pay attention to whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won in the normal section SC1 and a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is started, the transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 does not occur. As a result, in order for the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value to be executed in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section SC2 and the winning combination is won in the advantageous section SC2. It is necessary to execute the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination. Therefore, the player pays attention to the continuation status of the advantageous section SC2, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the first game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus winning is established at an early stage, so that it becomes easy to obtain an opportunity to execute the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs, even if it is the normal section SC1, it becomes the advantageous section SC2 and the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, in the normal section SC1, the player expects to win a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value, rather than a bonus combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value.

Even after the ART state ST9 is completed, the advantageous section SC2 is continued by being set to the advantageous maintenance section. Then, when the bonus winning is established in the situation of the advantageous maintenance section and the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus winning is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. .. As a result, the player expects that a bonus prize will be established in the advantage maintenance section, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section, if the game in which the bonus winning is established is the final game in the advantageous maintenance section, the winning probability changes according to the set value. If it corresponds to, since it is the normal section SC1 in the game in the bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. On the other hand, if a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, even in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section is achieved. Allow the normal production to be performed without executing the production. As a result, it becomes difficult to give the player the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not occurred even though the bonus prize has been established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

On the other hand, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs, even if it is the normal section SC1, it becomes the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, when the bonus prize corresponding to the bonus combination is established in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. Therefore, if a bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance effect is also executed in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of an event in which a bonus prize is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous maintenance section. It becomes.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous maintenance section becomes the number of advantageous maintenance games, the advantageous maintenance section is terminated and the advantageous section SC2 is terminated. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to clarify the timing of the end of the advantageous maintenance section.

Advantageous section Based on the end of the ART state ST9 in the situation where the number of games executed in SC2 is less than or equal to the number of continuous games set as the number of games that is equal to or greater than the number of advantageous maintenance games than the upper limit number of games Set. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantageous maintenance section from occurring even though the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is close to the upper limit number of games.

In the configuration in which the player is expected to shift to the ART state ST9 over a plurality of games when the present precursor state ST6 is reached, and the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end. When the false precursor state ST5 is reached, the effect of expecting the player to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed over a plurality of games, but the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the end. As a result, when the effect of expecting the player to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed over a plurality of games, the player expects to shift to the ART state ST9 after that, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible to plan. In this case, in the false precursor state ST5, the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2. As a result, even if it is in the false precursor state ST5, it is possible to cause a transition to the ART state ST9, so that the player's attention to not only the present precursor state ST6 but also the false precursor state ST5 is increased. It becomes possible.

When a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs in the false precursor state ST5, the number of games executed in the false precursor state ST5 is also measured as the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 that continues thereafter. Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is terminated. As a result, while the advantage of the advantageous section SC2 can be obtained in the false precursor state ST5, the disadvantage of the continuation of the false precursor state ST5 is caused with respect to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Is possible.

When the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is generated once by the end of the false precursor state ST5, when the false precursor state ST5 ends. While the advantageous section SC2 is terminated, even if the false precursor state ST5 is terminated, it is false if the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is not generated once. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the end of the precursor state ST5. As a result, when the advantageous section SC2 is reached, it is guaranteed that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is generated once, which is advantageous for the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to secure the degree and to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 with respect to the end timing of the false precursor state ST5 depending on whether or not the notification of the stop order is generated.

By winning a predetermined combination in the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed, and by winning the transition in the transition lottery process, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the player expects the chance state ST7 to occur, and also expects to win a predetermined combination in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by executing the chance effect in each game of the chance state ST7, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player for the chance state ST7. In this case, when the false precursor state ST5 is set and the chance state ST7 is set in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed, the false precursor effect is continued instead of being started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the production contents of the false precursor effect up to that point from being hindered by the occurrence of the chance effect. Further, even if the false precursor effect is continued without executing the chance effect in this way, the game state is the chance state ST7, so that the profit of the chance state ST7 is not lost. However, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

After the end of this precursor state ST6, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, and the transition to the ART state ST9 also occurs when the transition is won in the transition lottery process executed in the chance state ST7. In this case, if the chance state ST7 is set while the false precursor effect is being executed as described above, the false precursor effect is continued so that the false precursor effect is continued, so that the ART state ST9 is in the middle of the false precursor effect. Transition to ART status ST9 may occur due to winning. As a result, the transition to the ART state ST9 can occur even in the situation where the false precursor effect is executed, and ART is performed regardless of whether the false precursor effect or the main precursor effect is executed. It is possible to make the player expect the transition to the state ST9.

When the false precursor effect is completed in the situation of the chance state ST7, the chance effect is started. This makes it possible to give an opportunity for the chance effect to be executed. Further, even when the chance effect is executed following the end of the false precursor effect in this way, the chance effect is the same as the case where the chance effect is started when the chance state ST7 is set. It will continue for the number of games. As a result, even if the chance state ST7 ends during the execution of the chance effect, the player's expectation can be maintained while the chance effect is being executed.

By ending the advantageous section SC2 based on the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 that is advantageous to the player is prevented from continuing excessively. It becomes possible. In this case, the ending effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the advantageous section SC2 is approaching the end. In addition, by making the player want to confirm the ending effect, it is possible to increase the motivation to continue the advantageous section SC2, and further, when the ending effect is actually executed, the player feels satisfied. It becomes possible to give. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the number of games that will reach the upper limit of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games. The ending effect is executed. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a situation where it is confirmed that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the event that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not reach the upper limit number of games even though the ending effect is executed.

In any of the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, which are advantageous game states for the player, the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games. The ending effect is executed based on the existence. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a situation in which the player is in a favorable gaming state, and when the ending effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

If a bonus state occurs in a situation where the ending effect is being executed, the ending effect is continued without starting the bonus effect (BB effect, RB effect). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the ending effect.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation of being in the BB state and the ending effect is being executed, the total number of game media granted in the BB state at that time is increased. If the number is less than the specific reference number, the BB effect is started. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the BB effect to be executed even in a situation where the execution of the ending effect is prioritized.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation of being in the BB state and the ending effect is being executed, the total number of game media granted in the BB state at that time is increased. If the number exceeds the specific standard number, the ending effect will be continued. Further, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is executed in the RB state, the ending effect is continued. As a result, it is possible to extend the ending effect by utilizing the period in which the favorable situation for the player continues. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ART state ST9 continues in the situation where the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous section SC2.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the progress of the normal game based on the operation of the player is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous section SC2 ends. In this case, if the ending effect is continued as the bonus state continues even after the end of the advantageous section SC2, the progress of the game is not stopped at the end of the advantageous section SC2. As a result, when the ending effect is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, and the bonus state is set after the end of the advantageous section SC2. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the continuing situation is the situation in which the ART state ST9 is continuing.

When the bonus state starts and ends, the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state is started or ended. In this case, even if the bonus state is started or ended in the situation where the ending effect is being executed, the progress of the game is not stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped due to the bonus state.

In any of the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the index value IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" is the index value. Index values IV that are aggregated into index values IV in the front range that are serial numbers from IV = 1 and have different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6" are the index values IV of the last index value IV in the front range. The index values IV in the rear range, which are serial numbers from the index value IV in the next order to the last index value IV, are aggregated. In this way, the index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values having different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6" are aggregated. By consolidating the IVs in the rear range, the index value IV having the same winning probability and the index value IV having different winning probabilities are set between the set values of "1" to "6" in the design stage of the slot machine 10. And make corrections easier.

In the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode, different index values IV are set between the lottery tables even if the same winning data is set. .. On the other hand, an offset table 111 is provided, and in the offset table 111, the winning combinations in which the same winning data is set but different index values IV are set are aggregated in the same winning number. .. Then, the winning number is used in various processes after the winning combination is determined in the combination lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations having the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the execution of the winning combination process, and winning in various processes. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the specific processing of the winning combination.

The winning numbers in the offset table 111 are set as serial number information. As a result, it is possible to preferably perform a process for grasping the winning combination in various processes after determining the winning combination in the combination lottery process.

The relationship between the index value IV and the winning number in each lottery table is set as the offset table 111 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for grasping the winning number based on the index value IV of each lottery table.

Of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the number of games set in the display counter 126 is notified to the player, but the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not notified to the player. Then, a special additional effect indicating that the number of games has been given to the player is executed according to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127. As a result, the effect corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games for a plurality of additional triggers, and the stored number of games is collectively notified as an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a large number of games have been given at one time, and it is possible to give unexpectedness.

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of types of selection modes of the number of games notified to the player as a special additional effect. This makes it possible to diversify the selection mode of the number of games to be notified from the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of types of special additional effects to be selected. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special additional effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Execution of multiple types of special additional effects may be decided at once. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special additional effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the special addition effect is executed, an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified in each of the plurality of games. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the condition for directly adding the number of games is satisfied in the situation where the special addition effect is being executed, in addition to the notification of the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 due to the special addition effect, the notification of the direct addition of the number of games is sent. Will be executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness regarding the notification of the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

The main MPU 72 executes a process for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9, and the effect side MPU 92 executes a process for executing an effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. As a result, while the progress control of the ART state ST9 is centrally performed by the main MPU 72, the processing load of the main MPU 72 increases even if the production corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is complicatedly performed. It is possible to prevent it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control the ART state ST9.

When the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as a predetermined increase number of games in each game. In this case, based on the fact that the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 games or more, which is a specific reference number, the total number of games given to the B loop is collectively notified to the player. A special freeze effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity to be notified of the granting of a large number of games at once, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the main MPU 72 is set to the B loop, the effect corresponding to the setting to the B loop is not executed until the special freeze effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special freeze effect has suddenly occurred, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

When the special freeze effect is executed, the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special freeze effect.

A special freeze effect is executed based on the end of the B loop when the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 games or more, which is a specific reference number of times. As a result, it is possible to execute the special freeze effect in a situation where a large number of games are given, and it is possible to notify the player that the B loop has ended.

The specific reference number of times is set to a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing 1000 games by 50 games, which is a predetermined increase number of games. As a result, even if the number of games given in the B loop is consumed in the middle of the B loop, the number of undigested games of 1000 or more is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. It is possible to notify the player of this.

When the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as a specific increase number of games in each game. In this case, the number of games given in the A loop is temporarily added to the stock game number counter 127 without being notified to the player, while when set in the A loop, the number of specific production games is 3 games. Since the expected effect is executed over the entire period, it is possible to make the player expect how many games are added to the stock game number counter 127 in the situation where the expected effect is executed.

When the expected effect is executed over the specific number of effect games, the special additional effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 at that time is executed even if the A loop is not yet completed. As a result, the player expects the content of the special additional effect to be executed after that during the execution of the expected effect. Further, it is possible to start the special additional effect earlier than in the configuration in which the special additional effect is not executed until the end of the A loop.

Even in a situation where the expected effect is executed over a specific number of effect games, the A loop ends when the end condition of the A loop is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the A loop ends before the expected effect ends and a situation in which the A loop continues even after the expected effect is completed.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more and the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is the first release reference. The execution mode of the release effect for continuing the ART state ST9 differs depending on what kind of value is in relation to the value and the second release reference value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the release effect according to the value of the stock game number counter 127, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or higher than the first release reference value and the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 At least a part of the values is notified to the player as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of security that the ART state ST9 will continue to some extent.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the second release reference value and the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 Only a part of the values of is notified to the player as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the release effect for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player can be increased. It is possible to make the player expect that the ART state ST9 will continue even if the game approaches 0 game.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, the remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 The ART state ST9 is continued while not notifying the number. This makes it possible for the player to expect how long the ART state ST9 will continue.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are commonly used in a plurality of types of lottery processes. As a result, the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l can be suppressed, and the configuration can be simplified.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are targets for acquiring random numbers in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to prevent the random number acquisition target from being biased toward one random number circuit 101a to 101l. Further, since the configuration is such that random numbers are acquired from the shared random number circuits 101a-101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer of the main RAM 74, the processing configuration for specifying the shared random number circuits 101a-101l to be acquired for the random numbers is complicated. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a random number.

The number of lottery processes for acquiring random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is larger than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to increase the number of lottery processes while suppressing the increase in the random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is larger than the maximum number of lottery processes for acquiring random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one game. As a result, in a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are jointly used in a plurality of lottery processes, a plurality of random numbers of the same first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in one game. It is possible to prevent it from being used in the lottery process.

In the combination lottery process, the random numbers are acquired from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a instead of acquiring the random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, the lottery process for the winning combination can be performed strictly.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. As a result, it is possible to use random numbers having the same number of bits regardless of whether the random numbers are acquired from any of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one lottery process.

Every time one game is executed, the value of the total number of games counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is added by 1, and every time one game is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the advantageous game counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1. Will be added. As a result, the slot machine 10 can store and retain the information for deriving the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2. Further, the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is calculated by using the value of the total number of games counter 74a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b, and the calculation result is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. Is displayed. This makes it possible to grasp the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2. Further, when the end trigger occurs in the situation where the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67, the display is terminated. As a result, in a situation where it is not necessary to display the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to prevent the display from being performed on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. Become.

Even if the ON signal is received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensor 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensor 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a, the end trigger occurs. The display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the specified and combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 is completed. This makes it possible to improve the operability for ending the display.

There is only one type of operation for starting the display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 from being unintentionally started.

The transmission of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, the transmission of the ON signal from the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, and the transmission of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a may occur when the game is started. In this case, based on the occurrence of an event that may occur when the game is started in this way, the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 is displayed. Is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played while the calculation result of the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67.

Even when the ON signal is received from the start detection sensor 41a in the situation where the operation of the start lever 41 is not enabled, the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. The display of the calculation result is finished. As a result, without waiting for the operation of the start lever 41 to become effective, the start lever 41 is operated to stay in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. It is possible to end the display of the calculation result of the ratio. This also applies to the stop buttons 42 to 44.

If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a rotation start trigger based on a new operation of the start lever 41 occurs when the subsequent supply of operating power is restarted. Even if this is not done, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of one game by the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being invalidated by the stop of the supply of operating power. Further, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is newly started when the supply of the operating power is restarted in this way, the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is restricted. As a result, when the supply of operating power is restarted while the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed immediately after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. It is possible to prevent it from being executed. If the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed immediately after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not be rotated normally. By restricting the execution of stop control by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

When the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c, "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c in the situation after the supply of operating power is restarted. It is said that there is no state. Then, when the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" in the situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be executed, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the supply of the operating power is restarted by using the constant speed flag 74c, the stop buttons 42 to 44 It is possible to newly start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R while invalidating the operation of.

When the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the steps S104 and S113 in the main process (FIG. 10) when the supply of the operating power is started, Even if each clearing process is not executed, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0". Then, when the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" in the situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be executed, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the supply of the operating power is restarted by using the constant speed flag 74c, the stop buttons 42 to 44 It is possible to newly start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R while invalidating the operation.

When the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where "1" is set for the constant speed flag 74c, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "" in the main process (FIG. 10) when the supply of operating power is restarted. 0 "is cleared. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" when the supply of operating power is restarted.

The constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the number of additional games is given based on the fact that the game is directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). To. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is given in a manner that does not depend on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, even if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination is not the desired result, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of additional games will be given, and the interest of the game will be improved. It becomes possible.

The random numbers used in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) are acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the random numbers used in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) are also operated by the start lever 41. Obtained based on. As a result, even if the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination, the random number acquisition opportunity used in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) can be obtained. Similar to the random number acquisition trigger used in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the start lever 41 can be operated to make it common. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above without complicating the configuration related to the random number acquisition trigger.

In the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the random number updated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is acquired, and in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), the random number updated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is acquired. As a result, the result of the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) can be completely independent of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In the ART state ST9, a lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed in each game. As a result, in the ART state ST9, it is possible to make the player expect the number of additional games to be given in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination.

In the direct addition process (FIG. 65), the addition lottery process is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). As a result, the number of additional games is given regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the number of additional games is given in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). And can be generated. As a result, the player expects that the number of additional games is given according to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and the number of additional games is increased regardless of the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). You would expect it to be granted.

The number of additional games given by being directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is directly added and won in the additional lottery process executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The number of games is less than the number of additional games given by. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) regarding the granting of the number of additional games, and it is assumed that the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is not the desired result. It is possible to expect the player to give the number of additional games.

When the number of additional games is given by the direct addition winning in the addition lottery process executed in the mode corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the number of additional games is always directly added in the lottery process (FIG. 63). Even if the additional winning is won, the number of additional games will not be given in the wake of the direct additional winning. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while preventing the number of additional games from being added excessively.

Based on winning a winning combination with the same winning probability regardless of the set values of multiple stages in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), an addition corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is added. The lottery process is executed. On the other hand, the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). This makes it possible to add the number of additional games while making it difficult to predict the set value.

The random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is the number of bits less than the number of 1-byte bits. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery will be performed in any situation where a situation in which 100% winning is achieved and a situation in which the situation is likely to be lost occur. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, and if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for causing a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, it will be all zero after subtraction. Unless the situation is treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to the 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if the situation where all zeros are obtained after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to exclude the acquisition of all zeros as random numbers. Therefore, when the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as the number of bits larger than the number of bits of 1 byte. It ends up. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of 1-byte bits, so that the lottery value corresponds to 100%. It is possible to use 1-byte lottery value information as information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the lottery value information in advance.

The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be started so that the acceleration period on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order is started after the acceleration period on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize how the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are sequentially started to rotate. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period on the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R may vary. This makes it possible to diversify the starting mode when the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are sequentially started.

If the reel effect is not executed when one game is started, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started at the same time, and if the reel effect is executed when one game is started, the reel effect ends. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted after this, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started in sequence, and the next order is taken after the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. The period until the acceleration period on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the above is started can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the execution modes of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Further, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted after the reel production is completed, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started in sequence, and the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R ends. The period from that time to the start of the acceleration period on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order can vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted after the reel effect is executed.

When the rotation of the left reel 32L is started after the reel effect, the period from the end timing of the reel effect to the start of the acceleration period in the left reel 32L may vary. Further, when the rotation of the middle reel 32M, which is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order, is started, the period from the end of the acceleration period on the left reel 32L to the start of the acceleration period on the middle reel 32M is Can fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and as a result, when the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are sequentially started. It is possible to diversify the starting mode.

For each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the presence or absence of a waiting period until the acceleration period is started and the length thereof are determined by lottery. This makes it possible to make the mode of determining the waiting period irregular.

The presence / absence of a waiting period until the acceleration period for the left reel 32L is started and the random number counter used for determining the length thereof, and the presence / absence and the length of the waiting period until the acceleration period for the middle reel 32M is started. It is the same as the random number counter used in determining. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the configuration.

The period required for the random number counter to make one round is shorter than the period required from the start to the end of the acceleration period on the left reel 32L. As a result, in a configuration in which a common random number counter is used regardless of whether the waiting period for the left reel 32L or the waiting period for the middle reel 32M is determined, the lottery for each waiting period is independently performed. It becomes possible.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus state exists as one of the bonus states. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Similar to the ART state ST9, the pseudo-bonus state enables the establishment of the first bell winning when any of the winning numbers "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, and if the winning role that enables the establishment of the promotion replay winning that promotes the game mode to the 1st RT mode or the 2nd RT mode is won, the promotion replay winning can be established. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the winning combination that enables the establishment of the fall replay winning that causes the game mode to fall to the normal mode or the first RT mode is won, the establishment of the falling replay winning can be avoided. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. That is, the pseudo-bonus state basically proceeds in the situation where the game mode is the second RT mode as in the ART state ST9, and at the same time, any one of "1" to "3" is performed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). When the winning number is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Therefore, in the pseudo-bonus state, the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is the same as that in the ART state ST9. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and although the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number between the pseudo bonus state and the ART state ST9 is slightly different, the configuration may be substantially the same, or the configuration may be significantly different. Good.

The pseudo-bonus state occurs on condition that it is in the advantageous section SC2 as in the ART state ST9, and ends when the remaining number of continuous games is exhausted. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won, so that the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed after the end of the pseudo-bonus state. In the situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, such as the present precursor state ST6 or the preparation state ST8, and the situation in which the ART state ST9 is set, the transition to the pseudo bonus state does not occur. Hereinafter, the processing configuration related to the pseudo bonus state will be described.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo-bonus generation management process is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In a situation where "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4801: YES), "4" to "8", "15", "" in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). When the winning number of "16" is set (step S4802: YES), the transition lottery process of the pseudo-bonus state is executed. That is, the transition lottery process in the pseudo-bonus state is executed on condition that it is in the advantageous section SC2. Further, the transition lottery process of the pseudo-bonus state is executed when a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process, first, the pseudo-bonus transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4803). In this case, the pseudo-bonus transition table is set so that the winning number having a lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S4804). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. Transition to the pseudo-bonus state In the lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done. Then, by collating the random number acquired in step S4804 with the pseudo-bonus transition table read in step S4803, it is determined whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won (step S4805). When the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won (step S4805: YES), "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4806). The pseudo-bonus winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won.

Next, the pseudo-bonus management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. The pseudo-bonus management process is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped.

When "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4901: YES), the bonus precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "5" as a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the bonus precursor state. "(Step S4902). By setting a value in the bonus precursor counter, the game state becomes the bonus precursor state. The value set in the bonus precursor counter is deducted by 1 each time one game is newly executed, and when the value of the bonus precursor counter becomes "0", the bonus preparation state is entered. In addition, a bonus precursor start command indicating that the bonus precursor state has been reached is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4903). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus precursor start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the bonus precursor state is executed.

When the value of the bonus precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4904: YES), the value of the bonus precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4905). Then, when the value of the bonus precursor counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4906: YES), "1" is set in the bonus preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4907). By setting "1" to the bonus preparation flag, the game state becomes the bonus preparation state. In addition, a bonus preparation start command indicating that the bonus preparation state has been reached is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4908). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus preparation start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the bonus preparation state is executed.

When "1" is set in the bonus preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4909: YES), it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning is established in this game (step S4910). When the second RT replay winning is established (step S4910: YES), it means that the transition from the bonus preparation state to the pseudo bonus state has occurred, so the pseudo bonus start process is executed (step S4911). .. After that, a pseudo-bonus start command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state has been reached is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4912). When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state is executed. In addition, information on the number of initial continuous games and the number of transition condition games determined in the pseudo-bonus start process described later is set in the pseudo-bonus start command. Further, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state (step S4913: YES), the pseudo-bonus progress process is executed (step S4914).

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus start process of step S4911.

First, a process for determining the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state this time is executed. Specifically, the initial continuous game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5001). Only one type of initial continuous game number table is prepared regardless of the set values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus precursor state this time. In the initial continuous game number table, a plurality of types of initial continuous game numbers are set as the continuous game number at the start of the pseudo-bonus state. FIG. 98A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial continuous game number table. As shown in FIG. 98A, 33 games, 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the initial continuous game number table. Further, in the initial continuous game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 50%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 30%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 10%. , The selection probability of 50 games is set to 10%.

Here, in the pseudo-bonus state, the first 25 games correspond to the execution period of the pre-branch effect, and in the pre-branch effect, the image display device 63 displays a moving image according to a predetermined story. Then, the execution period of the branch effect occurs after the execution period of the pre-branch effect ends. The execution period of the branch effect is set to 8 games, and as the branch effect, the image display device 63 executes an effect indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo-bonus state. Regarding the branching effect, specifically, a video display is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other, and when the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, the video display in which the ally character wins the enemy character is performed. If the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, a moving image is displayed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and if the notification of the presence or absence of the transition to the ART state ST9 is carried over to the branch effect of the next execution time. A moving image is displayed in which the ally character and the enemy character are drawn.

When 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the execution period of the branch effect occurs once after the execution period of the pre-branch effect ends, and when 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the branch occurs. If the execution period of the branch effect occurs twice after the execution period of the previous effect ends and 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the branch effect is performed after the execution period of the pre-branch effect ends. The execution period occurs three times. The maximum number of occurrences of the branch effect execution period in the pseudo-bonus state is three. Therefore, when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of occurrences of the branch effect execution period even if the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state. Does not change. On the other hand, when 33 games or 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, if the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the total is limited to 3 times. As a result, the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect can be increased.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5002). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for the number of initial continuous games, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

By collating the random number acquired in step S5002 with the initial continuation game number table read in step S5001, the initial continuation game number in the pseudo bonus state of this time is selected, and the selected initial continuation game number is mainly used. It is set in the continuous game number counter 131 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S5003). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the continuous game number counter 131 in addition to the ART game number counter 121. The number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state is set in the continuous game number counter 131. The main MPU 72 specifies whether or not it is in the pseudo-bonus state by checking the continuous game number counter 131, and also specifies the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state.

Next, a process for determining the number of transition condition games is executed. The number of transition condition games is the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state required to win the transition to the ART state ST9 in this pseudo-bonus state. That is, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo-bonus state.

Specifically, as a process for determining the number of transition condition games, first, the transition condition game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5004). Only one type of transition condition game number table is prepared regardless of the set values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus precursor state this time. In the transition condition game number table, a plurality of types of transition condition games are set. FIG. 98B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition game number table. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), 33 games, 41 games, and 49 games are set as the number of transition condition games in the transition condition game number table. Further, in the transition condition game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 5%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 85%. ..

Here, all of these transition condition games match the number of initial continuation games set in the initial continuation game number table as shown in FIG. 98 (a). In addition, 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the initial continuous game number table, and the 50 games are the number of games larger than any of the transition condition games set in the transition condition game number table. There is. As described above, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo-bonus state. Therefore, when 33 games are selected as the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 41 games, 49 games, or 50 games are selected as the initial continuous games, and the number of transition condition games is set. When 41 games are selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, and when 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games, the initial The transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 50 games are selected as the number of continuous games.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5005). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. Transition condition In the lottery process for the number of games, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

By collating the random number acquired in step S5005 with the transition condition game number table read in step S5004, the number of transition condition games in the pseudo-bonus state this time is selected, and the selected number of transition condition games is mainly used. The transition condition game number counter 132 provided in the side RAM 74 is set (step S5006). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the transition condition game number counter 132 is provided in the main RAM 74. The number of remaining transition condition games is set in the transition condition game number counter 132. Each time one game is exhausted in the pseudo-bonus state, the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 is subtracted by 1, and the remaining number of transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 is continued for the rest of the pseudo-bonus state. When the number of games is exceeded, the transition to the ART state ST9 will be confirmed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state stored in the continuous game number counter 131 exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step). S5007). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5007, "1" is set in the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5008). The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

Next, the game start processing during the pseudo-bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 100. The game start process during the pseudo-bonus is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

When the winning numbers of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S5101: YES), the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If is not set (step S5102: NO), the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is executed. In the additional lottery process, first, the first additional table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5103). In this case, the first additional table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning, and the winning number with the lower winning probability expects the number of additional games at the time of winning. The first addition table is set so that the value increases.

FIG. 101A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), the first additional table has a 90 probability of not being an additional winning when the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "4" or "5". The percentage is set so that the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games is selected is 10%, and the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "6" or "7". In some cases, the probability of not winning the additional game is 70%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 8 games is 25%, and the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 22 games is 5%. If the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 17) is "8", the probability of not winning the additional game is 10%, and the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 8 games is 70. The percentage is set so that the probability that the number of additional games of 52 games, the number of additional games of 102 games, the number of additional games of 202 games, and the number of additional games of 302 games are selected is 5%, respectively. When the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) is "15" or "16", the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games is selected is 50%, and the number of additional games of 22 games is 32. The probability that the number of additional games of the game, the number of additional games of 52 games, and the number of additional games of 102 games will be selected is 5%, respectively, and the probability that the number of additional games of 202 games and the number of additional games of 302 games will be selected, respectively. It is set to be 15%.

As described above, 8 games or 22 games or more are set as the number of additional games. When the number of additional games of 22 games or more is selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at that time. In other words, while the minimum number of initial continuous games is 33 games, the maximum number of transition condition games is 49 games, so if 22 or more games are added, the remaining pseudo-bonus state remains. This is because the number of continuous games will surely exceed the number of remaining transition condition games.

On the other hand, even if the number of additional games of 8 games is selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be confirmed. For example, if 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state even if 8 games are added twice in a situation where the initial number of continuous games is 33 games. Does not exceed the number of remaining transitional games. In addition, when 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, even if 8 games are added once in a situation where the initial number of continuous games is 41 games, the remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state The number does not exceed the number of remaining transitional game games. Under such circumstances, the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be confirmed. Since only 8 games are set as the number of additional games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed even if the number of additional games occurs. In this case, since it is only necessary to add the execution period of the branch effect in a mode that does not correspond to the transition to the ART state ST9, it becomes easy to adjust the effect when the number of additional games occurs.

Returning to the description of the game start processing (FIG. 100) during the pseudo bonus, after reading the first addition table in step S5103, the random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5104). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l Get the random number written in the register. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

When any number of additional games is selected as a result of collating the random number acquired in step S5104 with respect to the first additional game read in step S5103 (step S5105: YES), it is stored in the continuous game number counter 131. Whether or not the sum of the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state and the number of additional games selected this time is larger than the number of remaining transition condition games stored in the transition condition game counter 132. Determine (step S5106). If a negative determination is made in step S5106, it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed yet, so the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the continuous game number counter 131 (step S5107). .. In this case, since it means that the addition of 8 games has occurred in a situation where the number of occurrences of the branch effect execution period is sufficient, the branch effect execution period is added once.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106, it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed. In this case, "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S5108). After that, the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S5109). In other words, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of additional games, including the number of additional games that triggered the transition confirmation, is not the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo bonus state, but the rest of the ART state ST9. Is added as the number of continuous games. This makes it possible to make it easier for the ART state ST9 to continue for a long time.

On the other hand, when "1" is already set in the ART winning flag (step S5102: YES), the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. In the additional lottery process, first, the second additional table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of this combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5110). In this case, the second additional table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning, and the winning number with the lower winning probability expects the number of additional games at the time of winning. The second addition table is set so that the value increases.

FIG. 101B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), the second additional table has a 90 probability of not being an additional winning when the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "4" or "5". The percentage is set so that the probability that the number of additional games of 12 games is selected is 10%, and the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "6" or "7". In some cases, the probability of not winning the additional game is 70%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 12 games is 10%, the number of additional games of 22 games, the number of additional games of 32 games, and the number of additional games of 52 games. And 102 games are added so that the probability that the number of additional games is selected is 5%, respectively, and if the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "8", the additional games are added. The probability of not winning is 10%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 12 games is 50%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 22 games is 10%, the number of additional games of 32 games and 52 games. The probability that the number of additional games will be selected is 5%, the probability that the number of additional games of 102 games will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the number of additional games of 202 games and the number of additional games of 302 games will be selected. Each is set to 5%, and if the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is "15" or "16", the number of additional games of 22 games is selected. The probability is 30%, the probability that the number of additional games of 32 games and the number of additional games of 52 games are selected is 10%, the probability that the number of additional games of 102 games is selected is 20%, and the probability of selecting 202 games is added. The probability that the number of games and the number of additional games of 302 games are selected is set to be 15%, respectively.

When the second additional table is selected as described above, the probability of winning the additional table is the same as when the first additional table is selected. However, the expected value of the number of additional games in the case of winning the additional game is set so that the second additional table is larger than the first additional table. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. Further, in the first additional table, the minimum number of additional games is 8 games, whereas in the second additional table, the minimum number of additional games is 12 games. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state.

Returning to the description of the game start processing (FIG. 100) during the pseudo bonus, after reading the second addition table in step S511, the random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5111). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process for the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the random number circuits corresponding to the current random number pointers among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l correspond to the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l. Acquires the random number written in the latch register. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

When any number of additional games is selected as a result of collating the random numbers acquired in step S5111 against the second additional table read in step S5110 (step S5112: YES), the number of ART games in the main RAM 74. The value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the counter 121 (step S5113).

When the process of step S5107 is executed, the process of step S5109 is executed, or the process of step S5113 is executed, an additional generation command indicating that the number of games has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step). S5114). Information on the number of additional games selected this time is set in the addition generation command, and the number of additional games this time is added to either the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state or the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Information indicating whether the target has been set is set. When the production side MPU 92 receives the addition generation command, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the production according to the mode corresponding to the current addition. This will be described in detail later.

Next, the pseudo-bonus progress process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102.

The pseudo-bonus progress process is executed in step S4914 in the pseudo-bonus management process (FIG. 96), and the pseudo-bonus management process is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game are stopped. To. That is, the situation in which the pseudo-bonus progress process is executed is a situation in which one game is digested in the pseudo-bonus state. Therefore, first, the value of the continuous game number counter 131 of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S5201), and then the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S5202).

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 131 is "0" (step S5203). When a positive determination is made in step S5203, it means that it is the end timing of the pseudo bonus state. In this case, by determining whether or not the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state (step S5204). ..

When "1" is set in the ART winning flag (step S5204: YES), the ART start process is executed (step S5205). In the ART start process, the information of the main RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process of step S1707 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state becomes the ART state ST9. Further, in the ART start processing, information on 50 games, which is the number of started games in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

After that, an ART start command indicating that the ART state ST9 is started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S5206). When the effect MPU 92 receives the ART start command, the ART start effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and the ART effect that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the ART state ST9. The table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. First, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART start effect table, and then the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device are used. At 63, the ART start effect is first executed, and then the ART effect is executed. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, the effect side MPU 92 adds the information of 50 games, which is the number of start games of the ART state ST9, to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 displays 50 games as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

Here, in the pseudo-bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 is added to the establishment of the condition for adding the number of games, so that the remaining ART state ST9 remains. The number of continuous games will be added. On the other hand, the number of additional games is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 in the effect side MPU 92. Then, at the start timing of the ART state ST9, the number of games added to the stock game number counter 127 is not shifted to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. Therefore, the number of games added in the situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is not notified to the player at the start of the ART state ST9, and at the timing in the middle of the ART state ST9. Notify the player. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the addition of the number of games is notified in the middle of the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the ART winning flag (step S5204: NO), it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. In this case, a pseudo-bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state has ended without the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S5207). When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus end command, it is possible to execute the bonus end production table that enables the execution of the production corresponding to the termination of the pseudo-bonus state and the normal production corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The normal effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. First, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the bonus end effect table, and then the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device are used. At 63, the bonus end effect is first executed, and then the normal effect is executed.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 103, how the handling of the number of additional games changes according to the situation of the ART winning flag in the pseudo-bonus state will be described. FIG. 103 (a) shows the execution period of the pseudo-bonus state, FIG. 103 (b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 103 (c) shows the state of the ART winning flag, and FIG. 103 (d) shows the state of the ART winning flag. The addition occurrence timing is shown, FIG. 103 (e) shows the addition timing of the main RAM 74 to the continuous game number counter 131, and FIG. 103 (f) shows the addition timing of the main RAM 74 to the ART game number counter 121.

First, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t1, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103 (a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, the number of initial continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103 (e) at the timing of t1. However, since the number of the initial continuous games is equal to or less than the number of transition condition games, "1" is not set in the ART winning flag at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as shown in FIG. 103 (c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the timing of t2 and the timing of t3, which are in the middle of executing the pseudo-bonus state, are added to the occurrence timing. However, at any of these timings, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103 (e), the number of games added to the continuous game number counter 131 is added at each of the timing of t2 and the timing of t3. Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), "1" is not set in the ART winning flag at either the timing of t2 and the timing of t3.

After that, at the timing of t4, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103 (a). In this case, since "1" is not set in the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 103 (b).

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t5, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103 (a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, the number of initial continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103 (e) at the timing of t5. However, since the number of the initial continuous games is equal to or less than the number of transition condition games, "1" is not set in the ART winning flag at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as shown in FIG. 103 (c).

After that, at the timing of t6 during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the additional occurrence timing is set as shown in FIG. 103 (d). By adding the number of additional games to the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state, the number of remaining continuous games exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t6, “1” is set in the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 103 (c), and the number of additional games this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103 (f). Will be done.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the additional generation timing is reached. In this case, since "1" is already set in the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the number of additional games this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103 (f). To.

After that, at the timing of t8, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103 (a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103 (b).

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the pseudo bonus state is started will be described.

At the timing of t9, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103 (a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, the number of initial continuous games is added to the continuous game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103 (e) at the timing of t9. In this case, the number of the initial continuous games exceeds the number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t9, “1” is set in the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 103 (c).

After that, each of the timing of t10 and the timing of t11 becomes the additional generation timing as shown in FIG. 103 (d). In this case, since "1" is already set in the ART winning flag as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the number of additional games at each of these timings is set in the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103 (f). Will be added.

After that, at the timing of t12, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103 (a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the state shifts to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103 (b).

Next, the effect control process for the pseudo bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. The effect control process for the pseudo-bonus is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the pseudo-bonus state.

When the pseudo bonus start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S5301: YES), the start setting process of the pre-branch effect is executed (step S5302). In the pre-branch effect start setting process, the pre-branch effect table that enables execution of the pre-branch effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The pre-branch effect table is set with information that enables execution of the pre-branch effect that continues for 25 games. By controlling the time of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the pre-branch effect table, the pre-branch effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 for 25 games.

After that, the number of occurrences of the branch effect generated in this pseudo-bonus state is grasped from the information of the number of initial continuous games set in the pseudo bonus start command, and the information on the number of occurrences of the grasped branch effect is transmitted to the effect side RAM 94. It is set in the provided branch effect counter (step S5303). The effect side MPU 92 executes the branch effect until the value of the branch effect counter becomes "0" after the end of the pre-branch effect.

After that, by determining whether the number of initial continuation games set in the pseudo-bonus start command exceeds the number of transition condition games also set in the pseudo-bonus start command, ART is performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus state. It is determined whether or not the transition to the state ST9 is confirmed (step S5304). If a negative determination is made in step S5304, the setting process of the branch effect for non-winning ART is executed (step S5305). In the setting process, if the number of branch effects currently scheduled to be executed is one, the defeat effect table in which the result of the branch effect is the defeat of the ally character is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, after the effect side MPU 92 finishes the effect execution control by the pre-branch effect table, the effect side MPU 92 performs the effect execution control by the defeat effect table. In addition, in the setting process, if the number of branch effects currently scheduled to be executed is a plurality of times, the draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution times before the last inning is a draw is only for the number of the execution times. It is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94, and the defeat production table in which the result of the final branching effect is the defeat of the ally character is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. In this case, after the effect side MPU 92 finishes the effect execution control by the pre-branch effect table, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect execution control by the draw effect table for a few minutes stored in the effect side RAM 94. The execution of the production is controlled by the defeat production table.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the setting process of the branch effect for winning the ART is executed (step S5306). The case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo bonus state is when any of 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games is selected as the initial number of continuous games, and if it is 41 games, it branches. The effect is executed twice, and if it is 49 games or 50 games, the branch effect is executed three times. That is, when the setting process of the branch effect for winning the ART is executed, the branch effect is executed twice or more. In this case, in the setting process, the draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution times before the final time is a draw is read from the effect side ROM 93 for the number of the execution times and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The victory effect table in which the result of the final branch effect is the victory of the ally character is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. In this case, after the effect side MPU 92 finishes the effect execution control by the pre-branch effect table, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect execution control by the draw effect table for a few minutes stored in the effect side RAM 94. The execution control of the production is performed by the victory production table.

After that, "1" is set in the ART winning flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5307). The ART winning flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in this pseudo-bonus state.

In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, when a new game is executed and the update timing of the pre-branch effect is reached (step S5308: YES), the update setting process of the pre-branch effect is executed (step S5309). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the pre-branch effect table, which is currently the reference target, according to a new start of one game is executed. As a result, the execution content of the pre-branch effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the pre-branch effect. Further, in the update setting process, when the end timing of the pre-branch effect is reached, the execution control of the effect is started according to any kind of branch effect table set as the next reference target in the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the branching effect of the first execution time is started.

In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, when the addition generation command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S5310: YES), when "1" is not set in the ART winning flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5311). : NO), ART in this game by determining whether or not the information indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is to be added is set in the addition generation command received this time. It is determined whether or not the transition to the state ST9 is confirmed (step S5312).

If a negative determination is made in step S5312, the adjustment process of the branch effect for non-winning ART is executed (step S5313). When the number of games is added but the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed, it means that the number of games added this time is eight. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch effect for non-winning ART, adjustment is made so that one execution time of the branch effect that is the draw result is added before the execution time of the branch effect that is the defeat result. Specifically, if it is a stage before the execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is performed, the draw effect table is set to the effect side RAM 94 so as to be executed before the execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is performed. Remember. In addition, if the execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is being performed, the content of the defeat effect table is corrected to the content that will be the final draw result, and the defeat effect table is changed so that it will be executed after that. It is stored in the production side RAM 94.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5312, the adjustment process of the branch effect for winning the ART is executed (step S5314). When the number of games is added and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of added games this time is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch effect for winning the ART, the content of the branch effect that results in the defeat is changed to the content of the branch effect that results in the victory. Specifically, if it is a stage before the execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is performed, the defeat effect table is changed to the victory effect table. In addition, if the execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is being performed, the content of the defeat effect table is corrected to the content that finally results in the victory. After that, "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S5315), and the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the addition generation command received this time is set to the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94. Is added to (step S5316).

When the addition generation command is received in the situation where "1" is set in the ART winning flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S5311. In this case, the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional game generated command received this time is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5316).

In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, when a new game is executed and the branch effect update timing is reached (step S5317: YES), the branch effect update setting process is executed (step S5318). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the branch effect table (draw effect table, defeat effect table, or victory effect table) currently being referred to is executed according to a new start of one game. .. As a result, the execution content of the branch effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the branch effect. Further, in the update setting process, when the end timing of the branch effect of one execution time is reached and the execution time of the branch effect to be executed remains, it is set as the next reference target in the effect side RAM 94. The execution control of the effect is started according to any kind of branch effect table.

A state in which the pre-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo-bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 105. FIG. 105 (a) shows the execution period of the pseudo-bonus state, FIG. 105 (b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, and FIG. 105 (c) shows the execution period of the pre-branch effect. Shows the execution period of the branch effect, FIG. 105 (e) shows the timing at which the effect side MPU 92 receives the additional generation command, and FIG. 105 (f) shows the additional timing of one execution time of the branch effect. g) indicates the correction timing of the content of the branch effect.

First, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t1, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of scheduled executions of the branch effect in this pseudo-bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, so that the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at the start timing. Further, at the timing of t1, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (e), an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 at the timing of t2, which is the situation where the pre-branch effect is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games occurs, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 105 (f), the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added once with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the number of scheduled executions of the branch effect is two.

After that, at the timing of t3, the pre-branch effect ends as shown in FIG. 105 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), one execution of the branch effect resulting in a draw is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the player is defeated from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. One execution of the resulting branch effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 105A, the pseudo-bonus state ends at the timing of t6 when the branching effect resulting in the defeat ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been determined, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 105 (b).

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed while the pre-branch effect is being executed will be described.

At the timing of t7, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of scheduled executions of the branch effect in this pseudo-bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, so that the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at the start timing. Further, at the timing of t7, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (e), an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 at the timing of t8, which is the situation where the pre-branch effect is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is 22 games. Therefore, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games due to the occurrence of the number of additional games. Therefore, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the content of the branching effect corresponding to the defeat result scheduled to be executed is corrected to the victory result.

After that, at the timing of t9, the pre-branch effect ends as shown in FIG. 105 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), one execution of the branching effect, which is the winning result, is executed from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. As shown in FIG. 105A, the pseudo-bonus state ends at the timing of t10 when the branching effect that results in the victory ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed as shown in FIG. 105 (b).

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed while the branching effect resulting in the defeat is being executed will be described.

At the timing of t11, the pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105 (a). In addition, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of scheduled executions of the branch effect in this pseudo-bonus state is one at this point. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, so that the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at the start timing. Further, at the timing of t11, the pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105 (c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (e), an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 at the timing of t12, which is the situation where the pre-branch effect is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games occurs, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 105 (f), the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added once with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the number of scheduled executions of the branch effect is two.

After that, at the timing of t13, the pre-branch effect ends as shown in FIG. 105 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), one execution of the branch effect resulting in a draw is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, and then the branch effect resulting in defeat is executed at the timing of t15. One execution round is started.

As shown in FIG. 105 (e), an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 at the timing of t16, which is the situation in which the branching effect resulting in the defeat is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional generation command is eight games. Therefore, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of remaining transition condition games due to the occurrence of the number of additional games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105 (g) at the timing of the t16, the content of the branching effect corresponding to the currently executed defeat result is corrected to the victory result.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the branching effect corresponding to the winning result ends. At the timing of t17, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105 (a). In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed as shown in FIG. 105 (b).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the total number of games given to the player in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the number of transition condition games is determined by lottery. As a result, in the case of a pseudo-bonus state, it is expected that a small number of transition condition games will be selected, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the pseudo-bonus state is started, the initial number of continuous games is determined by lottery. Then, when the number of initial continuous games determined by the lottery exceeds the number of transition condition games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

The number of additional games can be given in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. As a result, even if the total number of games given to the player at the stage when the pseudo-bonus state is started does not exceed the number of transition condition games, the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state to shift. It is possible that the number of conditional games will be exceeded. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the pseudo-bonus state.

If the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state but does not exceed the number of transition condition games, the number of additional games is consumed in the pseudo-bonus state. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state increases.

If the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state and the number of transition condition games is exceeded, the number of additional games is consumed in the ART state ST9 generated after the end of the pseudo-bonus state. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

If the number of additional games is given in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state, the number of additional games is consumed in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state increases and the game in the pseudo-bonus state is delayed even though the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed. It will be possible.

Until the total number of games given to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state, and the total number of games given to the player is the number of transition condition games. After that, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games in a manner suitable for each situation. Further, the earlier the timing when the number of transition condition games is exceeded, the longer the period during which the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed can be secured in the manner corresponding to the ART state ST9.

Even if the number of transition condition games is exceeded when the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined, the number of initial continuous games is consumed in the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, even in a situation where it is confirmed that the ART state ST9 will occur after the end of the pseudo-bonus state, it is possible to digest the game to some extent in the pseudo-bonus state.

The number of games given to the player in the pseudo-bonus state is replaced with the configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games given to the player in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games. May be configured such that the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games exceeds the transition condition.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined by lottery, the initial continuous games may be a fixed number of games. In this case, depending on the lottery result of the number of transition condition games, the fixed number of games may or may not exceed the number of transition condition games. Further, the fixed number of games may be configured so as not to exceed the number of transition condition games. In this case, the number of games given to the player does not exceed the number of transition condition games unless the number of additional games is given in the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, when the number of additional games is given in the pseudo-bonus state and the number of games given to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games, the number of additional games is ART. Instead of the configuration digested in the state ST9, the configuration may be digested in the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, the pseudo-bonus state can be continued for a long time.

Further, the number of additional games given when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state is added to the stock game number counter 127 so that the player is not notified, but at least ART. It may be configured to be notified by the start timing of the state ST9. For example, in a game in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state, it is notified that the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and the number of additional games is granted each time the number of additional games is granted in the pseudo-bonus state. A notification indicating that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 has increased may be executed in the game. In addition, when the pseudo-bonus state ends and the ART state ST9 is started, although it is not notified in the game to which the number of additional games is given, the additional games in the pseudo-bonus state are added to the initial number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In a state where the number of games is added, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 may be notified.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus state, after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, instead of the configuration that is more advantageous for the player in terms of granting the number of additional games than before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, any of the above. Even in this case, the advantages regarding the granting of the number of additional games may be the same or substantially the same, and the time before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed is higher than the time after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. The configuration may be advantageous for the player in terms of granting the number of additional games.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the additional table executed in the additional lottery process for the number of games is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

106 (a) to 106 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the addition tables 141 to 144 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the additional tables 141 to 144 are the first additional table 141 shown in FIG. 106 (a), the second additional table 142 shown in FIG. 106 (b), and the third additional table shown in FIG. 106 (c). 143 and the fourth additional table 144 shown in FIG. 106 (d) are available on the main MPU 72. Although the details will be described later, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are not stored in the main ROM 73 as they are, but the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 can be created. The fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are stored in advance in the main ROM 73.

The first additional table 141 is referred to when the additional lottery process is executed in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. The second additional table 142 is referred to when the additional lottery process is executed in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. The third addition table 143 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed as a direct addition in the situation where the A loop and the B loop are not executed in the ART state ST9. The fourth addition table 144 is referred to when the addition lottery process is executed as a direct addition in the situation where the A loop or the B loop is executed in the ART state ST9.

As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (d), the numerical information of the additional index is set in each of the first additional table 141, the second additional table 142, the third additional table 143, and the fourth additional table 144. The set data area is set, and the number of winning random numbers is set according to the numerical information of the additional index for each group of winning numbers of "4" to "8", "15", and "16". The data area is set. Specifically, for these data areas, the values of "0" to "8" are set in serial numbers as the numerical information of the additional index. In this case, one byte of data is allocated to each of the data areas in which the numerical information of the additional index is set. That is, nine data areas of "0" to "8" are set as the numerical information of the additional index in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, but all of the nine data areas are set. It is one byte of data.

The numerical information of the additional index is numerical information for specifying the actual number of additional games by the main MPU 72. The index correspondence table 145 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as data for specifying the actual number of additional games with respect to the numerical information of the additional index. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index correspondence table 145. The numerical information of the additional index of "0" corresponds to the fact that the number of additional games is 0, that is, the result of the additional lottery is off. The numerical information of the additional index of "1" corresponds to the number of additional games being eight games. The numerical information of the additional index of "2" corresponds to the number of additional games being 12 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "3" corresponds to the number of additional games being 22 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "4" corresponds to the number of additional games being 32 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "5" corresponds to the number of additional games being 52 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "6" corresponds to the number of additional games being 102 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "7" corresponds to the number of additional games being 202 games. The numerical information of the additional index of "8" corresponds to the number of additional games being 302 games.

As described above, instead of setting the numerical information of the number of additional games as it is in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of the additional index is set, and the numerical value of the additional index is set using the index correspondence table 145. By deriving the numerical information of the number of additional games from the information, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. That is, the numerical information of the number of additional games is 302 games at the maximum, and 9 bits are required to represent the numerical information in binary, and 2 bytes are required in byte units. Then, in order to standardize the processing in the addition processing of the number of additional games, if the data capacity of the data area in which the numerical information of the number of additional games is set is made constant, the numerical information of the maximum number of additional games is obtained. Therefore, the data capacity of the data area in which the numerical information of the number of additional games is set is 2 bytes each. In this case, assuming that the numerical information of the number of additional games is set as it is in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, 72 bytes are required for 2 bytes × 9 × 4. On the other hand, in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of the additional index, which is a data capacity of 1 byte, is set, and the numerical information of the actual number of additional games is derived from the numerical information of the additional index. When using the index-compatible table 145 for the purpose, 36 bytes are required as the data capacity for setting the numerical information of the additional index in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. At the same time, in the index correspondence table 145, 27 bytes are required for 1 byte × 9 + 2 bytes × 9, which is 63 bytes in total. This 63 bytes has a data capacity smaller than 72 bytes when the numerical information of the number of additional games is set as it is in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 145.

As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (d), details of the data area in which the number of winning random numbers is set in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are "4" to "8", The winning numbers of "15" and "16" are the first group including the winning numbers of "4" and "5", the second group including the winning numbers of "6" and "7", and "8". The third group includes the winning numbers of "15" and "16", and the fourth group includes the winning numbers of "15" and "16". Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d of 16-bit random numbers are used in the additional lottery process. Then, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each additional index to be won in the first group and the numerical information of each additional index in the second group. The number of winning random numbers to win, the number of winning random numbers to win the numerical information of each additional index in the 3rd group, and the numerical information of each additional index to win in the 4th group The number of winning random numbers for this is set.

Here, the types of numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers equal to or more than 1 is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the first additional table 141, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "1", "6" to "8" includes the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers that is 1 or more is set in any of the above, the numerical information of the additional index of "2" to "5" is the winning random number in any of the first to fourth groups. The number is set to 0. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the second additional table 142, the number of winning random numbers that is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups is set in the numerical information of the additional index other than "2". On the other hand, in the numerical information of the additional index of "2", the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), in the third additional table 143, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "2" to "4" is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers is set, the number of winning random numbers is 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional indexes of "1", "5" to "8". It is set to individual. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), in the fourth additional table 144, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "6" to "8" includes the winning random numbers of 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number is set, the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "5".

As described above, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, when the numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 exists in any of the first to fourth groups. Even so, in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, since the numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as the numerical information of the additional index, the first -The index-compatible table 145 can be commonly used in the fourth addition tables 141 to 144. That is, when the numerical information of the non-common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 corresponds to each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common additional index is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as described above, one type of index compatible table 145 is shared in common. It will be possible to use it. As a result, the storage capacity required for the index-compatible table 145 can be suppressed, and the common index-compatible table 145 is read out regardless of which of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 is used. Since it may be used, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index-corresponding table 145.

In the addition lottery process, the table to be referred to among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is expanded to the main RAM 74, but the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are expanded to the main ROM 73. Is not stored as it is, but is stored as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. In each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, as described above, there is numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. There is. Therefore, in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 does not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers.

The first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 will be described in detail below. 108 (a) to 108 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

The first compressed data 146 is data for creating the first additional table 141, the second compressed data 147 is data for creating the second additional table 142, and the third compressed data 148 is the third additional table. It is the data for creating 143, and the 4th compressed data 149 is the data for creating the 4th addition table 144. As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (d), header data and actual data are set in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

In the header data, information indicating which additional index numerical information the actual data set in the corresponding compressed data 146 to 149 corresponds to is set. Further, in the actual data, the number of winning random numbers of one or more is set in any of the first to fourth groups. The winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups for the numerical information of the additional index. Information on the number of is set. In this case, as actual data, information on the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of a plurality of additional indexes is set, but each of these information is arranged in ascending order when viewed from the numerical information of the additional index. There is.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), 2-byte header data is set as the start data of the first compressed data 146, and the actual data exists in the first compressed data 146 in the header data. "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" are set as the information that enables the numerical information of the additional index to be specified. In addition, five unit actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data is in the numerical information of the additional index of "0" in the first additional table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "1" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "6" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "7" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "8" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When the additional lottery process is executed using the first additional table 141, the first additional table 141 is added to the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the first compressed data 146 read from the main ROM 73. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is written to the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read out. Then, in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the additional index, each unit actual data arranged in the actual data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, as for the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8", the information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. It becomes. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers corresponds to 0 for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information not set in the header data. Set the information to be set. As a result, the first addition table 141 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the first compressed data 146.

Regarding the second compressed data 147, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), 2-byte header data is set as the start data, and the actual data exists in the second compressed data 147 in the header data. "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" are set as the information that enables the numerical information of the additional index to be specified. .. In addition, eight unit actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data is in the numerical information of the additional index of "0" in the second additional table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "2" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "3" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "4" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "5" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the sixth unit actual data set following the fifth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "6" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the seventh unit actual data set following the sixth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "7" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the eighth unit actual data set following the seventh unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "8" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When the additional lottery process is executed using the second additional table 142, the second additional table 142 is added to the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the second compressed data 147 read from the main ROM 73. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is written to the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read out. Then, in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the additional index, each unit actual data arranged in the actual data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" can be obtained from the first to fourth groups, respectively. The information on the number of winning random numbers is set. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers corresponds to 0 for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information not set in the header data. Set the information to be set. As a result, the second additional table 142 is expanded in the main RAM 74 by using the second compressed data 147.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), 2-byte header data is set as the head data of the third compressed data 148, and the actual data exists in the third compressed data 148 in the header data. "0", "2", "3", and "4" are set as the information that enables the numerical information of the additional index to be specified. In addition, four unit actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data is in the numerical information of the additional index of "0" in the third additional table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "2" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "3" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "4" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When the additional lottery process is executed using the third additional table 143, the third additional table 143 is added to the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the third compressed data 148 read from the main ROM 73. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is written to the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read out. Then, in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the additional index, each unit actual data arranged in the actual data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, as for the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "2", "3", and "4", the information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers corresponds to 0 for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information not set in the header data. Set the information to be set. As a result, the third addition table 143 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the third compressed data 148.

Regarding the fourth compressed data 149, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), 2-byte header data is set as the start data, and the actual data exists in the fourth compressed data 149 in the header data. "6", "7", and "8" are set as the information that enables the numerical information of the additional index to be specified. In addition, three unit actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data is in the numerical information of the additional index of "6" in the fourth additional table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "7" in the fourth addition table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional index of "8" in the fourth addition table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When the additional lottery process is executed using the fourth additional table 144, the fourth additional table 144 is added to the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the fourth compressed data 149 read from the main ROM 73. Deploy. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is written to the main RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read out. Then, in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the additional index, each unit actual data arranged in the actual data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, as for the numerical information of the additional indexes of "6", "7", and "8", the information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups. After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers corresponds to 0 for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information not set in the header data. Set the information to be set. As a result, the fourth addition table 144 is expanded in the main RAM 74 using the fourth compressed data 149.

In the configuration where the random number used in the additional lottery process is 16 bits, the first is from the viewpoint of simplification of the process when specifying the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of each additional index in the additional lottery process. The data capacity of the data area in which the number of each winning random number is set in the fourth addition table 141 to 144 is set to 2 bytes, respectively. The first to fourth groups are set in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, and each of the first to fourth groups corresponds to the numerical information of the addition indexes of "0" to "8". Since the data representing the number of winning random numbers is set, the data capacity for specifying the information on the number of winning random numbers is 2 bytes × 9 in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. 72 bytes for 4 pieces. Further, numerical information of additional indexes of "0" to "8" is set in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, and each of these numerical information has a data capacity of 1 byte. Therefore, the data capacity of each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 is 72 bytes + 1 byte × 9, which is 81 bytes. On the other hand, the data capacity of the first compressed data 146 is 42 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the actual data of 2 bytes × 4 × 5, which is smaller than the data capacity of the first additional table 141. .. The data capacity of the second compressed data 147 is 66 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the actual data of 2 bytes × 4 × 8, which is smaller than the data capacity of the second addition table 142. Further, the data capacity of the third compressed data 148 is 34 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the 2 bytes × 4 × 4 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the third additional table 143. Further, the data capacity of the fourth compressed data 149 is 26 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the actual data of 2 bytes × 4 × 3, which is smaller than the data capacity of the 4th additional table 144. This makes it possible to use the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 while suppressing the required data capacity in the main ROM 73.

Next, the additional lottery process executed by using the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 109. The additional lottery process is executed after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed when one game is newly started, and before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

First, of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the compressed data 146 to 149 corresponding to the current gaming situation are read from the main ROM 73 (step S5401). After that, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is written to the main RAM 74 in ascending order (step S5402).

After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data of the compressed data 146 to 149 read in step S5401 is read, and the numerical information of the smallest value among the numerical information of the additional index is read in order, and in step S5401. Each unit real data arranged in the read compressed data 146 to 149 real data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main RAM 74 (step S5403). After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers corresponds to 0 for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information not set in the header data. Information is set (step S5404).

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5405). In the random number acquisition process, the updated 16-bit random numbers are acquired in the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d corresponding to the additional lottery process.

After that, the addition index acquisition process is executed (step S5406). FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the additional index. Among the first to fourth groups in the additional tables 141 to 144 expanded in the main RAM 74 in steps S5401 to S5404, the group corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the current combination is selected. Grasp (step S5501). After that, "9" corresponding to the maximum value of the numerical information of the added index is set in the repetition counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5502). Further, the value of the 16-bit random number acquired in step S5405 is set in the determination value counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5503).

After that, in the group grasped in step S5501 among the additional tables 141 to 144 expanded in the main RAM 74 in steps S5401 to S5404, the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the value of the repetition counter of the main RAM 74 is supported. The number of winning random numbers set is read out (step S5504). In this case, for example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", the number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the additional index of "8" is read, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5". The number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the additional index of "4" is read, and if the value of the repetition counter is "1", it is set corresponding to the numerical information of the additional index of "0". Read the number of winning random numbers. Then, the number of the grasped winning random numbers is added to the determination value counter of the main RAM 74 (step S5505).

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the determination value counter after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the 16-bit random number "65535" (step S5506). When a negative determination is made in step S5506, it means that the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter has not been won. In this case, the value of the repetition counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S5507), and the value of the repetition counter after the subtraction of 1 is not "0" (step S5508: NO), and after the subtraction of 1. The processing of steps S5504 to S5506 is executed for the value of the repetition counter in.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S5506, it means that the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter has been won. Therefore, the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the value of the current repetition counter is acquired (step S5509). For example, if the value of the repeat counter is "9", "8" is acquired as the numerical information of the additional index, and if the value of the repeat counter is "5", "4" is acquired as the numerical information of the additional index, and the process is repeated. If the value of the counter is "1", "0" is acquired as the numerical information of the additional index.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S5508, the affirmative judgment should be made in step S5506 at the timing when any of the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8" is originally selected. Instead, it is assumed that no affirmative determination is made in step S5506 in any of the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0" to "8", and a process for executing the abnormality notification is executed (step S5510). .. As a result, if there is an electrical noise or a defect in the set value of the additional table, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the problem.

Returning to the description of the additional lottery process (FIG. 109), after executing the additional index acquisition process in step S5406, the index correspondence table 145 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5407). After that, the information on the number of additional games corresponding to the information on the additional index acquired in step S5406 is read from the index corresponding table 145 (step S5408). Then, the information on the number of additional games read out is added to the counter currently being added (step S5409).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even if the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 is present in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 in any of the first to fourth groups. , The numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as the numerical information of the additional index in all of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. As a result, the index-corresponding table 145 can be commonly used in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. That is, when the numerical information of the non-common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 corresponds to each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common additional index is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as described above, one type of index compatible table 145 is shared in common. It will be possible to use it. As a result, the storage capacity required for the index-compatible table 145 can be suppressed, and the common index-compatible table 145 is read out regardless of which of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 is used. Since it may be used, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index-corresponding table 145.

In the addition lottery process, the table to be referred to among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is expanded to the main RAM 74, but the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are expanded to the main ROM 73. Is not stored as it is, but is stored as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. In each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, as described above, there is numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. There is. On the other hand, in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of such winning random numbers is set to 0 has data indicating the number of winning random numbers. Not. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the main ROM 73.

Even if there is a lottery table in which the number of winning random numbers is not set in the predetermined index value as described above, a configuration for sharing the index value among a plurality of lottery tables is added to the lottery process. It may be applied to the table group for other lottery instead of the table group for.

Further, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are not limited to the configuration stored in the main ROM 73 as the first to fourth compression data 146 to 149, and the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 4 The configuration may be such that 144 is stored in the main ROM 73 as it is.

Further, the data structure of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 is not limited to the above, and the specific data structure is arbitrary as long as the data can be compressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the random number acquisition process in the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process in the present embodiment.

In steps S5601 to S5608, the same processing as in steps S501 to S508 of the random number acquisition processing (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, when the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are the targets for acquiring random numbers, the updated random numbers are acquired by the corresponding dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

When the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are the targets for using random numbers (step S5607: NO), first, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S5609). The random number pointer is a counter for specifying which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used by the main MPU 72, and numerical information of "0" to "11" is displayed. It can be taken. When the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is the target for using the random number, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is the target for using the random number. When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is the target for using random numbers. When the random number pointer is "m", the third m + 1 shared random number circuit 101a-101l uses random numbers. It is a target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

When the value of the random number pointer after 1 addition exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S5610: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S5611). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is added by 1 each time the lottery process is used in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded, the value is reduced to the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to be used according to a predetermined order each time the lottery process is to be used. After 101l is sequentially changed and the shared random number circuit 101a-101l which is the last order is the target of use, the shared random number circuit 101a-101l which is the first order is the target of use again.

When a negative determination is made in step S5610 or when the process of step S5611 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information of random numbers is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 for starting the game is operated (step S5612).

After that, it is determined whether or not the random number to be acquired this time is a 16-bit random number (step S5613). That is, in the present embodiment, not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers may be acquired by using the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. When a negative determination is made in step S5613, it means that the random number to be acquired this time is an 8-bit random number, so the present random number acquisition process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5613, it is determined whether or not a 16-bit random number has been acquired (step S5614). If a negative determination is made in step S5614, the processes of steps S5609 to S5612 are executed again, so that the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that have already acquired the 8-bit random numbers to be acquired are in the following acquisition order. An 8-bit random number is additionally acquired from a certain shared random number circuit 101a-101l. As a result, a total of 16-bit random numbers have been acquired from the already acquired 8-bit random numbers and the newly acquired 8-bit random numbers.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is possible to acquire not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers by using the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the types of lottery processing to be used by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

Further, when acquiring an 8-bit random number, an 8-bit random number is acquired from one of the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and when a 16-bit random number is acquired, the 1st to 12th shared random numbers are used. It is configured to acquire 8-bit random numbers from two of the random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to acquire a 16-bit random number while using a processing configuration for acquiring an 8-bit random number. Further, since the update cycle of an 8-bit random number is shorter than the update cycle of a 16-bit random number, when acquiring a 16-bit random number, by configuring the configuration to acquire two 8-bit random numbers, the update cycle can be shortened. It is possible to use 16-bit random numbers.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for supplying the clock signal to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the random number circuit group 100 in this embodiment.

The configuration of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d in the random number circuit group 100 is the same as that of the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with a common shared clock circuit 104, and the shared clock circuit 104 to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a are provided. The clock signal is output to all of the 1011l, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are provided. The output periods of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are set so as to be different from each other and not to be a multiple of each other. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at arbitrary timings.

Further, the output cycles of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are all sufficiently shorter than the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41. For example, the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41 is 1 second, whereas the output cycle of the clock signal of the 1st to 12th clock circuits 151a to 151l is in the range of 3 microseconds to 30 microseconds. It has become. As a result, the deviation of the random number update cycle in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is sufficiently small in relation to the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal effect control process in the effect side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a normal effect control process in the present embodiment.

In step S5701, the same process as in steps S2201 to S2210 of the normal effect control process (FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the chance production flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S5702). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. When the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S5702: NO), it is determined whether or not the chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5703). When the chance start command is received (step S5703: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5704).

When "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag (step S5704: YES), it is determined whether or not the false precursor effect currently being executed is to be canceled (step S5705). There are two types of false precursor effects, one is an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9, and the other is an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9. Since the false precursor state ST5 is a gaming state that does not lead to the transition to the ART state ST9 in the first place, the ART state ST9 is reached after the completion of the false precursor effect regardless of the type of the false precursor effect being executed. No migration occurs.

If the false precursor effect currently being executed is a type in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S5705 and the false precursor effect flag is cleared to "0". (Step S5706). As a result, the false precursor effect in the middle of execution will be canceled in the middle of the transition to the chance state ST7.

When a negative determination is made in step S5704 or the process of step S5706 is executed, the chance effect start setting process is executed (step S5707). In the chance effect start setting process, the chance effect table that enables the execution of the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the chance effect table, the chance effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the chance state is ST7 by confirming the effect. After that, "1" is set in the chance production flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S5708).

On the other hand, if the false precursor effect currently being executed is a type in which an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S5705. In this case, "1" is set in the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5709). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the state is waiting for the start of the chance effect due to the fact that the false precursor effect corresponding to the false precursor state ST5 is being executed. is there. Here, in the main MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated in the middle and the transition to the chance state ST7 is performed. On the other hand, even if the production side MPU 92 shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor production, the production with high expectation that the false precursor production in the middle of execution shifts to the ART state ST9 is executed. In the case of the type, the false precursor effect is continued even if the control corresponding to the chance state ST7 is executed by the main MPU 72 without ending the false precursor effect in the middle. As a result, as a game state, the transition to the chance state ST7 is prioritized over the continuation of the false precursor state ST5, so that the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7 is secured, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed. By continuing the false precursor effect in the middle of executing the effect with high expectation, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from giving a sense of discomfort.

When a negative determination is made in step S5703 or when the process of step S5709 is executed, the effect control process for the false precursor state is executed (step S5710). The processing content of the effect control process for the false precursor state is the same as that of the first embodiment. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the processes of steps S5711 to S5716 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S5711 to S5716 are the same as those of steps S2217 to S2222 of the normal effect control processing (FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the false precursor effect currently being executed is a type in which an effect having a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, the main MPU 72 is set to the chance state ST7. Even if a transition occurs, the execution of the false precursor effect is continued. As a result, as a game state, the transition to the chance state ST7 is prioritized over the continuation of the false precursor state ST5, so that the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7 is secured, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed. By continuing the false precursor effect in the middle of executing the effect with high expectation, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if the false precursor effect currently being executed is a type in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, and if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main MPU 72, the relevant effect. The false precursor production is stopped halfway and the chance production is started. As a result, in a situation where a false precursor effect with a low degree of attention is being executed, the player is more likely than the false precursor effect currently being executed in accordance with the transition to the chance state ST7 at the main MPU 72. It is possible to prioritize the start of chance production, which has a high degree of attention.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control process for the false precursor state in the effect side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for a false precursor state in the present embodiment. The effect control process for the false precursor state is not limited to the situation where the false precursor effect is executed, but also the effect for the present precursor effect, the chance effect, the effect for the bonus state, the effect for the ready state ST8, and the effect for the ART state ST9. Is executed even if is not executed.

In steps S5801 to S5804, the same process as in steps S2301 to S2304 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) for the false precursor state in the first embodiment is executed. When "1" is set in the false precursor effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5801: YES), the information to be referred to in the false precursor effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false precursor effect. By determining whether or not it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S5805).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5805, it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5806). When the false precursor start command has not been received (step S5806: NO), the end setting process of the false precursor effect is executed (step S5807). In the end setting process of the false precursor effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false precursor state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. It is stored in the production side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, the false precursor state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the precursor effect has ended and has returned to the normal game state ST1.

When the false precursor start command is received (step S5806: YES), the false precursor effect adjustment process is executed (step S5808). In the adjustment process of the false precursor effect, the false precursor effect table for executing the false precursor effect having the continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false precursor effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side. Store in RAM 94. In this case, the false precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 set in the false precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the false precursor effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image have contents that are continuous with the contents of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far. A false precursor effect is executed on the display device 63. If the false precursor effect is started in the middle of the false precursor effect, the number of games of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far and the false precursor effect that will be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed. The precursory effect of the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

When it is not the end timing of the false precursor effect (step S5805: NO), it is determined whether or not a false precursor start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5809). When the false precursor effect start command has not been received (step S5809: NO), the false precursor effect update setting process is executed (step S5810). In the update setting process, if it is the update timing of the false precursor effect due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referred to in the false precursor effect table currently being referred to is the range of one game. Execute the process to change according to the new start. As a result, the execution content of the false precursor effect changes according to the number of continuous games of the false precursor effect.

When the false precursor effect command is received (step S5809: YES), the false precursor effect adjustment process is executed (step S5811). In the adjustment process of the false precursor effect, the false precursor effect table for executing the false precursor effect having the continuity of the effect with respect to the content of the false precursor effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and the effect side. Store in RAM 94. In this case, the false precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 set in the false precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effect on the production side MPU 92 according to the false precursor effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image have contents that are continuous with the contents of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far. A false precursor effect is executed on the display device 63. If the false precursor effect is started in the middle of the false precursor effect, the number of games of the false precursor effect that have been executed so far and the false precursor effect that will be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed. The precursory effect of the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S5802, when the process of step S5804 is executed, when the process of step S5807 is executed, when the process of step S5808 is executed, when the process of step S5810 is executed, or when the process of step S5811 is executed. When the process is executed, it is determined whether or not the preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5812). Even if the production side MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false precursor effect, the game state in the main side MPU 72 may be the chance state ST7. Then, in such a situation, the main MPU 72 wins the transition in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7, so that even in a situation where the false precursor effect is executed, the main MPU 72 A preparation start command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92.

When the preparation start command is received (step S5812: YES), the preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S5813). In the start setting process of the preparatory effect, the preparatory effect table that enables the execution of the preparatory effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparatory effect table, the preparatory effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can grasp that the preparation state is ST8 by confirming the effect. In addition, when the start setting process of the preparatory effect is executed in the situation where the false precursor effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in a way that interrupts the series of stories of the false precursor effect. The production to be performed is executed. After that, various flags related to the false precursor effect are cleared to "0" (step S5814).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the main MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7 while the false precursor effect is being executed, the false precursor effect during execution is continued and the main Even if the false precursor effect is terminated in the situation where the chance state ST7 continues on the side MPU 72, the chance effect is not started. As a result, the chance production is suddenly started in the middle of the false precursor production, or the chance production is not started at the same time as the end of the false precursor production, and the player does not feel uncomfortable with the sudden start of the chance production. It becomes possible to do so.

<8th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the bonus winning notification when the bonus is won during the execution of the ending effect is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a bonus notification process during the ending executed by the production side MPU 92. The bonus notification process during the ending is executed during the execution of the ending effect.

It is determined whether or not any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S5901). When the main MPU 72 sends a game start command in which information that enables identification of the type of the set bonus winning data is set at the start of the game in which the bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning is established. Sends the corresponding commands, so that the production side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on those commands.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game in which the bonus winning data is set (step S5902). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5902, the number of non-notification compatible games corresponding to the type of bonus winning data set this time is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5903). Multiple types of non-notification compatible games are set according to the type of bonus winning data. Specifically, when any BB winning data is set, 10 games are selected as the number of non-notification compatible games, and when any RB winning data is set, 20 games are selected as the number of non-notification compatible games. The game is selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5902, or if the process of step S5903 is executed, whether or not the number of remaining games in the number of continuous games of the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect is less than the number of non-notification compatible games. Is determined (step S5904). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5904, the notification effect setting process is executed (step S5905). In the notification effect setting process, data is set so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is reduced and displayed in the situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, if a bonus is won in the middle of the ending effect, the bonus winning notification will be made at the timing when the number of continuous games remaining in the ending effect reaches a predetermined number. .. This makes it possible to announce the winning of the bonus at a preferable timing in relation to the ending effect.

It should be noted that the number of non-notification compatible games may differ depending on whether or not there is a setting difference in the winning probability.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Is different from the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a power failure processing in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The power failure processing is executed in step S203 when it is specified that the power failure flag is set to "1" in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed (step S6001), and if the transmission is not completed (step S6001: NO), this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is started. It returns and ends the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed (step S6001: YES), the reel control clearing process is executed (step S6002), and the return address adjustment process is executed (step S6003). The clear process for reel control is the same as step S116 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjustment process is step S117 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. Is the same as.

Specifically, in the clearing process for reel control (step S6002), each of the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6003), when the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped during the rotation of at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is supplied. When returning to the address before the power is cut off (step S119) when the power is restarted, the normal process can be started from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Then, when each of the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. Even if the timing is after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started according to the normal acceleration table. In this embodiment, the reel control clearing process and the return address adjustment process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 10).

After that, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 (step S6004), and all the actuators (not shown) are turned off by clearing the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 (step S6005). .. Then, after executing the checksum calculation process (step S6006), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S6007). The processing content of the checksum calculation processing is the same as step S304 of the power failure processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment, and more specifically, the processing content is the same as step S109 in the main processing (FIG. 10). After that, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S6008). After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

According to the above configuration, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the supply of operating power is restarted without requiring the execution of the clear processing for reel control and the adjustment processing of the return address in the main processing (FIG. 10). It becomes possible to appropriately restart the rotation.

Further, since the clear processing for reel control and the adjustment processing of the return address are executed before the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 116), the main RAM 74 in the state after these processing is executed. It is possible to calculate and store the checksum. Then, in the main process (FIG. 10) when the supply of operating power is restarted, whether or not the checksum is normal is specified as in the first embodiment, and if the checksum is abnormal, it is used for abnormality. (Steps S120 to S122) are executed. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the information in the main RAM 74 in the state after the clear processing for reel control and the adjustment processing of the return address are normal when the supply of operating power is restarted. ..

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Is different from the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a stop operation determination process executed by the main MPU 72. The stop operation determination process is executed in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 (step S6101). The constant speed flag 74c mainly determines whether or not the constant speed rotation is started in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled as in the first embodiment. It is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 72. If "1" is not set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S6101: NO), the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are invalid, so that the main stop operation determination process is terminated as it is.

When "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S6101: YES), "3" is set in the determination target counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S6102). The determination target counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R the processing of steps S6103 to S6109 is to be executed. When the value of the judgment target counter is "3", the left reel 32L is the control target, and when the value of the judgment target counter is "2", the middle reel 32M is the control target, and the value of the judgment target counter is If it is "1", the right reel 32R is the control target.

After that, the history data shift processing is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the values of the current determination target counters (step S6103). In the present embodiment, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a corresponding to the one stop buttons 42 to 44 receive the detection signal corresponding to the fact that the one stop button 42 to 44 is not operated twice. After confirming continuously over the processing times of the stop operation determination process, it is determined once that the detection signal corresponding to the operation of the one stop button 42 to 44 is received. When it is confirmed in the processing times of the processing, it is specified that the stop button 42 to 44 of the one is stopped.

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each history area 181 to 183 provided in the main RAM 74 in order to specify the stop operation as described above. As shown in FIG. 118, the main RAM 74 is provided with a left history area 181, a middle history area 182, and a right history area 183. The left history area 181 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 42a corresponding to the left stop button 42, and the middle history area 182 corresponds to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 43a corresponding to the middle stop button 43. Information is stored, and the right history area 183 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 44a corresponding to the right stop button 44. Each of these history areas 181 to 183 is provided with areas 181a, 182a, 183a this time, areas 181b, 182b, 183b last time, and areas 181c, 182c, 183c before the previous time, respectively.

Information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) in the current processing times is stored in the areas 181a, 182a, and 183a this time, and the areas 181b, 182b, and 183b of the previous time are stored. Information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) in the previous processing time is stored in the area 181c, 182c, 183c before the previous time in the processing time before the previous time. Information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) is stored. When it is confirmed that the detection signal corresponding to the fact that the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated is received from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, "0" is displayed in the corresponding areas 181a to 183c. When it is confirmed that the detection signal corresponding to the setting and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 being operated is received from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, "1" is set in the corresponding areas 181a to 183c. Is set. The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a continue to output the LOW level signal when the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated, and HI when the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. Continue to output the level signal. However, the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), in the history data shift process (step S6103), the history data storage order is one area after the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counter values. Executes the process of shifting the data to. That is, if the value of the determination target counter is "3", each data of the left history area 181 is shifted so that the previous area 181b → the previous two times area 181c and the current area 181a → the previous area 181b. If the value of the determination target counter is "2", each data of the intermediate history area 182 is shifted so that the previous area 182b → the previous two times area 182c and the current area 182a → the previous area 182b. If the value of the determination target counter is "1", each data of the right history area 183 is shifted so that the previous area 183b → the previous two times area 183c and the current area 183a → the previous area 183b.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the current determination target counter are operated (step S6104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal corresponding to the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is received from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a corresponding to the current determination target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, "1" is set in the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counter (step S6105). When a negative determination is made in step S6104, the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counter are cleared to "0" (step S6106).

When the process of step S6105 or step S6106 is executed, the previous areas 181c, 182c, 183c and the previous areas 181b, 182b, 183b of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counters are "0" and this time area. It is determined whether or not 181a, 182a, and 183a are "1" (step S6107). When a positive determination is made in step S6107, "1" is set in the stop operation flag corresponding to the current determination target counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S6108). The stop operation flags are provided so as to correspond to each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis. When "1" is set in the stop operation flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S803 of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S803 and the stop control has not yet been started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop operation flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S804 and the reel 32L. , 32M, 32R stop control is executed.

The state in which "1" is set in the stop operation flag is cleared to "0" regardless of whether a positive determination is made or a negative determination is made in step S804 of the reel control process (FIG. 27). It will be released. Further, in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), while the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the processes after step S6102 are executed and the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1". When all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have been stopped, "0" is cleared and the reels are released. Therefore, even after the stop operation flag is set to "1" and the stop control is started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop operation flag, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the stop operation flag are started. The processing after step S6102 in the stop operation determination processing (FIG. 117) is executed. In this case, if the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not continued, "0" is set in all areas 181a to 183c of each history area 181 to 183 by the time all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. It will be in a reeled state.

When a negative determination is made in step S6107 or the process of step S6108 is executed, the value of the determination target counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S6109). Then, if the value of the determination target counter after 1 subtraction is 1 or more (step S6110: NO), the process returns to step S6103, and if the value of the determination target counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S6110). : YES), the stop operation determination process is terminated.

Next, the rotation monitoring process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. The rotation monitoring process is executed in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is normal (step S6201). Specifically, the main MPU 72 manages the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R by the number of steps of the corresponding stepping motor 162, and the number of steps grasped is that of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is determined whether or not the ON signal is not received from the reel index sensor 164 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R even though the abnormal range has been reached beyond the number of steps corresponding to one lap. To do.

When a negative determination is made in step S6201, it means that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or the rotation is unstable even though the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is being performed. means. In this case, the clear process for reel control is executed (step S6202), and the return address adjustment process is executed (step S6203). The clear process for reel control is the same as step S116 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjustment process is step S117 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. Is the same as.

Specifically, in the clearing process for reel control (step S6202), each of the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6203), when the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped even though the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Can be re-accelerated. Although detailed description is omitted, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed so that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped before the re-acceleration is performed.

Next, the main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120.

In steps S6301 to S6315 and steps S6317 to S6321, the same processes as in steps S101 to S115 and steps S118 to S122 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment are executed. After the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S6315, the clear processing for reel control and the adjustment processing of the return address are not executed, but the current areas 181a of each history area 181 to 183 are executed. , 182a, 183a are set to "1" (step S6316).

When the supply of the operating power is started in this way, by setting "1" in the areas 181a, 182a, and 183a this time, the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are continued. Even so, in the first stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), when step S6103 is executed for the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44, the previous area 181b of the history areas 181 to 183 is executed. , 182b, 183b are set to "1". Therefore, no positive determination is made in step S6107 in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) of the processing time, and "1" is not set in the stop operation flag. Further, while the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that have been performed before the start of the supply of the operating power are continued, the affirmative determination is not made in step S6107, so that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed. On the other hand, "1" is not set in the stop operation flag. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating and the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the supply of operating power is stopped when the subsequent supply of operating power is restarted. Even if the buttons 42 to 44 are operated, it is possible to prevent the stop control from being started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R immediately after the start of rotation.

Further, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is abnormal, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are reaccelerated, so that the supply of operating power is restarted. In the situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, which has been performed in the case of the above, is not accepted, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be invalidated by clearing "0" of the constant speed flag 74c. Then, when the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" again, so that the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are enabled. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not normal when the supply of operating power is restarted thereafter. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being started in the situation.

In addition, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated by simply executing a simple process of setting "1" in the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a of each history area 181 to 183 in the main process (FIG. 120). It is possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from being started in an abnormal situation.

Note that the process of setting "1" in the areas 181a, 182a, and 183a this time is not limited to the configuration executed in the main process (FIG. 120), and is executed when the supply of operating power is stopped. It may be configured to be executed in the process of power failure.

Further, the main process (FIG. 120) or the power failure process is not limited to the configuration in which "1" is set only in the areas 181a, 182a, and 183a this time, and "1" is set only in the previous areas 181b, 182b, and 183b. This may be the configuration in which "1" is set in the areas 181a, 182a, 183a this time and the previous areas 181b, 182b, 183b, and "1" is set in all of the history areas 181 to 183. It may be configured.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the direct addition process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a direct addition process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not any of "4", "6", "8", and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6402 to S6409 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S6401, the step The processes of S6402 to S6409 are not executed. The winning numbers of "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6".

That is, when the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the winning combination shown in steps S6402 to S6409 is drawn. When the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (FIG. 17) is executed and the result is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), or the winning probability is between the set values of "1" and "6". If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. As described in steps S6402 to S6409 on the condition that the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By configuring the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) to be executed, the set value is predicted because the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is given. Can also make it impossible.

In the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6402). The content of the direct addition table is the same as that of the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)) read in step S3102 of the direct addition process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment.

After executing the process of step S6402, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S6403). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random numbers written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l are input. get. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

After that, the random numbers acquired in step S6403 are collated with the direct addition table read in step S6402 to determine whether or not the direct addition winning has been won (step S6404). When any of the number of additional games is applicable (step S6404: YES), the additional setting process is executed (step S6405). In the addition setting process, the value of the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S6406). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is directly added by the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in this game is executed. When "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 (step S6406: YES), the addition addition process is executed (step S6407). Specifically, "10" is a fixed number of additional games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) with respect to the ART game number counter 121 after the addition of the number of additional games is executed in step S6405. ”Values are added. Then, the temporary setting flag 123 is cleared to "0" (step S6408).

After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S6409). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given.

When a negative determination is made in step S6401 or a negative determination is made in step S6404, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S6410). That is, it is determined by the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) whether or not the winner is directly added. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6410, the addition setting process is executed (step S6411). Specifically, the value of "10", which is the fixed number of additional games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S6412). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given. After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6413).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the winning combination is directly added to the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). In the case of a direct addition winning in the addition lottery process corresponding to the result of, not only the number of addition games selected in the addition lottery process but also the number of addition games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). Is also given. This makes it possible to give an opportunity to be given a large number of additional games.

<12th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the direct addition process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a direct addition process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not any of "4", "6", "8", and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6502 to S6509 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S6501, the step The process of S6502 to step S6509 is not executed. The winning numbers of "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV having the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6".

That is, when the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the winning combination shown in steps S6502 to S6509 is drawn. When the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (FIG. 17) is executed and the result is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), or the winning probability is between the set values of "1" and "6". If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. As described in steps S6502 to S6509 on the condition that the index value IV in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values of "1" to "6" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By configuring the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) to be executed, the set value is predicted because the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is given. Can also make it impossible.

In the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6502). The content of the direct addition table is the same as that of the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)) read in step S3102 of the direct addition process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment.

After executing the process of step S6502, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S6503). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is as described above with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random numbers written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l are input. get. Specifically, as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed for normal processing (FIG. 13). ), The random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative judgment is made in step S404. Will be done.

After that, the random numbers acquired in step S6503 are collated with the direct addition table read in step S6502 to determine whether or not the direct addition winning has been won (step S6504). When any of the additional games is applicable (step S6504: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the temporary setting counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505). In the present embodiment, the number of additional games to be granted when the game is directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is not fixed to 10 games, but 10 games, 15 games, 20 games, 25 games and It is one of 30 games. In this case, 10 games and 15 games are less than or equal to the minimum number of additional games set in the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)), but 20 games, 25 games and 30 games are The number of games is larger than the minimum number of additional games set in the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)). In the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), when the direct addition is won, the value of the number of addition games to be granted is set in the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74.

When the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505: YES), the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)) and the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 Compare with the value (step S6506). When a negative determination is made in step S6505 or the process of step S6506 is executed, the additional setting process is executed (step S6507). In the addition setting process, when the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "0", or the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)) is the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74. If it is equal to or more than the value, the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)) is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74. On the other hand, when the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is larger than the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64 (b)), the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is set to the main side. It is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the RAM 74.

After that, the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6508). In addition, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S6509). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given.

When a negative determination is made in step S6501 or a negative determination is made in step S6504, it is determined whether or not the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6510). That is, it is determined by the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) whether or not the winner is directly added. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6510, the addition setting process is executed (step S6511). Specifically, the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S6512). In the direct addition command, information on the number of additional games generated this time is set, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct addition command, the production side MPU 92 is made to execute the production indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been given. After that, the value of the temporary setting counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6513).

According to the above configuration, a plurality of types of additional games to be granted when the direct additional games are won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) are set, so that the mode of granting the number of additional games is diversified. It becomes possible. In this case, in the situation where the direct addition is won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), if the direct addition is won in the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the direct addition is always won. The number of additional games to be granted in the lottery process (FIG. 63) and the number of games on the larger side of the number of additional games to be granted in the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to give the number of additional games to the player in an advantageous manner while preventing the number of additional games given to the player from becoming excessively large.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the chance state processing executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a chance state process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, by determining whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the chance state ST7 this time is the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S6601). .. When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S6601: NO), the low probability lottery table 112 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6602). On the other hand, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S6601: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6603). The content of the low-probability lottery table 112 is the same as the low-probability lottery table 112 (FIG. 50 (a)) read in step S2102 of the chance state process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. The contents of the high-probability lottery table 113 are the same as those of the high-probability lottery table 113 (FIG. 50 (b)) read in step S2103 of the chance state process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. is there.

When the process of step S6602 or step S6603 is executed, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S6604). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is the same as that of the first embodiment. In the transition process to the ART state ST9, the random numbers written in the 16th latch register 103p are acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, since the 7-bit random number is updated as in the first embodiment, random numbers of "0" to "127" are generated, and the start lever 41 is operated. The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing when the confirmation is confirmed and an affirmative determination is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). The acquired random numbers are stored in the acquired random number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, a fixed value is added to the acquired random number counter 74e in which the random numbers acquired from the 16th latch register 103p are stored (step S6605). Specifically, the fixed value information has an 8-bit data capacity, and is set to "128" in decimal and "10000000" in binary. This fixed value information is added to the acquisition random number counter 74e. Since the random number updated by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written to the 16th latch register 103p is 7 bits as described above, it is a random number of "0" to "127". In this case, by uniformly adding the fixed value of "128" in step S6605, the value of the random number that can be obtained by the acquired random number counter 74e after the processing of step S6605 becomes "128" to "255".

After that, the lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination in this game is acquired from the lottery tables 112 and 113 read out in step S6602 or step S6603 (step S6606). For example, when the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination process (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode, the information of "80" in decimal number and "01010000" in binary number is acquired as the lottery value information. To do. Further, when the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the information of "255" in decimal number and "11111111" in binary number is used as the lottery value information. get.

After that, the addition process is executed (step S6607). In the addition process, the lottery value information acquired from the low-probability lottery table 112 or the high-probability lottery table 113 in step S6606 is added to the acquired random number counter 74e after the fixed value is added in step S6605. Execute arithmetic processing so that the obtained result can be obtained. In this case, when the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1" in the process of addition and further addition is performed and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "0", that is, the acquired random number When the numerical information of the counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, "1" is set in the carry flag 114 provided on the main MPU 72, and the update from the maximum value to the minimum value is not performed. Is maintained in a state where "0" is set in the carry flag 114. Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the addition result exceeds all "1" and a carry has occurred.

When the result of the addition process exceeds all "1" and a carry occurs (step S6608: YES), it is assumed that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won, and the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 has been generated. Is set to "1" (step S6609). The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of this game, and when "1" is set in the ART winning flag. Is executed at the end of the game to shift to the ready state ST8. That is, the transition to the ART state ST9 In the next game of the winning game, the gaming state shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the pre-stage to the ART state ST9.

The handling of the numerical information when the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124. First, a case where the result of the addition process does not exceed all “1” will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (a1) to 124 (a5).

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124 (a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124 (a2). After that, the information of the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124 (a3).

After that, since the winning number of "4" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode this time, FIG. 124 (a4) shows the lottery value information as the lottery value information from the low probability lottery table 112. The information of "00010100" is acquired as shown in. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124 (a4) is added to the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 124 (a3), so that the acquired random number is obtained as shown in FIG. 124 (a5). The information of the counter 74e becomes "11110100". In this case, an event in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1" and further addition is performed so that the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all zero, that is, the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is the maximum value. Since the event of updating from to the minimum value has not occurred, the state in which "0" is set in the carry flag 114 is maintained. Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, a case where the result of the addition process exceeds all “1” will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (b1) to 124 (b5).

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124 (b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124 (b2). After that, the information of the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124 (a3).

After that, since the winning number of "15" is selected in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode this time, FIG. 124 (b4) shows the lottery value information as the lottery value information from the lottery table 113 for high probability. The information of "11111111" is acquired as shown in. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124 (b4) is added to the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 124 (b3), so that the acquired random number is obtained as shown in FIG. 124 (b5). The information of the counter 74e becomes "11011111". In this case, an event in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1" and further addition is performed so that the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all zero, that is, the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is the maximum value. Since the event of updating to the minimum value has occurred, the carry flag 114 is set to "1". Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is a bit number less than the number of 1-byte bits. In addition, a fixed value of "128" is uniformly added to the acquired random number. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery will be performed in any situation where a situation in which 100% winning is achieved and a situation in which the situation is likely to be lost occur. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, and if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for causing a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, all " Unless the situation of "1" is treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to the 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if the situation where all "1" is obtained after addition is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to exclude that all "1" is acquired as a random number. Therefore, when the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as the number of bits larger than the number of bits of 1 byte. It ends up. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of 1-byte bits, so that the lottery value corresponds to 100%. It is possible to use 1-byte lottery value information as information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the lottery value information in advance.

In addition, since the fixed value "128" is uniformly added to the acquired random number and the lottery value information is added to the random number after the addition of the fixed value, a 7-bit random number is used. However, even when the lottery is performed by the addition method, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of winning by determining whether or not a carry has occurred in the 8-bit acquisition random number counter 74e.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. Good.

(1) When a winning combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process of the present precursor state ST6, and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 are executed. However, even if a winning combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won, the transition lottery process may not be executed. In this case, since the above transition lottery process is executed only when a winning combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 is affected. It is possible to reduce it. Further, instead of the configuration, the transition lottery process may be executed when a winning combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(2) In the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process of the present precursor state ST6, and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 can be executed. In the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to generate the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the transition to each game state ST5 to ST7 with different games as triggers.

Further, the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2 is configured to be executed when a winning combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability is determined according to the set value. It may be configured to be executed when a winning combination that does not change is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established, and is executed when a winning combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won. The configuration may be such that the winning combination is executed when the winning combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is won and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(3) If a winner is won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section SC2 may be started from the game next to the winning game. In this case, assuming that the transition lottery process of the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process of the present precursor state ST6, and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 can be executed on condition that the advantageous section SC2 is used, the transition of the advantageous section SC2 is performed. Even if the game is won in the lottery process, it is not the advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, in the game in which the game is won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false precursor state ST5 and the transition of the present precursor state ST6 The lottery process and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 will not be executed.

(4) When a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning in the advantageous section SC2 are notified each time the stop order is notified. The lottery process is executed, and the end lottery process results in the end winning, so that the transition to the normal section SC1 may occur. In this case, it is possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning multiple times even in the advantageous section SC2 that has shifted in the normal game state ST1. Will be.

(5) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell winning required to generate the end trigger of the advantageous section SC2, is not limited to one, and 2 It may be a plurality of times such as 3 times or 4 times or more.

(6) Instead of the configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell prize is set to be notified as the end of the advantageous section SC2, from the first bell prize. If there is a specific prize that is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a predetermined order and the number of awarding media is large, the specific prize is established. The advantageous section SC2 may not be completed until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is generated a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). That is, in the configuration, the reel 32L that enables the winning of the winning with the maximum number of game media granted among the winnings that are established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is in a predetermined order. , 32M, 32R, the advantageous section SC2 will not end until the notification of the stop order is generated a predetermined number of times. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the specific winning even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted in the normal game state ST1, a predetermined number of times. When the winning combination in which the first bell prize is established is won according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize may be notified.

(7) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning required to generate the end trigger of the advantageous section SC2 is the normal game state ST1, the false precursor state ST5, and the false precursor state ST5. The configuration may be different between a plurality of gaming states such as the chance state ST7. For example, by setting the required number of notifications to be larger in the false precursor state ST5 than in the normal game state ST1, it is possible to make the false precursor state ST5 a more advantageous gaming state than the normal game state ST1. ..

(8) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified in the situation where the normal game state ST1 is in the advantageous section SC2, the notification is sent to the combined display unit 66. On the other hand, the configuration may not be performed on the image display device 63. In this case, it is possible to inconspicuously notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning that triggers the end of the advantageous section SC2.

(9) In the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display unit 67 is in a light emitting state (that is, a display state), and when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off. (That is, it may be in a hidden state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display the type of the abnormal state. In the configuration in which the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68 in this way, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display unit 67 is provided. Is turned off and the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state, so that even if the same abnormal state occurs, it is common depending on whether or not it is an advantageous section SC2. Since the event that the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easy to identify the type of abnormal state.

(10) When the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 or more, 1000 additional games are notified as a special freeze effect even if the number of games executed in the B loop is 22 or more. It may be configured as such. In this case, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games notified at one time from becoming excessively large.

(11) If the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by the main MPU 72 when the B loop is started is less than 20 games, the special freeze effect may not occur. In this case, if a B loop occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST9 is 20 games or more and 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total is regardless of whether the B loop is continued or not. By configuring the notification of the number of additional games, it is possible to execute the additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that the number of games given in the B loop is consumed in the middle.

(12) 20 games may be added at the stage when the B loop is started. In this case, when 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total number of additional games is notified regardless of whether or not the B loop is continued, so that the number of games given in the B loop is interrupted. It is possible to execute an additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that it will be digested by.

(13) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the ending effect is completed and the BB effect is started than when the BB effect is not started after the ending effect is completed. In this case, when the ending effect is finished and the BB effect is started, it is possible to execute the BB start effect after executing the end effect of the ending effect by using the longer period.

(14) A bonus winning combination in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value and a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value, and if the bonus combination is won in the middle of the ending production, the bonus winning notification (No. The configuration may differ depending on whether or not the first notification and the second notification are performed. For example, for a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value, a bonus winning notification is made when the winning combination is won in the middle of the ending effect, and for a bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, the ending effect is produced. Even if the player wins in the middle of the game, the bonus winning notification may not be given. When the bonus state corresponding to the latter bonus combination (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) is reached, even if the game section is the normal section SC1, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, so the ending effect ends. By generating a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination after the advantageous section SC2 is completed, it is possible to immediately return to the advantageous section SC2 even if the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated.

(15) The ending effect may be executed on condition that the total number of game media given in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from being executed even though the game medium is not provided to the satisfaction of the player.

(16) When the ending effect is executed, a video effect is performed in increments of 5 games, and at the end, an end screen showing the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST9. May be displayed.

(17) If the bonus combination is won in the situation where the ending effect is being executed and the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is 1490 games or later, the bonus winning notification (first notification, second notification) The configuration may be such that the notification) is not performed. In this case, in the bonus internal state ST2, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal game state ST1, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the ending effect is being executed in the ART state ST9 even in the situation where the ending effect is being executed in the bonus internal state ST2.

(18) The ending effect may be configured to reproduce the end roll, and the end timing of the ending effect and the end timing of the end roll may be matched by changing the reproduction speed.

(19) When the ending effect is extended due to a bonus state in the middle of the ending effect, an additional image such as a character introduction may be displayed in the extended game. In addition, an image suggesting a set value may be displayed in the extended game. In this case, if the bonus combination is won in the middle of the ending effect, it is assumed that the ending effect is extended and the suggested image of the set value is displayed by not establishing the bonus winning. Therefore, if the bonus winning is not established for, for example, 5 games or more after winning the bonus combination, the suggestion image of the set value may not be displayed even if the ending effect is extended.

(20) If the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 exceeds the number of ending-compatible games in the middle of the bonus state, the bonus effect may be ended and the ending effect may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state ends, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the ready state ST8 to the ART state ST9 that occurs after the bonus state ends. ..

In the configuration in which the ending effect is started after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending effect is delayed with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, in the ending production, the video production in increments of 5 games is basically performed, whereas the video production in increments of 3 games is performed, so that all the production contents can be displayed by the end of the ending production. You may do so. Further, if all the production contents cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending production, all the production contents may be displayed by using the freeze period that occurs when the ending production ends.

In addition, as ending effects, a plurality of types of effects such as 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games are prepared, and the ending effect is started for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. The effect may be selected according to the timing.

(21) The number of games consumed in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 in the middle of the bonus state from reaching the upper limit number of games, and it is possible to prevent the ending effect from being started in the middle of the bonus state. It becomes.

(22) If a bonus combination is won in a game other than the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the bonus type may be notified immediately regardless of the type of the bonus combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that a bonus prize will be established in a game prior to the final game in the advantage maintenance section.

(23) Instead of the configuration in which the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the advantageous section SC2 in the start game of the bonus state, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed. At the same time, the configuration may be such that the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 is higher than in other cases. Even in this case, it is possible to give a profit to the establishment of the bonus prize in the advantage maintenance section.

(24) The number of continuous games in the advantageous maintenance section is not limited to a fixed configuration, and may be determined by lottery. However, even if it is determined by lottery, it is necessary to select the number of games in the range in which the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

(25) Instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed when the advantageous section SC2 is in the start game of the bonus state, the ART state ST9 is executed when the advantageous section SC2 is in the game in the middle of the bonus state. The transition lottery process may be executed, or the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 may be executed when the advantageous section SC2 is in the final game in the bonus state. In this case, if the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2, the end trigger of the advantageous section SC2 may be determined by lottery. For example, in the configuration in which the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed when the final game in the bonus state is the advantageous section SC2, the content until the final game in the bonus state ends as the end of the advantageous section SC2 is not selected. As long as it is, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 triggered by the bonus state will not be executed.

Further, in the above configuration, the timing at which the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed may be different depending on the bonus combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus state. For example, if the bonus state corresponds to a predetermined bonus combination, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed in the start game, and if the bonus state corresponds to the specific bonus combination, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed in the final game. By configuring the game to be executed, it is possible to change the probability that the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed depending on the type of bonus combination.

(26) When a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game. In this case, by notifying the player that it is the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the bonus combination. Further, when a bonus combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game.

(27) The configuration of the offset table 111 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with the winning number is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. Not done. For example, instead of being set in the order of small role group → bonus role group → replay role group, it may be set in the order of bonus role group → replay role group → small role group. ..

(28) The offset table 111 is not set in common with the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode, but the offset table is individually set corresponding to each lottery table. It may be provided. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, a group of winning combinations whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value and a group of winning combinations whose winning probability does not fluctuate according to a set value are divided and aggregated. An offset table may be provided to separate and aggregate the small role group, the bonus role group, and the replay role group. Further, for the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the lottery table for the first RT mode, and an offset table may be provided for the lottery table for the second RT mode. In this case, the winning numbers of the offset tables may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with this configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that facilitates design, and the winning number is set in each offset table in a manner that facilitates the handling of information on the winning combination in the subsequent processing. Can be set.

(29) In the false precursor state ST5, when the winning combination that triggers the start of the false precursor state ST5 is won, the false precursor state ST5 may be extended. Then, when the false precursor state ST5 is extended, the advantageous section SC2 may be extended by that amount. As a result, the advantageous section SC2 is extended through the extension of the false precursor state ST5, so that it is advantageous for the player to extend the false precursor state ST5.

(30) Even if it is in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, when the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is executed, the advantageous section SC2 ends and is normal. It may be configured to shift to the section SC1. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the normal section SC1 is present even in the false precursor state ST5.

(31) If a predetermined combination is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed, while if the predetermined combination is won in the middle of the main precursor state ST6, the ART state is executed. The lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in ST9 may be executed. In this case, not only is it advantageous for the player to have a long number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5, but it is also advantageous for the player to have a long number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6. Therefore, if the transition to the present precursor state ST6 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the remaining number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 at that time is added to the number of continuous games in the present precursor state ST6. May be. As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity to increase the number of continuous games in this precursor state ST6.

(32) The number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and may be fixed to a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games).

(33) If a bonus prize is established in a situation where the false precursor state ST5 is in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 may be confirmed. In this case, the player expects that the bonus prize is established in the situation where the false precursor effect is executed.

(34) In the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the effect or notification indicating that the chance state ST7 may be executed may be executed while continuing the false precursor effect. In this case, it is possible to expect the chance state ST7 while entertaining the series of flow of the false precursor effect.

(35) When the false precursor state ST5 shifts to the chance state ST7, the false precursor effect may be terminated at that time and the chance effect may be started.

(36) In the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false precursor state ST5 and the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won in the chance state ST7. The configurations may have different probabilities. For example, the probability of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false precursor state ST5 is more likely to be won in the chance state ST7 than in the case of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5. May be a high configuration. In addition, the probability that the transition to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 will result in the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 than the case of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false precursor state ST5. May be a high configuration.

(37) In a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not transferred to the display counter 126, the notification corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 may be executed. .. For example, the image display device 63 is set with a display area in which a color corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is displayed. For example, if the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 500 or more, the display area is displayed. Displays red when it is less than 500 and 300 or more, displays yellow when it is less than 300 and 200 or more, and blue when it is less than 200 and 100 or more. Is displayed, and if it is less than 100, white may be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to predict the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

(38) Although a plurality of special additional effects can be selected at one time, the number of special additional effects selected at one time may be one. In this case, although the execution frequency of the process of selecting the special additional effect is increased, the area for storing the selected special additional effect becomes unnecessary.

(39) The configuration is such that the special addition effect is executed only when the A loop occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display counter is in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more. A special addition effect may be executed as a kind of emission effect executed when the value of 126 becomes “0”. In this case, since the special addition effect is executed when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. ..

(40) Although the expected effect is started when the A loop is set in the main MPU 72, the expected effect may not be executed. In this case, a special addition effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may be executed at the timing when the predetermined number of games has elapsed since the A loop was set. As a result, a special additional effect is suddenly generated, so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

(41) When the A loop is set in the main MPU 72, the special addition effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may not be executed until the A loop is completed. As a result, it is possible to execute a special additional effect in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is large.

(42) In the main MPU 72, when a lottery process for whether or not to give an additional game number is executed and a winning is achieved, a fixed number of games (for example, 30 games) is always set as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. It may be configured that the addition is performed and the timing at which the number of games is notified by the production side MPU 92 is determined. In this case, since the processing pattern of the additional lottery processing in the main side MPU 72 is only one pattern, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main side MPU 72.

(43) When the value of the display counter 126 becomes "0" in the situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", the end lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed and ends in each game. The ART state ST9 may be terminated when the player wins the game. Alternatively, the ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall to the first RT mode occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be terminated when the fall to the first RT mode occurs. The ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be terminated when the fall to the normal mode occurs. In this case, the same effect as the first release effect may be executed, or an effect different from the first release effect may be executed.

(44) When the number of games executed without the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) and the ART state ST9 reaches the number of released games, the ART state ST9 may be granted. , The configuration may be such that a pseudo-bonus state as in the second embodiment is given.

(45) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination may be configured to be prioritized in the stop control over the symbol corresponding to the combination that causes the addition of the game medium. In this case, when the winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified, and the stop order is notified. The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus combination may be notified. When the notification is executed in this way, the bonus prize is won by performing the stop operation in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the establishment of the first bell prize at the stop operation timing at which the bonus prize is not established. Instead, it is possible to establish the first bell prize.

(46) The game section is limited to a configuration in which a normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified and an advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified are set. In any case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified, but a plurality of sections having different types of winning data to be notified of the stop order may be set. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections having different frequencies of execution of the notification of the stop order may be set. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game section by giving a difference in the advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in the plurality of sections.

(47) The notification for causing the player to recognize which game section is may be executed in other than the advantageous section display unit 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to perform an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is. Further, in addition to or in place of these configurations, information indicating which game section is used may be externally output to the hall computer of the game hall.

(48) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is not added as the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Good.

(49) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the calculation is continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the above ratio for each set value.

(50) A configuration in which the total number of digested games and the total number of advantageous games digested in the advantageous section SC2 are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the lottery process of the winning combination, the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination and the total number of games to be drawn are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination is calculated. May be good. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each game state and advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media granted per unit game is stored for each game. It may be configured to calculate individually for each of the state and the advantageous section SC2.

Further, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games digested in the non-bonus state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the bonus state may be calculated.

(51) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous section SC2 is When the result is the end winning result, the advantageous section SC2 may be terminated and the normal section SC1 may be shifted to. The opportunity for this end lottery process to be executed is arbitrary, but for example, the end lottery process may be executed in each game, and when a predetermined lottery opportunity is won or when a predetermined lottery opportunity prize is established. The end lottery process may be executed. Further, on the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 exceeds the predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed every time a lottery opportunity occurs, and the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result. The advantageous section SC2 may end and the normal section SC1 may be shifted to.

Further, instead of the above configuration, the total number of game media given when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2 becomes the upper limit number of games and in the situation where the advantageous section SC2 continues is the upper limit. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1 when any of the conditions when the number of media is satisfied is satisfied. In addition, either the case where the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2 becomes the upper limit number of games or the case where the net increase in the number of game media in the situation where the advantageous section SC2 continues becomes the upper limit number of media. When the condition of is satisfied, the advantageous section SC2 may be terminated and the normal section SC1 may be shifted to.

(52) In the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified so that the advantageous section SC2 is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1. When the above is established, the number of game media to be provided may be increased, so that the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1, and the number of game media required to start one game is reduced. Therefore, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(53) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67, and may be performed by using, for example, the credit display unit 65. Often, the configuration may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results of the notification target, the events of each type of notification target may be sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the combined display unit 66. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

(54) The normal section SC1 may also have a configuration in which the maximum number of continuous games is set. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section SC1 continues until the maximum number of games is reached. Further, by setting the maximum number of games in the normal section SC1 to be the same between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value does not occur with respect to the maximum number of games. Is possible.

(55) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), the return address adjustment process (step S117) is not executed. May be good. In this case, in the reel control clearing process (step S116) in the main process (FIG. 10), the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0", but the rotating flag 74d is not cleared to "0". Further, in the situation where the rotating flag 74d is set to "1" and the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" before the process of step S119 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). If it is determined whether or not there is, and "1" is set for the constant speed flag 74c in the situation where "1" is set for the rotating flag 74d, the reel control process is performed in step S119 (FIG. 27). Try to return to the starting address of. Even with this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated when the supply of operating power is resumed. It is possible to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(56) The number of games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is not limited to the number of one type of games, and there are a plurality of types of games, and the number of games is always lottery. If the game is directly added and won in the process (FIG. 63), one of the plurality of types of games may be selected as the number of added games to be granted. In this case, the number of these plurality of types of games may be less than or equal to the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Often, a part of the number of games of the plurality of types is a number of games larger than the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination. It may have a certain configuration. However, even in the latter case, the expected value of the number of additional games selected when the direct addition is won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) corresponds to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By setting the configuration to be lower than the expected value of the number of additional games selected when the direct addition is won in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104), the lottery of the role is higher than the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). It is possible to increase the advantage of the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the process (FIG. 17).

(57) The constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is not limited to the configuration in which the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed before the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed, and the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). It may be configured to be executed after FIG. 17) is executed. Even in this case, the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is desired by always executing the lottery process (FIG. 63) regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Even if it is not the result, it is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of the addition of the number of additional games.

(58) When the number of additional games is given when the game is directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), the game after the game in which the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed is assigned. The number of additional games may be given to the player. In this case, even if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the predetermined game is not the desired result, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of additional games will be given in the subsequent games. ..

(59) When the number of additional games is given when the game is directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), and the additional lottery process (step) corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). As a configuration in which the timing of executing the notification that the number of additional games has been granted differs between the case where the number of additional games is given as a result of winning the direct addition in steps S3102 to S3104). May be good. For example, when the number of additional games is given as a result of being directly added and won in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), the reel 32L , 32M, 32R before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, such as when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. When the notification of the fact that the game has been played is executed and the number of additional games is given as a result of the fact that the game is directly added and won in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. The configuration is such that the notification that the number of additional games has been added is executed later. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of additional games will be given both during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and after the stops of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

(60) Even if the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is in a game state other than the ART state ST9, it may be executed in each game. For example, in the ART state ST9, the lottery process of whether or not to give the number of additional games is always executed in the lottery process (FIG. 63) as in the first embodiment, and in the game state other than the ART state ST9, the lottery process is executed. Transition to state ST9 The mode lottery process for whether or not to shift the lottery mode related to the lottery process from the low probability mode to the high probability mode may be always executed in the lottery process (FIG. 63).

(61) Instead of the configuration in which the lottery process for whether or not to add the number of additional games is executed in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), the lottery mode for the transition to the ART state ST9 is changed from the low probability mode to the high probability mode. The mode lottery process for whether or not to shift to the probability mode may be executed. In this case, the mode lottery process is always executed in the lottery process (FIG. 63), and is also executed in the lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). The player pays attention to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and even if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is not the desired result, the player enters the high probability mode. It is possible to make the player expect the transition. Further, instead of the mode lottery process, the above configuration may be used as a fall lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a fall to the low probability mode in the high probability mode.

(62) The number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is not limited to 7 bits, and is arbitrary as long as the number of bits is smaller than the number of bits of the acquired random number counter 74e. For example, when the acquired random number counter 74e is 1 byte as in the first embodiment, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d may be 6 bits, 5 bits, or 4 bits or less. There may be. Further, when the acquired random number counter 74e is 2 bytes, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is arbitrary as long as it is 15 bits or less.

(63) The lottery process executed by using the acquired random number counter 74e and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d having a number of bits smaller than the number of bits of the acquired random number counter 74e is not limited to the transition process to the ART state ST9. .. For example, it may be used in the promotion lottery process or the fall lottery process of the lottery mode related to the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, or it may be used in the grant lottery process of the number of additional games in the ART state ST9. Good.

(64) The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to starting one by one in a predetermined order after the execution of the reel effect, and one of three or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be configured to start rotation at the same time. Further, the order in which rotation is started is not limited to a fixed order, and the order in which rotation is started may be changed according to a predetermined rule, and the order in which rotation is started may be a lottery. The configuration may be irregularly determined by.

(65) When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted after the reel effect is executed, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is sequentially started, but the reel effect is not executed. Alternatively, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be configured to start rotating in sequence.

(66) The configuration is such that a standby period may not occur from the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a waiting period is surely generated may be used. In this case, in the lottery process of the waiting period (step S1204 to step S1206), the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery.

(67) Whenever a standby period occurs from the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a constant standby is performed. It may be a configuration in which a period occurs. In this case, in the lottery process of the waiting period (steps S1204 to S1206), it is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the fixed waiting period.

(68) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of effective lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(69) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the directing MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. For example, when a prize corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is awarded by the prize. Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media given by winning the prize can be notified by the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is provided on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(71) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game.

(72) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage (function to execute the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72),
State transition means for shifting the game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing) and
A first section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1), and
A second section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2), and
With
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to the ART state ST9) can be given to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege is given to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. And
The game machine occurs based on a predetermined event (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) or the occurrence of the predetermined event whose probability of occurrence may fluctuate according to the set value. The specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of the predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or the second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) in the second section. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a specific granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature A1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In addition, the progress of the game can be diversified by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. Further, since the second section has a configuration in which specific benefits are more likely to be given than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state and other gaming states. The player will play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous gaming state and will be the second section.

In this case, a specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of a predetermined event whose probability of occurrence can fluctuate according to the set value or a predetermined response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the predetermined event in the second section. .. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined event or a predetermined response situation occurs in the second section. In addition, according to the configuration, the probability of granting the specific privilege is affected by the probability of occurrence of a predetermined event, so that the specific privilege does not have to be directly changed according to the set value. It is possible to indirectly change the grant probability of the above according to the set value.

Feature A2. Equipped with a lottery means to execute the lottery process (a function to execute the lottery process of the winning combination in the main MPU 72)
The game according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process. Machine.

According to the feature A2, the player who expects the specific privilege to be given in the second section is expected to have a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. Further, since the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process changes according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly change the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section according to the set value.

Feature A3. A game execution means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game corresponding to the execution of the lottery process, and
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, a means for ensuring that the predetermined response status is obtained in a game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result (bonus processing in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific granting means grants the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section.

According to the feature A3, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game which is the predetermined lottery result. Specific benefits are granted based on the fact that the predetermined response status that occurs as a result occurs in the second section. As a result, the player who expects to be granted the specific privilege not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also when the predetermined response status is reached in the game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The second section setting means is described in feature A3, wherein the second section setting means is not set in the second section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section. Game machine.

According to the feature A4, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is given based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, in order to have the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, and then thereafter. It is necessary to be maintained in the second section even if the prescribed correspondence situation is reached in the game of. Therefore, the player pays attention to the continuation status of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The specific granting means occurs based on the occurrence of a specific event (3rd BB winning data setting, 4th BB winning data setting, 1st RB winning data setting) or the occurrence of the specific event whose probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value. The specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of the specific response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the first RB prize) in the second section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which is characterized by being imparted.

According to the feature A5, a specific privilege can be given to the player even when a specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section from becoming significant.

Feature A6. Equipped with a lottery means to execute the lottery process (a function to execute the lottery process of the winning combination in the main MPU 72)
The predetermined event is to become a predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process.
The game according to feature A5, wherein the specific event is a specific lottery result (setting of third BB winning data, setting of fourth BB winning data, setting of first RB winning data) in the lottery process. Machine.

According to the feature A6, the player who expects to be given the specific privilege in the second section expects to be the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. Further, since the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process fluctuates according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly fluctuate the probability of granting the specific privilege in the second section according to the set value. , The probability that the specific lottery result will be obtained in the lottery process does not change according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value on the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section does not become significant. Is possible.

Feature A7. A game execution means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game corresponding to the execution of the lottery process, and
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, a means for ensuring that the predetermined response status is obtained in a game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result (bonus processing in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
Based on the result of the lottery processing being the specific lottery result, a means for making the specific correspondence situation in a game after the game which is the specific lottery result (bonus processing in the main MPU 72 Function to execute) and
With
The specific granting means grants the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section, and the specific privilege is given to the player in the second section. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the specific privilege is given to the player based on the specific correspondence situation triggered by the lottery result.

According to the feature A7, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the game that becomes the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result In the later game, a specific privilege is given based on a predetermined response situation that occurs triggered by the predetermined lottery result or a specific response situation that occurs triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section. As a result, the player who expects to be granted the specific privilege not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result, but also the predetermined response status in the game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result. Or, when a specific response situation is reached, attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The second section setting means does not set in the second section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs in the first section, while the second section when the specific correspondence situation occurs in the first section. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the feature A8, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is given based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, in order to have the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, and then thereafter. It is necessary to maintain the second section even if the prescribed response status is reached in the game. Therefore, the player pays attention to the continuation status of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the first section, it is set in the second section as an opportunity. Therefore, regardless of whether the game section is the first section or the second section, if a specific lottery result is obtained, the situation is that the second section is in a specific correspondence situation, and the specific privilege is given to the player based on the situation. Is given to. Therefore, the player expects a specific lottery result.

Feature A9. The second section setting means has features A1 to A8, wherein the game section is set to the second section based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger in which the probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A9, the transition probability of the second section does not change according to the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the probability of granting the specific privilege from becoming significant.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined response status is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature A10, the transition probability of the special gaming state fluctuates according to the set value, and the grant probability of the specific privilege also fluctuates according to the set value in relation to the fluctuation according to the set value of the transition probability. Will be. As a result, when the probability of transition to the special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is a high setting value, the probability of granting the specific privilege is also high, and the player's expectation that the high setting value is selected is increased. Is possible.

Feature A11. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage (function to execute the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72),
State transition means for shifting the game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing) and
A first section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1), and
A second section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2), and
With
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to the ART state ST9) can be given to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege is given to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. And
This game machine occurs based on the occurrence of a specific event (setting of the third BB winning data, setting of the fourth BB winning data, setting of the first RB winning data) in which the probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value or the occurrence of the specific event. The specific privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of the specific response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the first RB prize) in the second section. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature A11, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In addition, the progress of the game can be diversified by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. Further, since the second section has a configuration in which specific benefits are more likely to be given than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state and other gaming states. The player will play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous gaming state and will be the second section.

In this case, a specific privilege is given to the player based on a specific event in which the probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. As a result, the player expects that a specific event or a specific response situation will occur in the second section. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the influence of the set value on the grant probability of the specific privilege.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. With a section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72). ,
A section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, and
The pre-end effect (ending effect) is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section is the number of pre-end games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. Pre-end effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S4205 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S4303 in the effect side MPU 92), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the second section, which is advantageous to the player, is excessively continued by ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games. It is possible to prevent it from happening. In this case, the pre-end effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section is the number of pre-end games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second section is nearing the end. In addition, by making the player want to check the pre-end production, it is possible to increase the motivation to continue the second section, and further, the player is satisfied when the pre-end production is actually executed. It is possible to give a feeling. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. A feature characterized by a configuration in which the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games based on the increase in the number of continuous games in the second section caused by an increase opportunity. The game machine described in B1.

According to the feature B2, the pre-end effect is executed as a privilege that the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player when the pre-end effect is executed.

Feature B3. The pre-end effect executing means is in a situation where the remaining number of continuous games in the second section is the number of games in which the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games executed in the second section being the number of pre-end games.

According to the feature B3, since the pre-end effect is executed in the situation where it is confirmed that the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the pre-end effect is executed even though the pre-end effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the event that the number of games executed in the second section does not reach the upper limit number of games.

Feature B4. There are a plurality of types of gaming states that can stay in the second section.
The pre-end effect executing means is the number of games executed in the second section in a situation in which the player is in a predetermined gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) which is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of pre-end games.

According to the feature B4, since the pre-end effect is executed in the situation where the player is in a predetermined gaming state which is advantageous to the player in the second section, the player is satisfied when the pre-end effect is executed. It becomes possible.

Feature B5. A state generating means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) that generates a special gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) that is advantageous to the player, and
A special effect executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3520 and S4405 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing the special effect (BB effect) in the special game state, and
When the special gaming state occurs in a situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, the effect continuation means for continuing the pre-end effect without starting the special effect (processing of steps S4409 and S4413 in the effect side MPU 92). Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4.

According to feature B5, when a special gaming state occurs in a situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, the continuation of the pre-end effect is prioritized over the start of the special effect, thereby ensuring the execution of the pre-end effect. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B6. The effect continuation means makes a positive determination in step S4404 of the effect side MPU 92 to start the special effect when the pre-end effect ends in a situation where the special game state has not ended. The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature B6, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the special effect to be executed even in a configuration in which the continuation of the pre-end effect is prioritized.

Feature B7. When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special gaming state has not ended, the effect continuation means is a means for continuing the pre-end effect (effect side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S4409 in the above.

According to the feature B7, even if the second section advantageous to the player is completed, the pre-end effect is continued when the special gaming state advantageous to the player is continued, so that the situation advantageous to the player is obtained. It is possible to extend the pre-end production by using the continuous period. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize the situation in which the special gaming state continues after the end of the second section as the situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B8. When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the progress stop means (in the main MPU 72) for setting the progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. A function for executing the processes of steps S4506 and S4509) is provided.
The progress stop means is the progress when the pre-end effect is continued because the number of games executed in the second section becomes the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special game state has not ended. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized in that it is not set to a stopped state.

According to the feature B8, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the second section ends by stopping the progress when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games. It becomes. In this case, if the pre-end effect is continued as the special gaming state continues after the end of the second section, the progress is not stopped at the end of the second section. As a result, when the pre-end effect is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the pre-end effect from being obstructed by the progress stop state. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the situation in which the special gaming state continues after the end of the second section is the situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B9. The production continuation means
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games assumed to be required until the special game state ends is a relatively long number of games, the end Means for starting the special effect after the previous effect is completed (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S4404 in the effect side MPU 92)
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games assumed to be required until the special game state ends is a relatively short number of games, the end Means for continuing the previous effect (function of executing the process of step S4409 in the effect side MPU 92) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8.

According to feature B9, depending on the number of games expected to be required until the end of the special game state, the situation where the special effect is started after the end of the pre-end effect and the situation where the pre-end effect is continued are determined. It becomes possible to cause it.

Feature B10. When the special game state is started or ended, the progress stop means (step S2414 and step S2709 in the main MPU 72) for setting the progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. Has a function to execute processing)
Any of the features B5 to B9, wherein the progress stop means is not set to the progress stop state when the special gaming state is started or ended in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed. The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature B10, when the special gaming state is started or ended, the player is made to clearly recognize that the special gaming state is started or ended by being set to the progress stop state. It becomes possible. In this case, when the special game state is started or ended in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed, the progress stop state is not set, so that the flow of the pre-end effect is caused by the special game state. It is possible to prevent the progress from being hindered by the stopped state.

Feature B11. State transition means for shifting the game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) Has a function to execute processing)
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to the ART state ST9) can be given to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege is given to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B11, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. Further, since the second section has a configuration in which specific benefits are more likely to be given than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state and other gaming states. The player will play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous gaming state and will be the second section.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An acquisition means (a function to execute random number acquisition processing in the main MPU 72) for acquiring lottery information when an acquisition opportunity occurs, and
Winning judgment is executed using the lottery information group (normal mode lottery table, first RT mode lottery table, second RT mode lottery table) corresponding to the game situation and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. The determination means (the function of executing the processes of steps S503 to S513 in the main MPU 72) and
When a prize corresponding to the result of the winning determination is established, the prize-corresponding control means for executing the prize-correspondence control (the function of executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The lottery information group corresponding to one game situation is
Multiple identification information (index value IV) and
Lottery correspondence information (which is set corresponding to the identification information and enables the winning determination means to specify whether or not the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the corresponding identification information ( Point value PV) and
Have and
The winning determination means
Processing of the first grasping means (step S604, step S607, step S612 and step S702 in the main MPU 72 to grasp the identification information corresponding to the lottery information in a predetermined lottery information group by using the lottery correspondence information Function to execute) and
The second grasping means (step S704 in the main MPU 72) for grasping the winning information (winning number), which is the information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means and is the information referred to in the subsequent control. Function to execute processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, after grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information by using the lottery information group, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped, and after the winning judgment is made using the grasped winning information. Control is performed in. As a result, in the lottery information group, the identification information is arranged in an appropriate manner when grasping the identification information, and the winning information which is easy to use in the control can be used in the control after the winning determination. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably performed.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the winning information is set as serial number information.

According to the feature C2, since the winning information is set as the information of the serial number, it is possible to preferably perform the process for grasping the result of the winning determination in the control after the winning determination.

Feature C3. Of the above-mentioned winning information, the predetermined winning information corresponds to a plurality of winning target information (winning data).
In a situation where the predetermined winning information is grasped by the second grasping means, any one of the winnings corresponding to each of the plurality of winning target information can be established. Or the gaming machine according to C2.

According to the feature C3, since the winning information different from the winning target information itself is used in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the control.

Feature C4. Equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72) to set the setting value to be used from the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The predetermined lottery information group has a first aggregation range in which the identification information whose winning probability varies according to the set value is aggregated (index value IV = 17 to 22 in the case of a lottery table for normal mode, first RT mode). Index value IV = 23 to 28 for the lottery table for use, index value IV = 18 to 23) for the lottery table for the second RT mode, and the identification information whose winning probability does not change according to the set value are aggregated. Second aggregation range (index value IV = 1 to 16 for normal mode lottery table, index value IV = 1 to 22 for first RT mode lottery table, index value for second RT mode lottery table The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein IV = 1 to 17) is set.

According to the feature C4, in the predetermined lottery information group, the identification information is distinguished between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range depending on whether or not the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value. It becomes easy to check a predetermined lottery information group at the design stage and the usage stage of the game machine. Further, even if the identification information is distinguished between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range in this way, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped at the time of winning determination, so that after the winning determination. In the control of the above, it is possible to use the winning information which is a preferable mode in the control.

Feature C5. As the winning type, there are at least a type in which the game medium is given as the winning correspondence control and a type in which the game can be re-executed as the winning correspondence control.
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the identification information that enables the winning of a predetermined type exists in both the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range.

According to the feature C5, in the predetermined lottery information group, even if the identification information that enables a predetermined type of winning is distributed and set in the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range, the winner is won. In terms of information, it is possible to aggregate information that enables a predetermined type of winning.

Feature C6. An information storage means (main side ROM 73) that stores in advance a correspondence relationship information group (offset table 111) that defines a correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information is provided.
Any of the features C1 to C5, wherein the second grasping means grasps the winning information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means by using the correspondence information group. The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature C6, since the correspondence between the identification information and the winning information is set in advance in the correspondence information group, it is possible to reduce the processing load for grasping the winning information from the identification information.

Feature C7. The first identification information (for example, the index value IV = 17 of the lottery table for normal mode) and the second game situation (1st RT) set in the lottery information group (lottery table for normal mode) to be used in the first game situation. The content of the identification information is different from the second identification information (for example, the index value IV = 23 of the lottery table for the first RT mode) set in the lottery information group to be used in the mode lottery table), but it can be established. It is the identification information that the winning prize is the same,
The second grasping means is the same regardless of whether the first identification information is grasped by the first grasping means or the second identification information is grasped by the first grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the winning information (for example, the winning number of "5") is grasped.

According to the feature C7, the identification information can be set in a preferred manner for each of the lottery information group corresponding to the first game situation and the lottery information group corresponding to the second game situation. Further, even in the configuration in which the identification information is set in a preferable manner in each lottery information group, the same winning information is used for different identification information although the winnings that can be established in the lottery information group are the same. Therefore, in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to use the winning information which is a preferable mode in the control.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform a lottery, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a combination in the main MPU 72) and
A game execution means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for executing a game of one game corresponding to the execution of the lottery process, and
A first section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1), and
A second section setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2), and
In a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result based on the predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process. Predetermined response means (function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to be in a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or the second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) )When,
Specific granting means (main side MPU72) that grants a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) to a player based on the predetermined response status triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section. (Function to execute the processes of steps S2516 to S2520) in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result. Specific benefits are granted based on the fact that the predetermined response status that occurs as a result occurs in the second section. As a result, the player who expects to be granted the specific privilege not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also when the predetermined response status is reached in the game after the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The second section setting means is described in the feature D1 characterized in that the second section setting means is not set in the second section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section. Game machine.

According to the feature D2, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is given based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, in order to have the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, and then thereafter. It is necessary to maintain the second section even if the prescribed response status is reached in the game. Therefore, the player pays attention to the continuation status of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D3. In a game after the game that resulted in the specific lottery result based on the specific lottery result (setting of the third BB winning data, setting of the fourth BB winning data, setting of the first RB winning data) in the lottery process. A function to execute a bonus process in the main MPU 72 to be a specific response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize). )
The specific granting means grants the specific privilege based on the specific response situation triggered by the result of the specific lottery in the second section.
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second section setting means is set to be the second section in the specific response situation triggered by the result of the specific lottery.

According to feature D3, when a specific response status is reached based on the result of a specific lottery, the specific response status is the second section in the specific response status, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific response status in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects the result of the predetermined lottery, but also expects the result of the specific lottery rather than the result of the predetermined lottery. Therefore, the expected target becomes a gradual one, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The specific granting means grants the specific privilege to the player based on the fact that the first game of the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result is started in the second section. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, since the specific privilege is given to the player based on the fact that the first game of the predetermined correspondence situation is started in the second section, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the situation of the second section. The player expects that a predetermined response situation will occur at an early stage.

Feature D5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
With
The game executing means said that the variable display of the pattern was started as the start of the one game based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition was satisfied, and the stop operation means was operated. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped.
In the predetermined response means, when the predetermined stop result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed after the variation display of the pattern when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the predetermined stop result is displayed. The predetermined correspondence status is started from the game next to the displayed game,
The predetermined stop result is a stop result that is not displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means.
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process and the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the result of the predetermined lottery is carried over to the next game of the game. D1 The game machine according to any one of D4.

According to the feature D5, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the predetermined response status is not started unless the stop operation is performed in the operation mode that enables the display of the predetermined stop result. In this case, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the second section is in the predetermined correspondence situation started in the game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Specific benefits are granted based on this. Therefore, a player who can display a predetermined stop result at an early stage when a predetermined lottery result is obtained is more likely to have an event in which a predetermined response status occurs in the second section, and a specific privilege is provided accordingly. It becomes easy to be given. On the other hand, if the predetermined stop result is not displayed when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the predetermined lottery result is carried over to the next game of the game, so that if the predetermined lottery result is obtained, it is early. It is possible to prevent a player who cannot display a predetermined stop result from suffering an excessive disadvantage.

Feature D6. A second section effect control means (a function of executing an effect control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantageous maintenance effect) in the second section is provided.
The second section effect control means is characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. The game machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

According to the feature D6, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section and an opportunity to reach the predetermined response status occurs, the second section is completed in the predetermined response status, so that the specific privilege is not given. On the other hand, if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. As a result, it is said that the specific privilege was not given even though the predetermined lottery result was generated in the situation where the second section correspondence effect corresponding to the second section was executed and the opportunity to reach the predetermined correspondence situation occurred. It gives an impression to the player.

Feature D7. In a game after the game that resulted in the specific lottery result based on the specific lottery result (setting of the third BB winning data, setting of the fourth BB winning data, setting of the first RB winning data) in the lottery process. A function to execute a bonus process in the main MPU 72 to be a specific response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize). )
The specific granting means grants the specific privilege based on the specific response situation triggered by the result of the specific lottery in the second section.
The second section setting means is configured not to be set in the second section even if the predetermined correspondence situation occurs when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first section, and is not set in the second section. In the specific response situation triggered by the fact that it has become, it is configured to be the second section.
The second section effect control means is characterized in that even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery process in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is executed in the final game. The game machine according to the feature D6.

According to feature D7, when a specific response status is reached based on the result of a specific lottery, the specific response status is the second section in the specific response status, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific response status in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects the result of the predetermined lottery, but also expects the result of the specific lottery rather than the result of the predetermined lottery. Therefore, the expected target becomes a gradual one, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is executed in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that a specific privilege will be given due to an opportunity to become a specific response situation in the situation where the second section corresponding effect is being executed, and the player's attention to the second section corresponding effect. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the predetermined response status is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature D8, by giving the specific privilege based on the special gaming state in the second section, the specific privilege can be further granted when the special gaming state which is advantageous to the player occurs. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of being in a special gaming state in the second section.

Feature D9. State transition means for shifting the game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) Has a function to execute processing)
In the second section, a specific privilege that does not occur in the first section (transition to the ART state ST9) can be given to the player, or in the second section, a specific privilege is given to the player more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to the feature D9, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. Further, since the second section has a configuration in which specific benefits are more likely to be given than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which they can stay in a predetermined gaming state and other gaming states. The player will play the game while expecting that it will be in an advantageous gaming state and will be the second section.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. With a section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72). ,
The process of step S2014 in the first state setting means (main side MPU 72) for setting the first expected state (this precursor state ST6) in which the privilege (transition to the ART state ST9) is given after the game continues over a plurality of games. Function to execute) and
A second state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2024 in the main MPU 72) for setting the second expected state (false precursor state ST5) in which the privilege is not given after the game continues for a plurality of games.
An expectation effect control means (in the effect side MPU 92) that enables an expectation effect to be performed so that the player can expect the privilege to be given in each of the first expected state and the second expected state games. (Functions for executing the processes of step S2204, step S2205, step S2210, and step S2223) and
With
The section setting means is provided with means for setting the second section in the second expected state (a function of executing the processes of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72). ..

According to the feature E1, since the second section is more advantageous than the first section, the player plays the game while expecting that the game section becomes the second section. In addition, the player who confirmed the expected effect by executing the expected effect that enables the player to expect the occurrence of the privilege grant in each game by entering the first expected state or the second expected state. It is expected that the benefits will be given, and the interest of the game will be improved. In addition, since there is not only the first expected state in which the privilege is given after the end but also the second expected state in which the privilege is not given after the end, even if the privilege is not actually given, it is expected over a plurality of games. Since the production is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the game section is set to the second section in the second expected state. As a result, even in the second expected state in which the privilege is not given after the end, the game section becomes the second section which is more advantageous to the player than the first section. Therefore, even in the second expected state in which the privilege is not given after the end, it is possible to make the game state substantially advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature E2. The section setting means is characterized by including means for setting the second section in the first expected state (a function of executing the processes of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72). The game machine described in.

According to the feature E2, since the second section is set in either the first expected state or the second expected state, the first section is set when the expected effect is performed over a plurality of games. It will be a more advantageous second section. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be in a situation where the expected production is performed over a plurality of games.

Feature E3. The first state setting means is a first starting means (step S2014 in the main MPU 72, step S) that starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of the first predetermined trigger in the gaming state that is not the first expected state. It has a function of executing the processes of S2016 and step S2017).
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first starting means starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in the second expected state.

According to the feature E3, since the first expected state is started based on the occurrence of the first predetermined trigger in the second expected state, the player can tell that the first predetermined trigger occurs in the second expected state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second expected state.

Feature E4. Means for granting the privilege or another privilege to the player based on the occurrence of the advantage granting opportunity in the second section, and not granting the privilege even if the advantage granting opportunity occurs in the first section (mainly) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the side MPU 72 includes a function of executing the processes of steps S1309 to S1319).

According to the feature E4, since a privilege or another privilege is given to the player based on the occurrence of an advantage granting opportunity in the second section, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section. .. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature E1 is provided and the second expected state is set to the second section, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second expected state and in the second expected state. It is possible to expect the player to have an opportunity to give an advantage.

Feature E5. Advantageous transition to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) which is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the advantage granting opportunity in the second section and the second section is maintained. Means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2022 in the main MPU 72) and
A section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, and
With
In the section ending means, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state is calculated. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the second section is terminated when the maximum number of games is reached.

According to the feature E5, since the second section is terminated based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous second section is not excessively continued. It becomes possible to do. In this case, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state is the upper limit number of games. In that case, the second section is terminated. As a result, while the merit of the second section can be obtained in the second expected state, the demerit of the continuation of the second expected state is caused with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second section. Is possible.

Feature E6. If an advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times before the end of the second expected state, the second section is terminated when the second expected state ends, and even if the second expected state ends, the advantage Any of features E1 to E5, which comprises means for continuing the second section until the event occurs a predetermined number of times (a function of executing the processes of steps S1812 to S1815 in the main MPU 72). The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature E6, if the advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times before the end of the second expected state, the second interval is ended when the second expected state ends, while the second expected state ends. If the advantageous event has not occurred a predetermined number of times even if the above is completed, the second section is continued. As a result, in the case of the second section, it is guaranteed that the advantageous event will occur a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to secure the advantage of the second section, and depending on the mode of occurrence of the advantageous event. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the end timing of the second section with respect to the end timing of the second expected state.

Feature E7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S501 to S508 in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning result that was won in the lottery process is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution that executes the control corresponding to the winning result as the establishment of the winning result corresponding to the winning result. Means (function to execute the process of step S410 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The corresponding execution means corresponds to the grant correspondence when the grant winning result (winning number = 1 to 3) is obtained in the lottery process and the grant correspondence stop result corresponding to the grant winning result is displayed after the variation display of the pattern. As a result of winning a prize, a predetermined number of game media are given to the player, and the player is given a predetermined number of game media.
The grant correspondence stop result is a result displayed when the stop operation means is operated in the grant correspondence mode when the grant winning result is obtained in the lottery process.
When the winning result is obtained in the lottery process in the second section, the game machine is a means for notifying the granting mode (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72, a notification in the directing MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which is characterized by having a function of executing a processing.

According to the feature E7, in the second section, the game medium corresponding to the establishment of the prize corresponding to the grant is given by notifying the grant correspondence mode when the grant winning result is obtained. This makes it possible to make the second section an advantageous section.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. With a section setting means for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1) (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72). ,
Advantageous setting means for staying in an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player in the second section (a function of executing the processes of step S2008, step S2021 and step S2808 in the main MPU 72) and
A section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, and
With
The advantageous setting means ends the advantageous gaming state when the second section ends based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games.
The section setting means continues the second section based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, and the second section continues thereafter. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a section continuation means (a function of executing the process of step S3408 in the main MPU 72) so as to be in a situation (advantageous maintenance section).

According to the feature F1, the second section, which is advantageous to the player, is excessively continued by ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, when the second section ends based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous gaming state also ends, so that the advantageous gaming state is set in the second section. It becomes possible to make the game state in which it is possible to stay.

In this case, if the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section can be continued even after that. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the second section will be continued even after the advantageous gaming state is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the section continuation means terminates the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation situation becomes the number of continuation end games.

According to the feature F2, it is possible to make the end trigger of the second section continuation situation clear to the player.

Feature F3. The section continuation means is based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state ends in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section is equal to or less than the number of continuous games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. , The game machine according to the feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the second section continuation situation is obtained.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the continuation status of the second section from occurring even though the number of games executed in the second section is close to the upper limit number of games.

Feature F4. The section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation situation becomes the number of continuous end games.
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the difference in the number of sustainable games with respect to the maximum number of games is equal to or greater than the number of continuous ending games.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to make the end trigger of the second section continuation status clear to the player, and the number of games executed in the second section in the middle of the second section continuation status is the upper limit game. It is possible to prevent the number from being reached.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation.

According to the feature F5, the player shifts to the advantageous gaming state again based on the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section continuation situation. It becomes.

Feature F6. When the advantageous gaming state ends and the second section continuation situation occurs, the section ending means reoccurs to the advantageous gaming state when the second section continuation situation occurs again. When the sum of the number of games executed in the second section until the transition occurs and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state due to the re-transition becomes the upper limit number of games, the second The gaming machine according to feature F5, which is characterized by ending a section.

According to the feature F6, even if the configuration shifts to the advantageous gaming state again based on the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation, the second section is prevented from being excessively continued. Is possible.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity is the occurrence of a transition to a special gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature F7, when the transition to the special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs in the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state also occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that a special gaming state will occur in the second section continuation situation.

Feature F8. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a combination in the main MPU 72) and
In a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result based on the predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process. Predetermined response means (function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to be in a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or the second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) )When,
With
The advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the predetermined response status in the situation where the second section is continued according to the second section continuation situation. The gaming machine according to any one of F7.

According to the feature F8, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur again, and the game has the predetermined lottery result. In the later game, the predetermined response status that occurs triggered by the predetermined lottery result occurs in the second section due to the continuation status of the second section, and then the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state again not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also becomes the predetermined response status in the game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. In some cases, attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section depending on the continuation status of the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F9. The advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the first game of the predetermined correspondence situation in the situation where the second section is continued according to the second section continuation situation. The game machine according to the feature F8.

According to the feature F9, since the first game of the predetermined response status is started in the second section due to the continuation status of the second section, the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again, so that the game is predetermined in the continuation status of the second section. When the lottery result is obtained, the player expects that a predetermined response situation will occur at an early stage.

Feature F10. A second section effect control means (a function of executing an effect control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantageous maintenance effect) in the second section continuation situation is provided.
The second section effect control means is characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section continuation situation, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. Features The game machine according to F8 or F9.

According to the feature F10, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section continuation status and an opportunity to reach the predetermined response status occurs, the second section is completed in the predetermined response status, so that the game is returned to the advantageous gaming state again. No migration occurs. On the other hand, if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the continuation status of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. As a result, the predetermined lottery result is generated in the situation where the second section correspondence effect corresponding to the second section continuation situation is executed, and even though the opportunity to reach the predetermined correspondence situation occurs, the game is returned to the advantageous gaming state again. It keeps giving the player the impression that the transition has not occurred.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Grant expectation setting means (function to execute the process of step S2002 in the main MPU 72) for setting the grant expectation state (chance state ST7) that continues over a plurality of games, and
Grant-supporting lottery means for executing grant-supporting lottery processing as to whether or not to grant a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) when a grant-supporting opportunity occurs in the grant-expected state (chance state processing in the main MPU 72) Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the grant correspondence was won in the grant correspondence lottery process, the corresponding grant means for granting the privilege (the function of executing the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 72) and
With the grant expectation effect control means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2214 and step S2222 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the grant expectation effect (chance effect) is performed in each game in the grant expectation state. ,
With
When the grant expectation setting means is set to the grant expectation state in a situation where the grant expectation effect control means is executing the specific effect (false precursor effect), the execution of the specific effect is executed by the grant expectation effect. It is provided with an effect priority means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2213 of the effect side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function of making a negative determination in step S5705 of the effect side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature G1, the grant correspondence lottery process is executed when the grant correspondence opportunity occurs in the grant correspondence expectation state, and the privilege is given based on the grant correspondence winning in the grant correspondence lottery process. As a result, the player expects that the grant expected state is set, and that the grant response opportunity occurs in the grant expected state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by performing the grant expectation effect in each game in the grant expectation state, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation for the grant expectation state.

In this case, when the specific effect is set to the expected grant state in the situation where the specific effect is being executed, the execution of the specific effect being executed has priority over the execution of the expected grant effect. As a result, if the grant expectation effect is started when the grant expectation state is set and the player feels uncomfortable in relation to the contents of the specific effect up to that point, the specific effect is left as it is. It will be possible to continue. Further, even when the specific effect is continued without executing the grant expected effect in this way, the game state is in the grant expected state, so that the benefit of being set to the grant expected state is lost. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while avoiding it.

Feature G2. A predetermined expectation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2024 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined expected state (false precursor state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games, and
The specific effect control means (step S2204 in the effect side MPU 92) that enables the player to expect the privilege or another privilege to be given in each game in the predetermined expected state. , Step S2205, step S2210, and the function of executing the processing of step S2223),
The gaming machine according to the feature G1, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature G2, the player who confirms the specific effect is given the privilege by executing the specific effect that enables the player to expect the occurrence of the privilege grant in each game when the predetermined expected state is reached. It is expected that the game will be granted, and the interest of the game will be improved. In this case, when the configuration of the feature G1 is provided and the specific effect is set to the expected grant state in the situation where the specific effect is being executed, the execution of the specific effect being executed has priority over the execution of the expected effect. As a result, if the grant expectation effect is started when the grant expectation state is set and the player feels uncomfortable in relation to the contents of the specific effect up to that point, the specific effect is left as it is. It will be possible to continue.

Feature G3. As the predetermined expected state, the first predetermined expected state (this precursor state ST6) in which the privilege or another privilege is given after the end of the continuation over a plurality of games, and the privilege or the privilege after the end of the continuation over a plurality of games. There is a second predetermined expected state (false precursor state ST5) in which another privilege is not given, and there is.
When the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state is executed and the effect is set to the expected state by the grant expectation setting means, the effect priority means expects the specific effect to be executed. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is characterized in that it is prioritized over the execution of production.

According to the feature G3, even in the situation where the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state in which the privilege grant does not occur after the end is executed, the specific effect being executed is executed for the setting of the granted expected state. Is prioritized over the execution of the given expected effect. As a result, even if it is a specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the execution content of the effect.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the privilege given by the corresponding giving means and the privilege given after the end of the first predetermined expected state are the same.

If the execution of the specific effect is continued even if the grant expected state occurs in the middle of the second predetermined expected state, the grant correspondence will be won in the grant correspondence lottery process while the specific production is being executed. Is assumed. On the other hand, according to the feature G4, since the privilege given in that case is the same as the privilege given after the end of the first predetermined expected state, the specific effect being executed corresponds to the first predetermined expected state. It is possible to make the player think that it is a specific production to be performed.

Feature G5. A means (effect) for executing the corresponding effect based on the fact that the grant-corresponding lottery process has won the grant-correspondence in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized by the effect-priority means (effect). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2314 in the side MPU 92).

According to the feature G5, in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized, if the grant response is won in the grant response lottery process, the corresponding effect is executed, so that the execution of the specific effect is prioritized. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the privilege will be granted even in the situation where the player is present.

Feature G6. The specific effect includes a first specific effect (a false precursor effect that is not a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment) and a second specific effect (a false precursor effect that is a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment).
When the effect-priority means is set to the grant expectation state by the grant expectation setting means in a situation where the first specific effect is being executed, the execution of the first specific effect is more than the execution of the grant expectation effect. It is a priority,
When the grant expectation setting means is set to the grant expectation state in the situation where the second specific effect is being executed, the grant expectation effect control means ends the second specific effect and performs the grant expectation effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, which comprises means for starting (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S5705 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature G6, depending on the type of the specific effect, the continuation of the specific effect may be prioritized, or the new start of the expected effect may be prioritized. This makes it possible to perform the effect in a preferred manner in each situation.

Feature G7. When the specific effect is completed in the situation where the grant expectation control means is in the grant expectation state and the execution of the specific effect is prioritized over the execution of the grant expectation effect, the grant expectation effect The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, which comprises a post-end start means (a function of executing the process of step S2307 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature G7, since the grant expected effect is started after the specific effect is completed, it is possible to give an opportunity to execute the grant expected effect.

Feature G8. When the number of games executed in the grant expected state becomes the end reference number of games without winning the grant correspondence in the grant correspondence lottery process, the means for ending the grant expected state (step in the main MPU 72). A function for executing the process of S2010 to step S2012) is provided.
When the specific effect is completed in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized over the execution of the specific effect, the start means after the end performs the expected effect. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the game can be continued until the end reference game number of games is executed.

According to the feature G8, even if the grant expected effect is started after the specific effect is completed, the grant expected effect can be continued until the end reference game number of games is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute the grant expectation effect in the same manner as in the case where the grant expectation state is reached in the situation where the grant expectation is not performed.

Feature G9. The grant expectation effect control means is the grant expectation effect even if the specific effect ends in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized over the execution of the grant expectation effect in the situation of the grant expectation state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the game is not started.

According to the feature G9, it is possible to prevent the expected granting effect from being executed following the specific effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Special setting means (function to execute pseudo bonus start processing in main MPU 72) to set to special game state (pseudo bonus state),
The total number of games (value of the continuous game number counter 131) given to the player at at least one of the start of the special game state and the execution of the special game state is the number of grant reference games (transition condition game number counter 132). Privilege granting means (mainly) that grants a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) to a player based on the fact that the number of games condition is satisfied, which is one of the number of games exceeding the value) and the number of games being granted. (Function to execute the process of step S5205 in the side MPU 72) and
A reference lottery means for determining the number of granting reference games by lottery (a function of executing the processes of steps S5004 and S5005 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when the total number of games given to the player in the special game state exceeds the grant standard number of games or exceeds the grant standard number of games and the game number condition is satisfied, the player is given. In the configuration in which the privilege is granted, the number of granting standard games is determined by lottery. As a result, in the case of a special game state, the player expects that a small number of games to be granted as a reference game number is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H2. It is provided with a game number granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5103 to S5113 in the main MPU 72) for granting the number of games to the player when the special granting condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game state. The game machine according to the feature H1.

According to the feature H2, even if the number of games condition is not satisfied at the stage when the number of granting standard games is determined by lottery, the number of games is granted to the player even during the execution of the special gaming state. The number of games condition can be satisfied. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the special game state.

Feature H3. If the game number condition is not satisfied after being granted by the game number granting means, the means for ensuring that the number of games granted to the player is digested in the special gaming state (process of step S5107 in the main MPU 72). The game machine according to the feature H2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature H3, in the situation where the game number condition is not satisfied, it is possible to increase the number of continuous games in the special gaming state with the establishment of the special grant condition.

Feature H4. When the game number condition is satisfied after being granted by the game number granting means, an advantageous gaming state in which the number of games granted this time by the game number granting means occurs after the end of the special gaming state is advantageous to the player. The game machine according to feature H2 or H3, characterized in that it is provided with means for making it digested in (ART state ST9) (a function of executing the process of step S5109 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature H4, when the game number condition is satisfied, the number of games that triggered the establishment of the game number condition is also digested in the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, so that the advantageous game state is continued. The number of games tends to increase.

Feature H5. The game number granting means grants the number of games to the player before the game number condition is satisfied, in a mode of determining the number of games when the number of games is given to the player after the game number condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H4, which is characterized in that the number of games is different from the determined mode in the case.

According to the feature H5, the determination mode of the number of games when the number of games is assigned to the establishment of the special grant condition changes depending on whether or not the condition for the number of games is satisfied. It is possible to diversify the modes while relating them to the presence or absence of the game number condition.

Feature H6. The privilege granting means is configured to shift to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state as the granting of the privilege.
The means for assigning the number of games is
When the number of games is given to the player before the condition for the number of games is satisfied, the means for determining the number of games to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the special gaming state (processes of steps S5103 to S5105 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
When the number of games is given to the player after the condition for the number of games is satisfied, the means for determining the number of games to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (the process of steps S511 to S5112 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, characterized in that

According to the feature H6, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a determination mode suitable for the special gaming state before the game number condition is satisfied, and after the game number condition is satisfied, the game is in an advantageous gaming state. It is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a suitable determination mode.

Feature H7. The privilege granting means according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the privilege granting means shifts to an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature H7, when the game number condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the game number condition is satisfied. Become.

Feature H8. When the special game state is started, it is characterized by having means for determining the initial number of continuous games in the special game state by lottery (a function of executing the processes of steps S5001 to S5003 in the main MPU 72). The game machine according to any one of H1 to H7.

According to the feature H8, not only the number of granting standard games but also the number of initial continuous games in the special game state is determined by lottery, so that it is possible to diversify the pattern of each number of games when the game number condition is satisfied. Become.

Feature H9. A means for ensuring that the number of initial continuous games is consumed in the special game state even if the number of games condition is satisfied by the number of initial continuous games set when the special game state is started (main side MPU72). The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that it includes a function of executing the process of step S5003 in the above.

According to the feature H9, even if the game number condition is satisfied at the stage when the initial continuous game number is determined, the initial continuous game number is digested in the special game state, so that the game number condition is satisfied at the start of the special game state. Even if the game is played, it is possible to digest the game to some extent in the special game state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Special setting means (function to execute pseudo bonus start processing in main MPU 72) to set to special game state (pseudo bonus state),
A game number granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5103 to S5113 in the main MPU 72) for granting the number of games to the player when the special granting condition is satisfied in the special game state, and
When the special gaming state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the advantageous transition means (in the main MPU 72) for shifting to the advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the process of step S5205) and
With
The means for assigning the number of games is
When the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied, a means for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S5107 in the main MPU 72) and
When the special grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, a means for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S5109 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, when the special gaming state ends in the situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the special gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, so that the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the special gaming state. The player expects this, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this configuration, if the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied, the number of continuous games remaining in the special gaming state increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the special gaming state. On the other hand, if the special grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition condition is already established, the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of continuous games remaining in the special game state increases even though the advantageous transition condition has already been established, and the game in the special game state is delayed. At the same time, it is possible to give an opportunity to increase the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state.

Feature I2. The game number granting means grants the number of games to the player before the favorable transition condition is satisfied, as in the case of granting the number of games to the player after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the number of games is determined differently from that of the case.

According to the feature I2, the determination mode of the number of games when the number of games is assigned to the establishment of the special grant condition changes depending on whether or not the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, the number of games is determined. It is possible to diversify the aspects in relation to the presence or absence of the establishment of the advantageous transition condition.

Feature I3. The means for assigning the number of games is
When the number of games is given to the player before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the means for determining the number of games to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the special gaming state (processes of steps S5103 to S5105 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
When the number of games is given to the player after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the means for determining the number of games to be given according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (the process of steps S511 to S5112 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, wherein the gaming machine is provided with.

According to the feature I3, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a determination mode suitable for the special gaming state before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, and after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the advantageous gaming state is established. It is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a suitable determination mode.

Feature I4. The feature I1 to the feature I1 to the feature I1 to the feature that the mode of granting the number of games after the favorable transition condition is satisfied is more advantageous to the player than the mode of granting the number of games before the favorable transition condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of I3.

According to the feature I4, it is advantageous for the player that the advantageous transition condition is satisfied early in the special gaming state, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. ..

Feature I5. The advantageous transition condition is satisfied when the number of games given to the player in the special gaming state exceeds the number of grant reference games (value of the transition condition game number counter 132) or exceeds the number of grant reference games. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games given to the player in the special game state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are the same or substantially the same expected number of game media to be given per unit number of games.

According to the feature I6, the number of games given to the player is the same or substantially the same as the expected number of game media to be given per unit number of games in the special game state and the advantageous game state, so that the number of games given to the player is the special game state and advantageous. It is possible not to give a difference in the advantage regardless of the game state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features I1 to I6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2808 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9), and
A predetermined end means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the fact that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state (value of the ART game number counter 121) becomes 0 in the predetermined game state. Function to execute the processing of S2703) and
A game number notification means (production) that notifies the number of games so that the player can recognize the number of games to be notified (value of the display counter 126) out of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. The function of executing the processes of steps S3506 and S3510 on the side MPU 92) and
A special response effect (special addition effect) corresponding to the number of non-notification target games (value of the stock game number counter 127), which is the difference between the number of notification target games with respect to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state, is executed. (Function to execute the processing of step S3718, step S3916 and step S3920 in the effect side MPU 92) and the special response execution means to be used.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, the number of notification target games to be notified out of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of non-notification target games that is not the number of notification target games is Not notified to the player. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, the production according to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. A means for increasing the number of games (a function of executing an addition process in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state.
When the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the means for increasing the number of games, a means for adding at least a part of the number of games to be increased to the number of non-notifying target games (step S3710 in the production side MPU 92). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The gaming machine according to the feature J1, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature J2, since the number of non-notified target games is added during the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to execute the special response effect as a result of the addition.

Features J3. It is provided with a notification addition means (a function of executing the process of step S3904 in the production side MPU 92) for adding the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games.
The special response executing means has the feature J1 or J2, characterized in that, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transferred to the number of games to be notified is executed. Described game machine.

According to the feature J3, at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games, and the corresponding effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified.

Features J4. The notification adding means is the non-notification target game even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of the notification target games and the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the special response executing means can execute a different type of special response effect even in a situation where the number of games to be transferred is the same.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J6. The notification adding means once selects the number of games to be transferred within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state. It is provided with a plurality of selection means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3802 and S3803 in the effect side MPU 92) for selecting a plurality of times in the processing times.
The special response executing means is a means for making the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selection means to the number of notification target games performed in the special response effect executed at different timings ( (Function to execute the processing of step S3721 and step S3916) in the directing side MPU 92)
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J7. In the special response execution means, as one of the special response effects, the number of games is assigned to each of the plurality of games, and the total number of the assigned games is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The game machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, which is characterized by performing a number of effects.

According to the feature J7, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J8. A means for increasing the number of games (a function of executing an addition process in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state.
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the special response effect is executed, the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the fulfillment of the predetermined grant condition is the number of games to be notified. A means for additionally performing an effect corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding effect (a function of executing the process of step S3608 in the effect side MPU 92) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J7.

According to the feature J8, even in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of notification target games due to an effect different from the increase in the number of notification target games due to the special response effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved. is there.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. The first control means (main side MPU72) that manages the progress of the game,
A second control means (effect side MPU 92) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the first control means, and
With
The first control means
A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2808 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9), and
A predetermined end means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the fact that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state (value of the ART game number counter 121) becomes 0 in the predetermined game state. Function to execute the processing of S3403) and
Means for increasing the number of games that increase the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state (function of executing the processes of steps S3105, S3201 and step S3301 in the main MPU 72). When,
A first transmission means (a function of executing the process of step S2809 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting the first transmission information (ART start command) corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state, and
When the remaining number of continuous games is increased by the means for increasing the number of games, the second transmission information (direct addition command, A loop addition command, B loop addition command) corresponding to the increased number of games is transmitted. A second transmission means (a function of executing the processes of step S3106, step S3202, and step S3303 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The second control means
A predetermined effect starting means (a function of executing the process of step S3511 in the effect side MPU 92) for starting an effect corresponding to the predetermined game state based on the reception of the first transmission information.
Receiving correspondence means (directing side MPU 92) that executes reception correspondence processing for subsequently executing the effect corresponding to the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state based on the reception of the second transmission information. (Functions for executing the processes of step S3607, step S3608, step S3710, and step S4002) in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, the first control means executes a process for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state, and the second control means executes an effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. The process is executed. As a result, the processing load of the first control means increases even if the production corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is complicatedly performed while the progress control of the predetermined game state is centrally performed by the first control means. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control the predetermined gaming state.

Feature K2. The first control means is set to an increasing state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined rush trigger in the predetermined gaming state, and the increasing state setting means (B loop) is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2922 and steps S3304 to S3315 on the main MPU 72).
The game number increasing means is configured to increase the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the increasing state.
The second control means executes the process of step S4004 in the effect side MPU 92 to notify the player of the notification target information corresponding to the increase of the predetermined increase number of games generated in the increase state for a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to feature K1, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature K2, every time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied by the increased state, the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state is increased by the predetermined increase number, so that the player is expected to be in the increased state. It will be. In addition, since the player is notified of the notification target information corresponding to the increase of the predetermined increase number of games generated in the increase state for a plurality of times, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been assigned. Become.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the total notification means notifies a player of notification target information corresponding to the number of games given in the increasing state based on the end of the increasing state.

According to the feature K3, when the increase state occurs, the player is notified of the notification target information corresponding to the number of games given in the increase state based on the end of the increase state, so that many It is possible to notify at once that the number of games has been granted.

Features K4. The total notification means notifies the player of the notification target information in a situation where it is possible to notify the number of games given in the increasing state to be equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the specific reference game number is a plurality of times or more the number of games of the predetermined increase game number.

According to the feature K4, when the notification target information is notified to the player, it is notified at a time that the number of games is more than or equal to the predetermined increase number of games, so that the notification is executed. It is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature K5. The first control means
When the increase state ends after the increase in the predetermined increase number of games is established in the increase state by a specific reference number of times or more, the means for setting the standby state to wait for the progress of the game based on the operation of the player (in the main MPU 72). (Function to execute the process of step S3313) and
A third transmission means (a function of executing the process of step S3314 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting the third transmission information corresponding to the setting of the standby state, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the total notification means notifies a player of the notification target information based on the reception of the third transmission information.

According to the feature K5, since the notification target information is notified to the player in a state where the progress of the game based on the player's operation is waiting, the player's attention to the notification target information is paid. It becomes possible to increase.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value larger than a quotient obtained by dividing the number of specific reference games by the predetermined increase number of games.

According to the feature K6, when the notification target information is notified, it is possible to notify the player that the number of specific reference games or more has been given, so that the notification target information is notified. It is possible to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the number of specific reference games by the predetermined increase number of games, the number of games given in the increase state is consumed during the execution of the increase state. Even if this is done, it is possible to set the number of games that have not been notified to the player at the timing when the increase state ends to be equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

Feature K7. The receiving means is
Notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3603 and S3605 in the production side MPU 92) to be added to the number of games to be notified in order to make the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information recognizable to the player, and
Non-notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3710 and S4002 in the directing MPU 92) for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of non-notification target games that do not make the player recognizable.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6.

According to the feature K7, when the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state is increased in the main control means, there are cases where the number of games targeted for the increase is immediately notified and cases where the number is not notified. .. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the increase in the number of remaining continuous games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the notification timing is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K8. The first control means includes a continuous game number storage means (ART game number counter 121) that stores the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state.
The game number increasing means is the case where the number of notification target games is added by the notification means or the number of non-notification target games is added by the non-notification means. The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the number of games granted based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition is added to the continuous game number storage means.

According to the feature K8, no matter how the notification that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state increases is performed, the first control means determines the number of games granted based on the establishment of the predetermined grant condition. Since it is only necessary to add the number of continuous games to the storage means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K9. The second control means processes the special response execution means (steps S3718, step S3916, and step S3920 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the special response effect (special addition effect) corresponding to the number of non-notified target games is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature K7 or K8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature K9, the number of notification target games to be notified out of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of non-notification target games that is not the number of notification target games is Not notified to the player. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, the production according to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K10. The second control means provides a notification addition means (a function of executing the process of step S3904 in the effect side MPU 92) to add the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games. Prepare,
The special response executing means is described in feature K9, wherein, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transferred to the number of games to be notified is executed. Game machine.

According to the feature K10, at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games, and the corresponding effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified. Further, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Features K11. The notification adding means is the non-notification target game even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of the notification target games and the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state, is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to feature K10, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number.

According to the feature K11, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the number of games to be transferred is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K10 or K11, wherein the special response executing means can execute a different type of special response effect even in a situation where the number of games to be transferred is the same.

According to the feature K12, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the execution mode of the special response effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Become.

Feature K13. The notification adding means once selects the number of games to be transferred within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state. It is provided with a plurality of selection means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3802 and S3803 in the effect side MPU 92) for selecting a plurality of times in the processing times.
The special response executing means is a means for making the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selection means to the number of notification target games performed in the special response effect executed at different timings ( (Function to execute the processing of step S3721 and step S3916) in the directing side MPU 92)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K12.

According to the feature K13, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for increasing the execution frequency of the special response effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K14. In the special response execution means, as one of the special response effects, the number of games is assigned to each of the plurality of games, and the total number of the assigned games is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The game machine according to any one of features K10 to K13, which is characterized by performing a number of effects.

According to the feature K14, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K15. The second control means is a game in which, when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, the game is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the fulfillment of the predetermined grant condition. It is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step S3608 in the effect side MPU 92) to additionally perform an effect corresponding to the addition of the number to the number of games to be notified to the special response effect. The game machine according to any one of features K10 to K14.

According to the feature K15, even in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of notification target games due to an effect different from the increase in the number of notification target games due to the special response effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified. Further, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K15, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably perform execution control of a predetermined gaming state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2808 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9), and
A predetermined end means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the fact that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state (value of the ART game number counter 121) becomes 0 in the predetermined game state. Function to execute the processing of S3403) and
An increase state setting means that sets an increase state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined rush opportunity in the predetermined game state and continues the increase state until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
A means for increasing the number of games (a function of executing the process of step S3301 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined gaming state each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the increasing state.
A special effect processing execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3313 in the main MPU 72) that executes a special effect process based on the fact that the increase in the predetermined increase number of games is established in the increase state by a specific reference number or more.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, each time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied by the increase state, the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state is increased by the predetermined increase number, so that the player is expected to be in the increase state. It will be. In this case, since the special effect processing is executed based on the fact that the increase in the predetermined increase number of games is established in the increase state by the specific reference number or more, when a large number of the remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state are given. It is possible to provide the player with a corresponding effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein even if the increased state is set, the effect corresponding to the increased state is not executed until the special effect process is executed.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to give unexpectedness because the special effect process is suddenly executed in the situation where the player does not recognize that the state is increasing.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the special effect processing execution means is set to a standby state in which the progress of the game based on the player's operation is made to wait as the special effect process.

According to the feature L3, when a large number of remaining continuous games in a predetermined game state is given, the progress of the game based on the operation of the player is awaited, so that a large number of remaining continuous games are given in this way. It is possible to emphasize that.

Feature L4. The special effect processing executing means executes the special effect processing when the increase state ends after the increase in the predetermined increase number of games is satisfied by the specific reference number of times or more in the increase state. The game machine according to any one of L3.

According to the feature L4, when the increase state occurs, the special effect process is executed based on the end of the increase state, so that the special effect process is executed under the situation where a large number of games are given. It is possible to notify the player that the increase state has been set and that the increase state has ended by executing the special effect processing.

Feature L5. When the special effect processing is executed, a total notification means (a function of executing the process of step S4004 in the effect side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the notification target information corresponding to the total number of games given in the increased state is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature L5, it is possible to notify at one time that a large number of games have been assigned.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value larger than a quotient obtained by dividing the number of specific reference games by the predetermined increase number of games.

According to the feature L6, since the special effect processing is executed when a specific reference number of games or more is given in the increasing state, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect process. .. In addition, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the number of specific reference games by the predetermined increase number of games, the number of games given in the increase state is consumed during the execution of the increase state. Even if this is done, it is possible to execute the special effect processing in a situation where the number of games given in the increased state and the number of undigested games is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2808 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9), and
A predetermined end means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the fact that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state (value of the ART game number counter 121) becomes 0 in the predetermined game state. Function to execute the processing of S3403) and
A non-notification target storage means (stock game number counter 127) that stores the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state.
A specific increase state setting means (in the main MPU 72) that sets a specific increase state (A loop) based on the occurrence of a specific rush opportunity in the predetermined game state and continues the specific increase state until the specific end condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the processing of steps S2912 to S2914) and
A means for increasing the number of games (a function of executing the process of step S3201 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state each time the specific grant condition is satisfied in the specific increase state.
When the specific increase state is set, the specific response effect control means (processes S3704 and S3705 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing the specific response effect (expected effect) over the number of specific effect games is executed. Function to do) and
The non-notification target addition means (process of step S3710 in the production side MPU 92) adds the specific increase game number increased by the specific increase means to the non-notification target storage means in the situation where the specific correspondence effect is executed. Function to execute) and
When the specific response effect is executed over the number of the specific effect games, a special response corresponding to the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means even in a situation where the specific increase state has not ended. A special response execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3718, S3916, and step S3920 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing the effect (special addition effect), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature M1, when the specific increase state is reached in the predetermined game state, the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state is increased by the specific increase number each time the specific grant condition is satisfied, so that the player is specified. We expect it to increase. In addition, the number of games given in the specific increase state is once given as the number of non-notification target games, while when the specific increase state is set, the specific response effect is executed over the number of specific effect games. , It is possible to make the player expect how much the number of non-notification target games is increasing in the situation where the specific response effect is being executed. In addition, when the specific response effect is executed over the number of specific effect games, the special response effect corresponding to the number of non-notified target games at that time is executed even if the specific increase state is not completed. .. As a result, the player expects the content of the special response effect to be executed after that during the execution of the specific response effect. In addition, it is possible to start the special response effect earlier than in the configuration in which the special response effect is not executed until the specific increase state ends.

Feature M2. The specific increase state setting means terminates the specific increase state when the specific end condition is satisfied even before the specific production game number is consumed after the specific increase state is set. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature M1.

According to the feature M2, it is possible to generate a situation in which the specific increase state ends before the specific response effect is completed and a situation in which the specific increase state continues even after the specific response effect is completed.

Feature M3. In the special response executing means, as the special response effect, the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, is set to the number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the effect corresponding to the addition is executed.

According to the feature M3, as a special response effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of notification target games is executed. It is possible to increase the attention of the player.

Features M4. A plurality of selection means (in the production side MPU 92) for selecting a plurality of the transfer target games in one processing time of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means. A function for executing the processes of steps S3802 and S3803) is provided.
The special response executing means is a means for making the addition of the plurality of transition target games selected by the plurality of selection means to the number of notification target games performed in the special response effect executed at different timings ( The game machine according to feature M3, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S3721 and S3916 on the production side MPU 92).

According to the feature M4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M5. In the special response execution means, as one of the special response effects, the number of games is assigned to each of the plurality of games, and the total number of the assigned games is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The game machine according to feature M3 or M4, which is characterized by performing a number of effects.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M6. A means for increasing the number of games (a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state.
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the situation where the special response effect is executed, the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the fulfillment of the predetermined grant condition is the number of games to be notified. A means for additionally performing an effect corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding effect (a function of executing the process of step S3608 in the effect side MPU 92) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5.

According to the feature M6, even in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of notification target games due to an effect different from the increase in the number of notification target games due to the special response effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Feature M7. The special response executing means enables different special response effects to be executed even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6.

According to the feature M7, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M8. In the special response executing means, as the special response effect, the number of transfer target games, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, is set to the number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The effect corresponding to the addition is executed, and even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same, the said The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from a plurality of types of games that do not exceed the number of non-notification target games.

According to the feature M8, it is possible to diversify the generation mode of the number of games to be transferred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2808 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9), and
A predetermined end means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the fact that the number of continuous games remaining in the predetermined game state (value of the ART game number counter 121) becomes 0 in the predetermined game state. Function to execute the processing of S3403) and
A game number notification means (production) that notifies the number of games so that the player can recognize the number of games to be notified (value of the display counter 126) out of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. The function of executing the processes of steps S3506 and S3510 on the side MPU 92) and
A non-notification target storage means (stock game number counter 127) that stores the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state.
When the number of notification target games becomes 0 in a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, it is stored in the non-notification target storage means. When the number of non-notified target games is larger than the number of reference games at the end (first release reference value, second release reference value), the predetermined game state is different from the case where the number is less than the end reference game. With a continuous effect executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4106, S4110, and S4114 in the effect side MPU 92) to execute the continuous effect (first release effect, second release effect, third release effect). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature N1, even if the number of games to be notified is 0, the number of games to be notified is predetermined because there is a number of non-notification target games that are not notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. It is possible to make the player expect that the game state will be continued. In this case, if the number of non-notification target games is 0 games in a situation where the number of non-notification target games is 1 or more, it differs depending on whether or not the number of non-notification target games is equal to or more than the standard number of games at the end. In the mode, the continuous effect of the predetermined game state is executed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the continuous production according to the number of non-notification target games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature N2. The continuous effect executing means is the non-notification target when the number of notification target games becomes 0 in a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means. When the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage means is larger than the number of reference games at the end, the number of games that is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is set as the notification target game as the continuous effect. It is characterized in that it is provided with a game number notification execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4110 and S4114 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing an effect to be added to the number (second release effect, third release effect). The game machine according to the feature N1.

According to the feature N2, when the number of notification target games is 0 and the number of non-notification target games is equal to or more than the reference number of games at the end, the predetermined gaming state is still continued to some extent. In such a case, by notifying the player of at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the predetermined game state continues.

Feature N3. The continuous production execution means is
When the number of non-notification target games corresponds to one or more games in the non-notification target storage means and the number of notification target games becomes 0, the non-notification target storage means stores the games. When the number of non-notification target games is smaller than the number of reference games at the end, as the continuation effect, an effect of adding the entire number of non-notification target games to the number of notification target games (second release effect) is executed. The first continuous effect executing means (function of executing the process of step S4110 in the effect side MPU 92) and
When the number of non-notification target games corresponds to one or more games in the non-notification target storage means and the number of notification target games becomes 0, the non-notification target storage means stores the games. When the number of non-notification target games is larger than the number of reference games at the end, as the continuous effect, an effect of adding the number of transition target games, which is a part of the non-notification target games, to the notification target games (No. 1). A second continuous effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3414 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing the 3 emission effect), and
The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or N2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature N1 or N2.

According to the feature N3, when the number of games to be notified becomes 0, the player is relieved that the predetermined game state is continued by notifying the player of at least a part of the number of games to be notified. It becomes possible to give. In this case, if the number of non-notification target games is larger than the number of non-notification target games, only a part of the number of non-notification target games is notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the continuous production of the predetermined game state is executed, and makes the player expect that the predetermined game state will still continue even if the number of games to be notified approaches 0 games. Is possible.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the second continuous effect executing means selects the number of transition target games from a plurality of types of games within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games.

According to the feature N4, it is possible to diversify the number of games to be transferred.

Feature N5. The continuous effect executing means is the non-notification target when the number of notification target games becomes 0 in a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means. When the number of non-notified target games stored in the storage means is smaller than the number of reference games at the end, the predetermined number of continuous games in the predetermined game state is not notified to the player as the continuous effect. The feature N1 to N4 characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S4106 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing an effect (first release effect) for digesting the remaining number of continuous games in the game state. The game machine according to any one.

According to the feature N5, when the number of games to be notified is 0 and the number of non-notified games is less than the reference number of games at the end, the player is not notified of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the continuation of the predetermined gaming state from being lowered.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features N1 to N5, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature L group, the feature M group, and the feature N group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. The first lottery means (for example, the function of executing the transition lottery process for the false precursor state in the main MPU 72) that executes the first lottery process using the numerical information when the first lottery opportunity occurs, and
A second lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for a chance state in the main MPU 72) that executes a second lottery process using numerical information when a second lottery opportunity occurs, and
Predetermined storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is updated when an update opportunity occurs, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the numerical information of the predetermined storage means may be acquired by the first lottery means and may be acquired by the second lottery means.

According to the feature O1, the numerical information updated by the predetermined storage means is used in the first lottery process and is used in the second lottery process. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of means for storing the updated numerical information, and it is possible to simplify the configuration.

Feature O2. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for which numerical information is updated are provided, including the predetermined storage means.
This gaming machine is
Reference information storage means (random pointer of the main RAM 74) for storing specific reference information referred to for specifying the numerical information storage means for which numerical information is to be acquired, and
When the numerical information storage means corresponding to the specific reference information becomes the acquisition target of the numerical information, the specific reference information is updated so that the acquisition target of the numerical information becomes the numerical information storage means in the following order. Means (function to execute the processes of steps S509 to S511 in the main MPU 72) and
With
When the first lottery opportunity occurs, the first lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the specific reference information, and obtains numerical information.
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the specific reference information when the second lottery trigger occurs.

According to the feature O2, since the plurality of numerical information storage means are the acquisition targets of the numerical information in a predetermined order, it is possible to prevent the acquisition target of the numerical information from being biased to one numerical information storage means. It will be possible. In addition, since the configuration is such that the numerical information is acquired from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the reference information for identification, the processing configuration for specifying the numerical information storage means for which the numerical information is to be acquired is not complicated. It becomes possible to do.

Feature O3. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for which numerical information is updated are provided, including the predetermined storage means.
There are a plurality of acquisition target lottery means for acquiring numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means, including the first lottery means and the second lottery means.
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the number of the lottery means to be acquired is larger than the number of the numerical information storage means.

According to the feature O3, since the number of lottery processes for acquiring numerical information from a plurality of numerical information storage means is larger than the number of numerical information storage means, the increase of the numerical information storage means is suppressed. It is possible to increase the number of lottery processes.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to feature O3, wherein the number of the numerical information storage means is at least the maximum number of the acquisition target lottery means to be executed in one game.

According to feature O4, since the number of numerical information storage means is equal to or greater than the maximum number of acquisition target lottery processes to be executed in one game, a plurality of numerical information storage means can be used in a plurality of acquisition target lottery processes. In a jointly used configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the same numerical information storage means from being used in a plurality of lottery processes in one game.

Feature O5. Another numerical information storage means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a), which is provided separately from the predetermined storage means and whose numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs,
Another lottery means (a function to execute the processes of steps S601 to S613 in the main MPU 72) that executes another lottery process using the numerical information acquired from the other numerical information storage means when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, characterized in that

According to the feature O5, in the separate lottery process, numerical information is acquired from another numerical information storage means provided separately from the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to strictly perform the separate lottery process.

Feature O6. Numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is acquired in each of the first lottery means and the second lottery means and the numerical information is updated when an update opportunity occurs. Is provided, including the predetermined storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the plurality of numerical information storage means all have the same number of bits.

According to the feature O6, since the plurality of numerical information storage means jointly used in the plurality of lottery processes all have the same number of bits, even if any numerical information storage means is used in one lottery process. Numerical information with the same number of bits can be acquired and used.

Feature O7. When the first lottery opportunity occurs, the first lottery means acquires numerical information from one of the numerical information storage means, and obtains numerical information.
The gaming machine according to feature O6, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from a plurality of the numerical information storage means when the second lottery opportunity occurs.

According to the feature O7, even if the lottery means uses numerical information having different numbers of bits in the lottery process, it is possible to use a plurality of numerical information storage means jointly with other lottery means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features O1 to O7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic P group>
Features P1. The first specific lottery means (the first in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process (additional lottery process) by collating the numerical information acquired when the acquisition opportunity occurs with the first lottery information group (first additional table 141). 1 Function to execute the additional lottery process using the additional table 141) and
The second specific lottery means (the second specific lottery means in the main MPU 72) that executes the lottery process (additional lottery process) by collating the numerical information acquired when the acquisition opportunity occurs with the second lottery information group (second additional table 142). 2 A function to execute an additional lottery process using the additional table 142) and
With
The first lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (additional index) and
Lottery correspondence information (number of winning random numbers) that is set corresponding to the identification information and enables the first specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. When,
Have and
The second lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (additional index) and
Lottery correspondence information (number of winning random numbers) that is set corresponding to the identification information and enables the second specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. When,
Have and
The same information is set as the plurality of identification information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group.
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information among the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. Has been
In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means.
This gaming machine is
An information storage means (main side ROM 73) that stores a correspondence information group (index correspondence table 145) in which lottery result information (number of additional games) is set in correspondence with each of the plurality of identification information.
Information grasping means for grasping the lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected by the first specific lottery means or the second specific lottery means from the corresponding information group (execution of the process of step S5408 in the main MPU 72). Function to do) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature P1, when the first lottery information group is referred to, the predetermined identification information is selected in the first lottery information group even though the predetermined identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. A plurality of identification information is set so as to be the same as the second lottery information group including. Further, the corresponding information group in which the lottery result information is set corresponding to each of the plurality of identification information is stored in the information storage means, and the lottery process of the first specific lottery means or the lottery process of the second specific lottery means is performed. The lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected in is grasped from the corresponding information group. With this configuration, it is not necessary to store the corresponding information group corresponding to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in the information storage means, so that the information storage means stores the corresponding information group. It is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature P2. The plurality of identification information is set to be a serial number.
The lottery process is characterized in that a determination process (processing of steps S5504 to S5506 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not to select each identification information as a lottery result according to the numerical order of the plurality of identification information is executed. Feature The gaming machine described in P1.

According to the feature P2, since the identification information is set in a serial number, the lottery process can be preferably performed. In this case, if the identification information is treated as different information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the corresponding information group corresponds to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group. It will be necessary to prepare. On the other hand, since the same identification information is set in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group with the configuration of the above feature P1, the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group It is possible to standardize the corresponding information group.

Feature P3. In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means. Has been
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature P1 or P2.

According to the feature P3, the same identification information is set even though the identification information not selected in the lottery process is different between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group. It is possible to standardize the corresponding information group between the lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P4. The information storage means stores the first compressed information (first compressed data 146) corresponding to the first lottery information group, and stores the first compressed information (first compressed data 146).
The game machine includes means for generating the first lottery information group by executing a decompression process on the first compressed information (a function of executing the processes of steps S5402 to S5404 in the main MPU 72).
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, wherein the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is not set in the first compression information.

According to the feature P4, even if the first lottery information group is set with the predetermined identification information that is not selected in the lottery process, the first compressed information corresponding to the first lottery information group is the predetermined identification information. Corresponding lottery correspondence information is not set. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity of the information required for using the first lottery information group.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features P1 to P4, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature O group and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably performing a lottery is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Features Q1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, the history storage execution means (in the main MPU 72) that stores the history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (total number of games counter 74a, advantageous game number counter 74b). (Function to execute the process of steps S4701 to S4704) and
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S4707 in the main MPU 72) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, and
Information display control means (step S4708 in the main MPU 72) that displays and controls the information display means (combined display unit 66, advantageous section display unit 67) so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. (Function to execute the processing of) and
With
The information display control means executes the process of step S4710 in the main MPU 72 so that the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the termination trigger. A game machine characterized by having a function).

According to the feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event. In addition, the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the termination opportunity. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being displayed by the information display means in a situation where it is not necessary to display the mode information.

Features Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein a plurality of types of termination triggers exist.

According to the feature Q2, since there are a plurality of types of termination triggers, it is possible to improve the operability when terminating the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means.

Features Q3. The information display control means executes the process of step S4708 in the main MPU 72 so that the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is started based on the occurrence of the start trigger. Function)
The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the start trigger is one type.

According to the feature Q3, since there is only one type of start trigger, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means from being unintentionally started.

Features Q4. The end control means has a corresponding event (output of ON signal of start detection sensor 41a, output of ON signal of insertion medal detection sensor 45a, output of credit insertion detection sensor 47a) that can occur in order to satisfy the condition for starting the game. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, wherein it is specified that the termination trigger has occurred based on the occurrence of the ON signal output of ~ 49a).

According to the feature Q4, since the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the target event that may occur when the game is started, the mode information is displayed by the information display means. It is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is.

Features Q5. Predetermined output means (start detection sensor 41a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a) that are in a predetermined output state when a corresponding event occurs, and
Means for executing effective response control based on the predetermined output state in the effective state (function for executing the process of step S402 in the main MPU 72, affirmative determination in step S404 in the main MPU 72) Function) and
With
Any of the features Q1 to Q4, wherein the end control means identifies that the end trigger has occurred based on the fact that the predetermined output means has reached the predetermined output state in a situation other than the effective state. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature Q5, even if the situation is not in the valid state, the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is terminated when the predetermined output means is in the predetermined output state, so that the valid state is not waited for. However, it is possible to end the display corresponding to the mode information.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features Q1 to Q5, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature Q group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the game machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic R group>
Feature R1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and
A pattern that starts the variation display of the pattern based on the occurrence of the variation start trigger, and controls the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function to execute reel control processing on the main MPU 72) and
With
In the pattern display control means, the fluctuation start trigger does not occur when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is being executed. Resuming response means for initiating the variable display of the pattern (in the first embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in steps S103 and S112 in the main MPU 72, in the tenth embodiment, step S6303 in the main MPU 72 and It has a function to make a negative judgment in step S6312).
The game machine controls the stop by the operation of the stop operation means when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted at least in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed. Stop regulating means for restricting execution (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S116 and S117 in the main MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, executing the process of step S6316 in the main MPU 72). A game machine characterized by having a function to operate.

According to the feature R1, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the fluctuation display of the pattern is being executed, the pattern is displayed even if the fluctuation start trigger does not occur when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter. The variable display is started. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the variable display of the pattern from being invalidated by stopping the supply of operating power. Further, when the variable display of the pattern is newly started when the supply of the operating power is restarted in this way, the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means is restricted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted while the stop operating means is operated, the stop control of the pattern is executed immediately after the variable display of the pattern is started. It is possible to prevent it from being done. If the pattern stop control is executed immediately after the pattern variation display is started, the pattern variation display may not be performed normally, but the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means is restricted as described above. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

Feature R2. The pattern display control means
Acceleration means (a function of executing acceleration processing in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72) that causes an acceleration period when the variation display of the pattern is started, and
Means for setting constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (a function of executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72) and
Means for generating a constant speed period so that the pattern is variablely displayed at a constant speed when the constant speed correspondence information is set in the constant speed correspondence storage area (a function of executing the process of step S1110 in the main MPU 72). )When,
When the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area, the constant speed correspondence information is stored in the constant speed correspondence storage area without executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated. Is set as a means for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S801 of the main MPU 72 and executing processing after step S803). ,
With
The stop regulating means is described in the situation after the supply of the operating power is restarted when the trigger for stopping the supply of the operating power occurs in the situation where the constant speed corresponding information is set in the storage area corresponding to the constant speed. The constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area.
The accelerating means is characterized in that the acceleration period is generated when the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area in a situation where the variation display of the pattern should be executed. The gaming machine described in R1.

According to the feature R2, when the variable display of the pattern is started, the acceleration period first occurs, and then the constant speed period occurs. Then, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled by setting the constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed period. As a result, the stop control of the picture is executed in the situation where the picture is variablely displayed at a constant speed, and the stop control of the picture can be appropriately performed. In this case, if the trigger to stop the supply of operating power occurs in the situation where the constant speed correspondence information is set, the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the situation after the supply of operating power is restarted. It has become. Then, if the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed, the acceleration period is set. As a result, the operation of the stop operation means is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being executed by using the constant speed correspondence information. It is possible to newly start the variable display of the pattern while disabling.

Feature R3. An information storage means (main side RAM 74) having the constant speed compatible storage area and storing various information, and
Information erasing means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the erasing condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (processing of steps S104 and S113 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
With
The stop regulating means erases the information when the supply of the operating power is stopped when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding storage area, or when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Even if the information is not erased by the means, the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area in the situation after the supply of the operating power is restarted. The gaming machine according to the feature R2.

According to the feature R3, when the supply of the operating power is stopped when the constant speed correspondence information is set, the information of the information storage means is used by the information erasing means when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if is not deleted, the constant speed correspondence information is not set. Then, if the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed, the acceleration period is set. As a result, the operation of the stop operation means is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being executed by using the constant speed correspondence information. It is possible to newly start the variable display of the pattern while disabling.

Feature R4. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the stop regulating means is in a state in which the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area when the supply of operating power is started. ..

According to the feature R4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the constant speed correspondence information is set, the constant speed correspondence information is not set when the supply of the operating power is restarted. To. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the constant speed correspondence information is not set when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature R5. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the stop regulating means is in a state in which the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area when the supply of operating power is stopped. ..

According to the feature R5, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the constant speed correspondence information is set, the constant speed correspondence information is not set at that time. As a result, it is possible to set the constant speed correspondence information not set when the supply of the operating power is restarted without executing a special process when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature R6. The pattern display control means
Confirmation means for executing confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop operation means is operated based on the occurrence of the confirmation trigger (executes the stop operation determination process of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment). Function) and
History storage executing means (steps S6103 to step S6103 in the main MPU 72) so that the information of the confirmation result of the confirmation process in the previous processing time is stored in the history storage means (history areas 181 to 183) as predetermined history information. (Function to execute the process of S6106) and
Based on the fact that it is confirmed in the confirmation process that the stop operation means is operated in a situation where the predetermined history information is information corresponding to the confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means is not operated. , A means for stopping the variable display of the pattern (a function of executing the process of step S6108 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The stop regulating means executes the confirmation process after the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted at least in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined history information is information corresponding to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means is operated in the situation.

According to the feature R6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being executed, the supply of the operating power is restarted and the predetermined history information is stopped when the confirmation process is executed. The information corresponds to the confirmation result indicating that the means is being operated. Stop control of the variation display of the pattern based on the confirmation processing that the stop operation means is operated in the situation where the predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is not operated is stored. Is executed, so if the predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is operated when the confirmation process is executed as described above is stored, the stop operation means is operated. Even if it is confirmed by the confirmation process, the stop control of the variable display of the pattern is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above only by adjusting the content of the predetermined history information.

Feature R7. The pattern display control means
Acceleration means (a function of executing acceleration processing in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72) that causes an acceleration period when the variation display of the pattern is started, and
Means for setting constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (a function of executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72) and
Means for generating a constant speed period so that the pattern is variablely displayed at a constant speed when the constant speed correspondence information is set in the constant speed correspondence storage area (a function of executing the process of step S1110 in the main MPU 72). )When,
When the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area, the constant speed correspondence information is stored in the constant speed correspondence storage area without executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated. Is set as a means for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S801 of the main MPU 72 and executing processing after step S803). ,
Means (in the main MPU 72) for preventing the constant speed correspondence information from being set in the constant speed correspondence storage area when it is specified that the fluctuation display of the pattern is not normally performed. (Function to execute the process of step S6202) and
With
The accelerating means is characterized in that the acceleration period is generated when the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area in a situation where the variation display of the pattern should be executed. The gaming machine described in R6.

According to the feature R7, when the variable display of the pattern is started, the acceleration period first occurs, and then the constant speed period occurs. Then, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled by setting the constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed period. As a result, the stop control of the picture is executed in the situation where the picture is variablely displayed at a constant speed, and the stop control of the picture can be appropriately performed. In addition, when it is specified that the variable display of the pattern is not performed normally, it is considered that the constant speed correspondence information is not set, and the constant speed correspondence is performed in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed. If no information is set, it will be the acceleration period. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the constant speed correspondence information is set, if the supply of the operating power is restarted, the stop operation means is operated when the subsequent confirmation process is executed. Since the predetermined history information indicating that the power is stored is stored, the operation of the stop operation means is substantially invalidated. Then, in a situation where the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated, it is possible to make it possible that the constant speed correspondence information is not set and it is possible to make it possible to newly start the acceleration period. It becomes.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features R1 to R7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature R group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which a display device or a rotating body is used to execute a variable display of a pattern.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, so that the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the pattern after the rotation of the reel is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform variable display of a pattern, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic S group>
Features S1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern, and
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The pattern display that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the occurrence of the stop trigger. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
The prize-winning control means (in the main MPU 72) that executes the prize-winning control based on the stop result of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination when the variation display of the pattern is stopped. (Function to execute the process of step S410) and
A first predetermined lottery execution means (a function of constantly executing a lottery process on the main MPU 72) that executes a first predetermined lottery process regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.
Predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege (granting the number of additional games) to the player based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process (in the first embodiment, step S3109 in the main MPU 72). A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step S6411 in the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S6511 in the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature S1, the lottery process of the combination is executed based on the operation of the start operation means, the variation display of the pattern is started, and the result of the lottery process of the combination when the variation display of the pattern is stopped. The winning correspondence control is executed based on the stop result of the pattern corresponding to. Therefore, the player plays the game while paying attention to the stop result of the variable display of the pattern. In this case, the first predetermined lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, and the predetermined privilege is given based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which a predetermined privilege is given in a manner that does not depend on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. Therefore, even if the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is not the desired result, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined privilege will be given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Feature S2. The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process by using the numerical information acquired based on the operation of the starting operation means.
The feature S1 is characterized in that the first predetermined lottery execution means executes the first predetermined lottery process by using numerical information acquired based on the operation of the start operation means. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature S2, even if the first predetermined lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process of the combination, the lottery process of the combination is triggered by the acquisition of the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process. It is possible to make it common by the operation of the start operation means as well as the acquisition opportunity of the numerical information used at the time. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above without complicating the opportunity to acquire the numerical information.

Feature S3. Numerical information updating means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a, third dedicated random number circuit 102c) different from the numerical information used in the lottery process of the winning combination and the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature S2, which is characterized by the numerical information updated by.

According to the feature S3, the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process is updated by the numerical information updating means different from the numerical information updating means for updating the numerical information used in the winning combination lottery process. .. As a result, the result of the first predetermined lottery process can be made completely independent of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

Features S4. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3, wherein the first predetermined lottery execution means executes the first predetermined lottery process in each game at least in a specific situation (ART state ST9).

According to the feature S4, since the first predetermined lottery process is executed in each game at least in a specific situation, in at least in a specific situation, a predetermined privilege is given in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It is possible to make people expect.

Feature S5. A second predetermined lottery execution means for executing a second predetermined lottery process in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3102 to S3104 in the main MPU 72, the first The eleventh embodiment has a function of executing the processes of steps S6402 to S6404 in the main MPU 72, and the twelfth embodiment has a function of executing the processes of steps S6502 to S6504 in the main MPU 72).
The predetermined privilege granting means grants the predetermined privilege based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process, and the predetermined privilege is given based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S4, which is characterized in that a privilege is given.

According to the feature S5, it is possible to create a situation in which a predetermined privilege is given regardless of the result of the lottery process of the combination and a situation in which the predetermined privilege is given in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. Will be. As a result, the player expects that the predetermined privilege is given according to the result of the lottery process of the role, and is expected that the predetermined privilege is given regardless of the result of the lottery process of the role. ..

Feature S6. The advantage of the predetermined privilege given based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process is given based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature S5, which is characterized in that it tends to be lower or lower than the advantage of the privilege.

According to the feature S6, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination with respect to the granting of the predetermined benefit, and even if the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination is not the desired result, the predetermined benefit is given. Can be expected from the player.

Feature S7. When the predetermined privilege is granted based on the winning result obtained in the second predetermined lottery process, the predetermined privilege granting means may have won the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature S5 or S6, wherein the predetermined privilege is not given as a trigger of the winning result.

According to the feature S7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while preventing the predetermined privilege from being excessively given.

Feature S8. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S105 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The second predetermined lottery execution means is based on winning a specific combination having the same winning probability regardless of the set values of the plurality of stages in the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features S5 to S7, characterized in that

According to the feature S8, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege while making it difficult to predict the set value.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features S1 to S8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature S group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which a display device or a rotating body is used to execute a variable display of a pattern.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, so that the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the pattern after the rotation of the reel is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic T group>
Features T1. Random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information, and
A function of executing the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the thirteenth, in which the specific random number information is stored in the lottery storage area (acquisition random number counter 74e) when the acquisition trigger occurs. In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S6604 in the main MPU 72) and
Information updating means for updating lottery value information to the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 72, thirteenth In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main MPU 72) and
By updating the lottery value information for the lottery storage area, the numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information of the lottery storage area is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other. Winning correspondence execution means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 and step S2108 in the main MPU 72, in the thirteenth embodiment, step S6608 and step S6608 in the main MPU 72) (Function to execute the process of step S6609) and
With
The lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific random number information has a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the feature T1, the lottery value information is updated for the lottery storage area, so that the numerical information of the lottery storage area is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other. In the configuration in which the winning correspondence process is executed when the numerical information is to be obtained, the lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits, whereas the specific random number information has a specific number of bits less than the predetermined number of bits. ing. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the winning correspondence process is executed 100%, numerical information having a value larger than the maximum value according to the specific number of bits may be used as the lottery value information. It is possible to limit the number of bits to a predetermined range of bits. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably executed.

Feature T2. The information updating means is for deriving the numerical information as a result of subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area.
The winning response execution means changes the numerical information of the result derived by the information updating means to the result after the numerical information of the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by subtracting the lottery value information. The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein the winning correspondence process is executed when the corresponding numerical information is obtained.

According to the feature T2, since the specific random number information is set to a specific number of bits less than a predetermined number of bits in a configuration in which the numerical information is updated by a subtraction formula at the time of lottery, the maximum number of lottery value information is based on the specific number of bits. It is possible to create a situation in which the winning correspondence process is 100% executed only by using the numerical information having a value larger than the value.

Feature T3. As the lottery value information, the first lottery value information (the information of "9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is larger than the maximum value due to the specific number of bits. The lottery value information corresponding to the winning number, the lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers "9" to "16" in the lottery table 113 for high probability), and the information of the predetermined number of bits, which is based on the specific number of bits. Second lottery value information that is less than or equal to the maximum value (lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers of "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery table for high probability The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the lottery value information (lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers of "4" to "8" in 113) and is present.

According to the feature T3, it is possible to execute 100% of the winning correspondence processing by using the first lottery value information, and by using the second lottery value information, the winning is performed according to the specific random number information. It is possible to ensure that both the situation in which the corresponding process is executed and the situation in which the corresponding process is not executed occur.

Feature T4. The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, wherein the specific number of bits is one bit less than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the feature T4, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making the numerical range that can be taken as the specific random number information as large as possible.

Feature T5. The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4, wherein the predetermined number of bits is a number of bits corresponding to a predetermined byte.

According to the feature T5, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while enabling the handling of numerical information in byte units.

Feature T6. The information updating means is
Numerical information as a result of adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored is derived. First derivation means (function to execute the process of step S6605 in the main MPU 72) and
A function of executing the process of step S6607 in the second derivation means (main side MPU 72) that derives the numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means. )When,
With
The winning corresponding execution means is the result after the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by adding the lottery value information to the numerical information of the lottery storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T5, characterized in that the winning correspondence process is executed when the numerical information corresponding to is obtained.

According to the feature T6, since the numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information as a result of adding the specific numerical information to the specific random information is derived, the specific random information is a predetermined bit. Even if the number of specific bits is smaller than the number, it is possible to realize the lottery by the addition formula.

Feature T7. As for the specific numerical information, regardless of the numerical information of the specific random number information, the numerical information of the result derived by the first derivation means is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value of the numerical information of the lottery storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6, which is set so as not to provide numerical information corresponding to the result after the change.

According to the feature T7, it is possible to prevent the numerical information corresponding to the winning result from being derived only by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information.

Feature T8. Multiple types of lottery value information are set,
As for the specific numerical information, regardless of the type of lottery value information, the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value of the numerical information of the lottery storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6 or T7, which is set so as to be numerical information corresponding to the result after being played.

According to the feature T8, it is possible to derive the numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of which type of lottery value information is used.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features T1 to T8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic U group>
Features U1. Random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information, and
Random number acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S6604 in the main MPU 72) for storing the specific random number information in the lottery storage area (acquisition random number counter 74e) when an acquisition opportunity occurs, and
Numerical information as a result of adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored is derived. First derivation means (function to execute the process of step S6605 in the main MPU 72) and
A second derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main MPU 72) so that the numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means is derived. When,
The numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means becomes the numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information of the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by the addition of the lottery value information. Winning correspondence execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S6608 and step S6609 in the main MPU 72) and the winning correspondence execution means which executes the winning correspondence processing in the case of
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature U1, the numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information as a result of adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information is derived, and the numerical information is the numerical information of the lottery storage area. When is the numerical information corresponding to the result after the maximum value is changed to the minimum value, the winning correspondence process is executed. As a result, even if the number of bits of the specific random number information is smaller than the number of bits of the lottery storage area, the lottery by the addition formula can be appropriately performed. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably executed.

Features U2. The lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits.
The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific random number information has a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the feature U2, the lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits, whereas the specific random number information has a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the winning correspondence process is executed 100%, numerical information having a value larger than the maximum value according to the specific number of bits may be used as the lottery value information. It is possible to limit the number of bits to a predetermined range of bits. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably executed.

Features U3. As the lottery value information, the first lottery value information (the information of "9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is larger than the maximum value due to the specific number of bits. The lottery value information corresponding to the winning number, the lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers "9" to "16" in the lottery table 113 for high probability), and the information of the predetermined number of bits, which is based on the specific number of bits. Second lottery value information that is less than or equal to the maximum value (lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers of "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery table for high probability The gaming machine according to feature U2, characterized in that (lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers of "4" to "8" in 113) and are present.

According to the feature U3, it is possible to execute 100% of the winning correspondence processing by using the first lottery value information, and by using the second lottery value information, the winning is performed according to the specific random number information. It is possible to ensure that both the situation in which the corresponding process is executed and the situation in which the corresponding process is not executed occur.

Features U4. The gaming machine according to feature U2 or U3, wherein the specific number of bits is one bit less than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the feature U4, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making the numerical range that can be taken as the specific random number information as large as possible.

Features U5. The gaming machine according to any one of features U2 to U4, wherein the predetermined number of bits is a number of bits corresponding to a predetermined byte.

According to the feature U5, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while enabling the handling of numerical information in byte units.

Features U6. As for the specific numerical information, regardless of the numerical information of the specific random number information, the numerical information of the result derived by the first derivation means changes from the maximum value to the minimum value of the numerical information of the lottery storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U5, which is set so as not to provide numerical information corresponding to the result after the change.

According to the feature U6, it is possible to prevent the numerical information corresponding to the winning result from being derived only by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information.

Features U7. Multiple types of lottery value information are set,
As for the specific numerical information, regardless of the type of lottery value information, the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value of the numerical information of the lottery storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U6, characterized in that it is set so as to be numerical information corresponding to the result after being performed.

According to the feature U7, it is possible to derive the numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of which type of lottery value information is used.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features U1 to U7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature T group and the feature U group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which a display device or a rotating body is used to execute a variable display of a pattern.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, so that the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the pattern after the rotation of the reel is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform a lottery process, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic V group>
Features V1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for displaying variable patterns of a pattern, and
The acceleration period of the variation display of the pattern in one of the plurality of variation display areas is generated, and after the acceleration period ends, the acceleration period of the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area in the next order is set. Acceleration means to generate (function to execute the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 and the processing of steps S121-10 to S1211 in the main MPU 72) and
At least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variation display area to the start of the acceleration period in the variation display area in the next order is determined. A period determining means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1204 to S1207 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature V1, the variation display of the pattern may be started so that the acceleration period in the variation display region in the next order is started after the acceleration period in one variation display region ends. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize how the variable display of the pattern is sequentially started. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the starting mode when the variable display of the pattern is sequentially started. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern.

Feature V2. It is provided with a picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for starting the change display of the picture in a plurality of the change display areas based on the occurrence of the change start trigger.
As the fluctuation start trigger, the first fluctuation start trigger (a situation in which "1" is not set in the reel effect winning flag) and the second fluctuation start trigger (a situation in which "1" is set in the reel effect winning flag) are Exists and
The pattern display control means
Based on the occurrence of the first variation start trigger, the first pattern display control means for causing the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas without causing the period determination means to determine the waiting period. (Function to execute the processes of steps S904 to S907 in the main MPU 72) and
Based on the occurrence of the second variation start trigger, the second pattern display control means for causing the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination regarding the waiting period by the period determination means. (A function of executing the processes of steps S908 to S911 in the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative judgment in step S916 of the main MPU 72).
The gaming machine according to the feature V1, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature V2, when the first fluctuation start trigger occurs, the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in a plurality of fluctuation display areas without determining the waiting period, and when the second fluctuation start trigger occurs. Is a variable display of a pattern in a plurality of variable display areas in a manner corresponding to a decision regarding a waiting period. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern.

Feature V3. The second pattern display control means causes the pattern display means to perform a specific variation display (reel effect) by the pattern based on the occurrence of the second variation start trigger, and after the specific variation display is completed. The gaming machine according to the feature V2, wherein the variable display of the pattern is performed in a plurality of the variable display regions in a mode corresponding to the determination of the waiting period by the period determining means.

According to the feature V3, when the second fluctuation start trigger occurs, the fluctuation display of the pattern is restarted after the specific fluctuation display is performed. This makes it possible to give unexpectedness to the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern. Further, when the variation display of the pattern is restarted after the specific variation display is performed, the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is performed in a manner corresponding to the determination regarding the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern when the variable display of the pattern is restarted after the specific variable display is performed.

Feature V4. When the acceleration period in the one variation display area is started, the period determination means has a waiting period until the acceleration period in the one variation display area is started and waits for a predetermined start trigger. When at least one of the lengths of the period is determined and the acceleration period in the variation display area of the next order is started, the variation of the next order after the acceleration period in the one variation display area ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein at least one of the presence / absence of a waiting period until the acceleration period is started in the display area and the length of the waiting period is determined.

According to the feature V4, when the variable display of the pattern in one variable display area is started, the period from a predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in one variable display area can be changed. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area of the next order is started, the acceleration period in the variable display area of the next order is started from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area. The period can fluctuate. As a result, it is possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period is started for each of one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, when the variable display of the pattern is started sequentially. It is possible to diversify the starting mode in.

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4, wherein the period determining means determines at least one of the presence / absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period by a standby lottery process.

According to the feature V5, since at least one of the presence / absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, it is possible to make the determination mode of the waiting period irregular.

Feature V6. Equipped with a predetermined numerical value updating means (random number counter) for updating predetermined numerical value information
The period determination means
The process of step S1205 is executed when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3", which is the first acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined numerical information when the acceleration period in the one fluctuation display area is started. Function to do) and
Using the predetermined numerical information acquired by the first acquisition means, the presence / absence of a waiting period until the acceleration period in the one variation display area is started and the length of the waiting period with respect to the predetermined start trigger. A first determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3") for determining at least one of them by lottery.
The process of step S1205 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2", the second acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined numerical information when starting the acceleration period in the variation display area in the next order. Function to execute) and
Using the predetermined numerical information acquired by the second acquisition means, from the end of the acceleration period in the one fluctuation display area to the start of the acceleration period in the fluctuation display area in the next order. Second determination means for determining at least one of the presence / absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period by lottery (a function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2". )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5.

According to the feature V6, when the variable display of the pattern in the one variable display area is started, the period from the predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in the one variable display area can be changed. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area of the next order is started, the acceleration period in the variable display area of the next order is started from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area. The period can fluctuate. As a result, it is possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period is started for each of one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, when the variable display of the pattern is started sequentially. It is possible to diversify the starting mode in. Further, since at least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, it is possible to make the determination mode of the waiting period irregular. Further, a common predetermined numerical value updating means is used regardless of whether the waiting period for one variable display area or the waiting period for the variable display area in the next order is determined. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the configuration.

Feature V7. The feature V6 is characterized in that the period required for the predetermined numerical value updating means to update the predetermined numerical value information once is shorter than the period required for the acceleration period in the one variation display region to be completed. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature V7, in a configuration in which a common predetermined numerical value updating means is used regardless of whether the waiting period for one variable display area or the waiting period for the next variable display area is determined. The lottery for each waiting period can be performed independently.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features V1 to V7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to 1 H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature V group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section are provided as dish storage sections. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which a display device or a rotating body is used to execute a variable display of a pattern.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, so that the variable display of the pattern is started, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the pattern after the rotation of the reel is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 41 ... Start lever, 41a ... Start detection sensor, 42-44 ... Stop button, 45a ... Insert medal detection sensor, 47a-49a ... Credit insertion detection sensor, 72 ... Main MPU, 73 ... Main side ROM, 74 ... Main side RAM, 74a ... Total number of games counter, 74b ... Advantageous game number counter, 74c ... Constant speed flag, 74e ... Acquisition random number counter, 92 ... Directing side MPU, 93 ... Directing side ROM, 94 ... Directing side RAM, 101a-101l ... 1st to 12th shared random number circuits, 102a ... 1st dedicated random number circuit, 102c ... 3rd dedicated random number circuit, 102d ... 4th dedicated random number circuit, 111 ... Offset table, 112 ... Low probability lottery table, 113 ... High probability lottery table, 121 ... ART game number counter, 126 ... Display counter, 127 ... Stock game number counter, 132 ... Transition condition game number counter, 141 ... 1st addition table , 142 ... Second addition table, 145 ... Index compatible table, 146 ... First compressed data, 181 ... Left history area, 182 ... Middle history area, 183 ... Right history area.

Claims (1)

Random number update means to update specific random number information,
A random number acquisition means for storing the specific random number information in the lottery storage area when an acquisition opportunity occurs, and
An information updating means for deriving the numerical information as a result of subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored.
The numerical information of the result derived by the information updating means corresponds to the result after being changed from the minimum value to the maximum value by subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information of the lottery storage area. When the numerical information is obtained, the information in the predetermined storage area is set to be the predetermined information, and the numerical information as a result derived by the information updating means is obtained by subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information in the lottery storage area. When the numerical information corresponding to the result of not changing from the minimum value to the maximum value due to the execution is obtained, the means for making the information in the predetermined storage area the specific information, and
A means for executing a winning correspondence process for giving a predetermined privilege to a player when the information in the predetermined storage area is the predetermined information when the subtraction is performed .
With
The lottery storage area is an area having a predetermined number of bits.
The specific random information Ri certain number of bits der smaller than the number of said predetermined bits,
As the lottery value information,
The first lottery value information, which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is larger than the maximum value due to the specific number of bits, and
The second lottery value information which is the information of the predetermined number of bits and is equal to or less than the maximum value according to the specific number of bits, and
A gaming machine characterized by the existence of.

Images